initial commit of ebook 28899HEADmain

1 files changed, 8729 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/28899.txt b/28899.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64abc0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/28899.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8729 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898--Volume
+39 of 55, by Various
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898--Volume 39 of 55
+       Explorations by Early Navigators, Descriptions of the
+       Islands and Their Peoples, Their History and Records of
+       The Catholic Missions, As Related in Contemporaneous Books
+       and Manuscripts, Showing the Political, Economic, Commercial
+       and Religious Conditions of Those Islands from Their
+       Earliest Relations with European Nations to the Close of
+       the Nineteenth Century, Volume XXXIX: 1683-1690
+
+Author: Various
+
+Editor: E. H. Blair
+
+Release Date: May 21, 2009 [EBook #28899]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE IS., 1493-1898 (39/55) ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                   The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898
+
+   Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and
+   their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions,
+    as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the
+   political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those
+   islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the
+                    close of the nineteenth century,
+
+                        Volume XXXIX, 1683-1690
+
+
+
+ Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson
+  with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord
+                                Bourne.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXXIX
+
+
+    Preface                                                       9
+
+    Miscellaneous Documents, 1683-1690
+
+        Dampier in the Philippines (concluded). William
+        Dampier; London, 1697                                    21
+        Petition for Dominican missionaries. Francisco de
+        Villalva; [Madrid, 1687?]                               122
+        Events in Filipinas, 1686-88. [Unsigned and undated.]   131
+        The Pardo controversy. Juan Sanchez, and others;
+        Manila, 1683-89                                         149
+        Official visitation by Valdivia. [Unsigned; Manila,
+        1689-90.]                                               276
+
+    Bibliographical Data                                        303
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+    View of the city of Manila; photographic facsimile of
+    engraving in Dampier's Nouveau voyage autour du monde
+    (French trans., Amsterdam, 1698) between pp. 434 and
+    435; from copy in Library of Congress                        89
+
+    Map of the Philippine Islands; photographic facsimile
+    from Pierre du Val's La geographie universelle, "Isles
+    Philippines" (Paris, 1682), between pp. 306 and 307;
+    from copy of original map in Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris  129
+
+    Autograph signature of Pedro Murillo Velarde, S.J.;
+    photographic facsimile from original manuscript in Archivo
+    general de Indias, Sevilla                                  195
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+The present volume, which covers the period 1683-90, is mainly
+devoted to an account of the controversy between Archbishop Pardo
+and the religious orders on one side, and the secular government on
+the other--a conflict of which such events as the disputes between
+Salazar and Dasmarinas (1591) and Guerrero and Corcuera (1635-36)
+were but preliminary skirmishes. In this case the archbishop gains
+the ascendency, being reenforced by one of the governors.
+
+Dampier's account of his sojourn in the islands is here concluded from
+the preceding volume. He finds the Mindanaos friendly to the English,
+but distrustful of the Dutch and Spaniards. They are ingenious and
+clever in metal-work, and with very primitive tools and appliances
+make excellent utensils and ship-repairs; another industry of
+theirs is shipbuilding. The English ship remains about a week on the
+southern shore of Mindanao, to wait for favorable weather, and then
+proceeds to the Rio Grande of Mindanao, where it arrives July 18. The
+natives there are anxious to secure trade with the English merchants,
+and Dampier regrets that his companions did not resolve to give up
+freebooting for Spice-Island trade, especially as they were so well
+fitted, by experience and training, for establishing a trading-post,
+and had an excellent equipment for that purpose. The English officers
+maintain friendly intercourse with the natives, which enables them
+to see much of Malay life and customs. Some of the English sailors
+desert here, some are poisoned by the natives, and most of the crew
+become drunken and disaffected. The captain neglects to discipline
+them, and finally the crew sail away with their ship and leave him
+(January 14, 1687), with thirty-six of his men, at Mindanao. They
+halt at Guimaras Island to "scrub" their ship and lay in water; then
+(February 10) sail northward past Panay. At Mindoro they encounter
+some Indians, from whom they gain information as to the commerce of
+Manila, which they intend to attack and pillage. On February 23, the
+English begin their piratical acts in the Philippines by capturing a
+Spanish bark, near the coast of Luzon. After describing that island,
+he relates how some of the English sailors left at Mindanao find
+their way to Manila. The men on Dampier's vessel, not finding the
+Chinese vessels that they expected to seize, decide to wait on the
+coast of Cambodia and Siam until the time when the Acapulco galleon
+is expected. Having cruised along the mainland until July 29, they
+direct their course to the Batanes Islands, north of Luzon, arriving
+there August 6; they trade with the natives, clean the ship, and lay in
+provisions, intending to go afterward to harry the Manila commerce. But
+a fierce storm arises (September 25), driving them about for a week,
+and disheartening the men; and finally (October 3) they sail from
+the northern end of Luzon past the eastern coast of that island and
+Leyte, until they reach Sarangani, where they halt to repair their
+ship. Departing thence November 2, they go to Australia, and Dampier
+soon afterward leaves the ship--spending the next four years in the
+Malasian Islands, and, after numerous and varied adventures, arriving
+in England in September, 1691.
+
+Francisco de Villalva, procurator for the Dominicans at Madrid,
+petitions for royal aid in sending forty missionaries of that order
+to the Philippines.
+
+Some unknown Jesuit furnishes a "diary of events from June,
+1686 to June, 1687." These include the arrivals and departures of
+ships from the port of Cavite; the deaths of prominent persons; the
+dissensions between the Jesuits and the archbishop, and between the
+religious orders; the conflicts between governor and Audiencia, and
+their relations with the archbishop; attacks by pirates; and other
+news-items, of miscellaneous character. A similar record (whether by
+the same hand is uncertain) continues through 1688.
+
+A notable event in the history of the islands was the
+controversy (1681-89) between Archbishop Pardo and the secular
+authorities. Hundreds of documents and printed books are extant
+concerning this dispute, but our limited space will not allow us
+to reproduce many of these; it seems most useful for our purpose
+to give an outline of the main events during that time, as told by
+some of those who took part therein, both secular and religious, and
+representing different sides of the controversy. These contemporary
+documents are reenforced with abundant citations from the chroniclers
+of the religious orders--the Augustinian Diaz, the Jesuit Murillo
+Velarde, the Dominican Salazar, and the Recollect Concepcion;
+these are found in the annotations accompanying our text. The first
+account is that written by Juan Sanchez, secretary of the Audiencia,
+dated June 15, 1683; he relates the difficulties which arose between
+the secular and the religious authorities during the three years
+preceding that date--that controversy having begun in 1680, with
+the complaint of the cura of Vigan against the acting head of the
+diocese of Nueva Segovia, that the latter does not reside at the seat
+of that bishopric, and interferes with the above cura. The Audiencia
+undertakes to settle the affair, and the archbishop insists that it
+belongs to his jurisdiction. His cathedral chapter are offended at
+certain proceedings of his, and jealous of the influence acquired
+over him by Fray Raimundo Berart, a friar of the Dominican order
+(to which Pardo also belongs). The new bishop of Nueva Segovia
+also claims that the Vigan case belongs to his jurisdiction, not
+the archbishop's. Several other cases occur in which Pardo acts
+in an arbitrary manner, among them his seizure of a shipment of
+goods for the Jesuits, and his excommunication of a Jesuit for
+declining to render him an accounting in a certain executorship
+entrusted to the latter--Ortega alleging that this affair, as purely
+secular, pertains to the Audiencia alone. The Audiencia endeavor to
+restrain Pardo, but in vain; and the strained relations between them
+quickly grow into open hostilities. The situation is complicated
+by various antagonistic elements, which may be briefly summarized
+thus: The archbishop's arbitrary conduct toward his own clerics and
+other persons, and his strenuous insistence on his ecclesiastical
+prerogatives; the undue influence over him obtained by his Dominican
+brethren; the jealousies between the various religious orders; and,
+still more fundamental, the unceasing conflict between ecclesiastical
+and secular authority--the latter embodied mainly in the Audiencia,
+as the governors often ranged themselves against that tribunal, under
+the pressure of ecclesiastical influence. To these may be added the
+remoteness of the colony from Spain, and its smallness, which renders
+the limits within which these human forces are at work more narrow and
+circumscribed, and therefore intensifies their action. After a long
+conflict between Pardo and the Audiencia, in which their weapons are
+used freely on both sides--decrees, appeals, protests, censures, and
+legal technicalities of every sort, civil and canonical--that tribunal
+decides (October 1, 1682) to banish the archbishop, a sentence which
+is not executed until May 1, 1683. He is then seized by the officials
+of the Audiencia, and deported to Lingayen, a village in Cagayan. His
+assistant bishop, Barrientos, demands the right to act in Pardo's
+place; but his claim is set aside in favor of the cathedral chapter,
+or cabildo--which declares the see vacant in consequence of Pardo's
+exile. Another Dominican, Francisco de Villalba, is banished to Nueva
+Espana for seditious preaching; and others are sent to Cagayan.
+
+The narration of events in Manila is continued in another document,
+from July, 1684, to June, 1685; this account is unsigned, but it
+suggests the hand of the preceding writer, Sanchez. On August 24 of
+the former year occurs the formal entrance into the city of the new
+governor, Curuzelaegui. This change of administration gives opportunity
+for the return of the banished Dominicans, and an agitation for the
+restoration of Pardo to his see, which is quickly accomplished. Soon
+he lays an iron hand on all persons who had formerly opposed
+him. Excommunications are imposed on ex-governor Vargas, the auditors,
+and other persons concerned in the archbishop's banishment; and the
+members of the cathedral chapter are suspended, and their official
+acts during his absence are annulled. They are not absolved until near
+the end of Lent (1685), and this is done in public, and very harshly,
+with great humiliation to the penitents. At the urgent remonstrances
+and entreaties of Curuzelaegui, Pardo finally consents to absolve the
+ex-governor, Vargas; but he loads this concession with conditions so
+grievous and humiliating that Vargas is unwilling to accept them.
+
+Another unsigned document relates the "occurrences during the
+government of Cruzalaegui," of which a part, relating to the Pardo
+controversy only, is placed here with others on that subject; it covers
+only the first year, 1684-85. This writer also sympathizes with the
+auditors; his account is given mainly as an index of popular feeling
+on one side of the controversy. A letter from Auditor Bolivar to his
+agent at Madrid (June 15, 1685) presents an interesting view of the
+affair from the inside, and of the intrigues which kept Manila in
+a ferment during most of Pardo's term of office. Bolivar dares not
+write to the Council of the Indias, lest his letters be seized; he
+therefore directs his agent to take certain measures in his behalf,
+"for one cannot trust in friars." He recounts the proceedings in the
+residencia of Vargas, in which there are many false witnesses. He
+thinks that the Spaniards of Manila are more fickle than any others,
+and regards that colony as "a little edition of hell." He is eager
+to get away from the islands, and urges his friend to secure for
+him permission to do so, and to make arrangements so that he may
+not be needlessly detained in the islands. A letter from the Jesuit
+Pimentel (February 8, 1686) relates the scheming by which Pardo's
+return from exile was facilitated. Another unsigned paper contains
+"news since the year 1688;" the writer claims that his intention is
+"only that the truth may be known." This account is mainly occupied
+with the fate of the auditors and other officials who had incurred
+Pardo's wrath by taking part in his banishment. They are subjected
+to imprisonment, privation, and exile; a reign of terror prevails in
+Manila; and the governor is in close alliance with the archbishop,
+so that there "is no recourse, except to God." The writer mentions
+several things in condemnation of the governor's personal character,
+and regards him as unscrupulous and tyrannical. Finally, the Dominican
+account of this controversy is related by Vicente de Salazar,
+one of the official historians of that order, in his biography of
+Pardo. In 1677 that prelate enters upon the vacant see of Manila;
+he finds many ecclesiastical abuses and social scandals, and much
+official corruption. Undertaking to correct these, he incurs the
+enmity of many persons, and the ecclesiastical tribunal is filled
+with cases. For nearly three years the relations of the archbishop
+with the governor and Audiencia remain friendly; but finally (1680)
+certain ecclesiastics under censure have recourse to the Audiencia
+against the archbishop's authority, and this soon leads to hostilities
+between the religious and secular branches of the government. Next the
+cathedral chapter become insubordinate to Pardo, their proper head,
+and they too appeal to the Audiencia; and a long legal war ensues,
+in which the weapons are official acts on both sides. At last (in
+1682) the Audiencia decree Pardo's banishment from his see, but
+hold this measure in suspense for a time. He irritates the Jesuits,
+by proceeding against one of their number who is acting as executor
+for an estate, and seizes goods belonging to that order which are
+brought by the Acapulco galleon; and soon the archbishop encounters
+complaints and clamors from all sides. The decree of banishment is
+enforced, and Pardo is arrested (March 31, 1683) and deported to the
+village of Lingayen, in the province of Pangasinan. The cabildo assume
+the government of the archbishopric, ignoring Pardo's appointment of
+Barrientos to that office; and many of Pardo's supporters are banished
+or otherwise chastised. A new governor coming to the islands, the
+archbishop is reinstated in his see (November 16, 1685) and the case
+is afterward decided by the courts of Rome and Madrid in his favor. He
+finds much to do in restoring his church to its former condition, and
+defending the ecclesiastical rights and privileges--an undertaking
+which keeps him engaged in conflicts, but cannot abate his zeal and
+constancy. In the outcome he is vindicated, even God taking vengeance
+on the enemies of the archbishop, whose saintly qualities are extolled
+by Salazar. Pardo dies on December 31, 1689.
+
+A royal official comes to the islands (1688) to bring suit against
+the auditors who had banished the archbishop; but he finds that
+all of them are dead, except Bolivar, and even he dies while on
+his way to Manila. Accounts (ca. 1690) of Valdivia's proceedings
+are given by a Dominican and a Jesuit respectively (as appears from
+internal evidence). He reconciles the Jesuits and the Dominicans in
+Manila; sends Vargas, sentenced in residencia to pay 100,000 pesos,
+to Pangasinan; and sides with the archbishop in everything. This
+encourages Pardo to continue taking vengeance on his enemies; and
+he and Valdivia chastise whomsoever they will, in highly arbitrary
+fashion--the visitor aiding Pardo in many cases, and in others
+inflicting penalties on citizens of Manila in connection with purely
+secular affairs. Vargas is sent into exile, the archbishop refusing
+to the last to absolve him, notwithstanding the commands of the
+Audiencia. The second letter, written from Nueva Espana (probably
+1691), apparently by a Jesuit, relates briefly the proceedings
+of Valdivia in the islands. The writer sends a warning to combat
+the influences that will be exerted at court to secure the see for
+Barrientos; and asserts that Valdivia has appropriated to himself
+great wealth (part of which has been seized) obtained from the Manila
+proceedings. The governor died in April, 1690.
+
+
+The Editors May, 1906.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MISCELLANEOUS DOCUMENTS,
+
+1683-1690
+
+
+    Dampier in the Philippines (concluded). William Dampier; 1697.
+    Petition for Dominican missionaries. Francisco de Villalva;
+    [1687?].
+    Events in Filipinas, 1686-88. [Unsigned and undated.]
+    The Pardo controversy. Juan Sanchez, and others; 1683-89.
+    Official visitation by Valdivia. [Unsigned; 1689-90.]
+
+
+
+Sources: The first document is concluded from VOL. XXXVIII, q.v. The
+second is obtained from a rare pamphlet in the British Museum; the
+third and fifth, from the Ventura del Arco MSS., iii, pp. 625-638,
+727-732; and 589-596, 641-673; the fourth, mainly from the same
+volume, with additions from Retana's Archivo, i, no. iv, and Salazar's
+Hist. Sant. Rosario,  pp. 490-513.
+
+Translations: All save the first document are translated by Emma
+Helen Blair.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DAMPIER IN THE PHILIPPINES
+
+(CONCLUDED)
+
+
+CHAP. XII
+
+    Of the Inhabitants, and Civil State of the Isle of
+    Mindanao. The Mindanayans, Hilanoones, Sologues, and
+    Alfoorees. Of the Mindanayans, properly so called; Their
+    Manners and Habits. The Habits and Manners of their Women. A
+    Comical Custom at Mindanao. Their Houses, their Diet, and
+    Washings. The Languages spoken there, and Transactions with
+    the Spaniards. Their fear of the Dutch, and seeming desire
+    of the English. Their Handy-crafts, and peculiar sort of
+    Smiths Bellows. Their Shipping, Commodities, and Trade. The
+    Mindanao and Manila Tobacco. A sort of Leprosie there, and
+    other Distempers. Their Marriages. The Sultan of Mindanao, his
+    Poverty, Power, Family, &c. The Proes or Boats here. Raja Laut
+    the General, Brother of the Sultan, and his Family. Their way
+    of Fighting. Their Religion. Raja Laut's Devotion. A Clock
+    or Drum in their Mosques. Of their Circumcision, and the
+    Solemnity then used. Of other their Religious Observations
+    and Superstitions. Their abhorrence of Swines Flesh, &c.
+
+
+This Island is not subject to one Prince, neither is the Language
+one and the same; but the People are much alike, in colour, strength,
+and stature. They are all or most of them of one Religion, which is
+Mahometanism, and their customs and manner of living are alike. The
+Mindanao People, more particularly so called, are the greatest
+Nation in the Island, and trading by Sea with other Nations, they
+are therefore the more civil. I shall say but little of the rest,
+being less known to me, but so much as hath come to my knowledge,
+take as follows. There are besides the Mindanayans, the Hilanoones,
+(as they call them) or the Mountaneers, the Sologues and Alfoores. [1]
+
+The Hilanoones live in the Heart of the Country: They have little
+or no commerce by Sea, yet they have Proe's that row with 12 or 14
+Oars apiece. They enjoy the benefit of the Gold Mines; and with their
+Gold buy forreign Commodities of the Mindanao People. They have also
+plenty of Bees-Wax, which they exchange for other Commodities.
+
+The Sologues inhabit the N.W. end of the Island. [2] They are the
+least Nation of all; they Trade to Manila in Proes, and to some of
+the neighboring Islands, but have no Commerce with the Mindanao People.
+
+The Alfoores are the same with the Mindanayans, and were formerly
+under the subjection of the Sultan of Mindanao, but were divided
+among the Sultan's Children, and have of late had a Sultan of their
+own; but having by Marriage contracted an alliance with the Sultan
+of Mindanao, this has occasioned that Prince to claim them again as
+his Subjects; and he made War with them a little after we went away,
+as I afterwards understood.
+
+The Mindanayans properly so called, are Men of mean statures; small
+Limbs, straight Bodies, and little Heads. Their Faces are oval, their
+Foreheads flat, with black small Eyes, short low Noses, pretty large
+Mouths; their Lips thin and red, their Teeth black, yet very sound,
+their Hair black and straight, the colour of their Skin tawney, but
+inclining to a brighter yellow than some other Indians, especially
+the Women. They have a Custom to wear their Thumb-nails very long,
+especially that on their left Thumb, for they do never cut it but
+scrape it often. They are indued with good natural Wits, are ingenious,
+nimble, and active, when they are minded; but generally very lazy and
+thievish, and will not work except forced by Hunger. This laziness
+is natural to most Indians; but these People's lazinesz seems rather
+to proceed not so much from their natural Inclinations, as from the
+severity of their Prince of whom they stand in awe: For he dealing with
+them very arbitrarily, and taking from them what they get, this damps
+their Industry, so they never strive to have any thing but from Hand
+to Mouth. They are generally proud, and walk very stately. They are
+civil enough to Strangers, and will easily be acquainted with them,
+and entertain them with great freedom; but they are implacable to
+their Enemies, and very revengeful if they are injured, frequently
+poisoning secretly those that have affronted them.
+
+They wear but few Cloaths; their Heads are circled with a short
+turban, fringed or laced at both ends; it goes once about the Head,
+and is tied in a knot, the laced ends hanging down. They wear Frocks
+and Breeches, but no Stockings nor Shooes.
+
+The Women are fairer than the Men; and their Hair is black and long;
+which they tie in a knot, that hangs back in their Poles. They are
+more round visaged than the Men, and generally well featured; only
+their Noses are very small, and so low between their Eyes, that in
+some of the Female Children the rising that should be between the Eyes
+is scarce discernable; neither is their any sensible rising in their
+Foreheads. At a distance they appear very well; but being nigh, these
+Impediments are very obvious. They have very small Limbs. They wear but
+two Garments; a Frock, and a sort of Petticoat; the Petticoat is only
+a piece of Cloth, sewed both ends together; but it is made two Foot
+too big for their Wastes, so that they may wear either end uppermost;
+that part that comes up to their Wastes, because it is so much too
+big, they gather it in their Hands, and twist it till it fits close
+to their Wastes, tucking in the twisted part between their Waste and
+the edge of the Petticoat, which keeps it close. The Frock fits loose
+about them, and reaches down a little below the Waste. The Sleeves
+are a great deal longer than their Arms, and so small at the end,
+that their Hands will scarce go through. Being on, the Sleeve fits
+in folds about the wrist, wherein they take great pride.
+
+The better sort of People have their Garments made of long Cloth;
+but the ordinary sort wear Cloth made of Plantain-tree, which they
+call Saggen; [3] by which name they call the Plantain. They have
+neither Stocking or Shooe, and the Women have very small Feet.
+
+The Women are very desirous of the Company of Strangers, especially
+White Men; and doubtless would be very familiar, if the Custom of the
+Country did not debar them from that freedom, which seems coveted by
+them. Yet from the highest to the lowest they are allowed liberty to
+converse with, or treat strangers in the sight of their Husbands.
+
+There is a kind of begging Custom at Mindanao, that I have not met
+elsewhere with in all my Travels; and which I believe is owing to the
+little Trade they have; which is thus: When Strangers arrive here,
+the Mindanao Men will come aboard, and invite them to their Houses,
+and inquire who has a Comrade, (which word I believe they have from
+the Spaniards) or a Pagally, and who has not. A Comrade is a familiar
+Male-friend; a Pagally [4] is an innocent Platonick Friend of the
+other Sex. All Strangers are in a manner oblig'd to accept of this
+Acquaintance and Familiarity, which must be first purchased with a
+small Present, and afterwards confirmed with some Gift or other to
+continue the Acquaintance: and as often as the Stranger goes ashore,
+he is welcome to his Comrade or Pagally's House, where he may be
+entertained for his Money, to Eat, Drink, or Sleep, and complimented,
+as often as he comes ashore, with Tobacco and Betel-Nut, which is
+all the Entertainment he must expect gratis. The richest Mens Wives
+are allow'd the freedom to converse with her Pagally in publick,
+and may give or receive Presents from him. Even the Sultans and the
+Generals Wives, who are always coopt up, will yet look out of their
+Cages when a Stranger passeth by, and demand of him if he wants a
+Pagally: and to invite him to their Friendship, will send a Present
+of Tobacco and Betel-nut to him by their Servants.
+
+The chiefest City on this Island is called by the same Name of
+Mindanao. It is seated on the South side of the Island, in lat. 7
+d. 20 m. N. on the banks of a small River, about two Mile from the
+Sea. The manner of building is somewhat strange: yet generally used
+in this Part of the East-Indies. Their House are all built on Posts,
+about 14, 16, 18, or 20 Foot high. These Posts are bigger or less,
+according to the intended magnificence of the Superstructure. They
+have but one Floor, but many Partitions or Rooms, and a Ladder or
+Stairs to go up out of the Streets. The Roof is large, and covered
+with Palmeto or Palm-leaves. So there is a clear passage like a Piazza
+(but a filthy one) under the House. Some of the poorer People that
+keep Ducks or Hens, have a fence made round the Posts of their Houses,
+with a Door to go in and out; and this Under-room serves for no other
+use. Some use this place for the common draught of their Houses,
+but building mostly close by the River in all parts of the Indies,
+they make the River receive all the filth of their House; and at the
+time of the Land-floods, all is washed very clean.
+
+The Sultan's House is much bigger than any of the rest. It stands
+on about 180 great Posts or Trees, a great deal higher than the
+common Building, with great broad Stairs made to go up. In the first
+Room he hath about 20 Iron Guns, all Saker and Minion, placed on
+Field-Carriages. The General, and other great Men have some Guns also
+in their Houses. About 20 paces from the Sultan's House there is a
+small low House, built purposely for the Reception of Ambassadors
+or Merchant Strangers. This also stands on Posts, but the Floor is
+not raised above three or four Foot above the Ground, and is neatly
+Matted purposely for the Sultan and his Council to sit on; for they
+use no Chairs, but sit cross-legg'd like Taylors on the Floor.
+
+The common Food at Mindanao is Rice, or Sago, and a small Fish or
+two. The better sort eat Buffalo, or Fowls ill drest, and abundance
+of Rice with it. They use no Spoons to eat their Rice, but every Man
+takes a handful out of the Platter, and by wetting his Hand in Water,
+that it may not stick to his Hand, squeezes it into a lump, as hard
+as possibly he can make it, and then crams it into his Mouth. They
+all strive to make these lumps as big as their Mouths can receive
+them; and seem to vie with each other, and glory in taking in the
+biggest lump; so that sometimes they almost choke themselves. They
+always wash after Meals, or if they touch any thing that is unclean;
+for which reason they spend abundance of Water in their Houses. This
+Water, with the washing of their Dishes, and what other filth they
+make, they pour down near their Fire-place: for their Chambers are
+not boarded, but floored with split Bamboes, like Lathe, so that
+the Water presently falls underneath their dwelling Rooms, where it
+breeds Maggots, and makes a prodigious stink. Besides this filthiness,
+the sick People ease themselves, and make Water in their Chambers;
+there being a small hole made purposely in the Floor, to let it drop
+through. But healthy sound People commonly ease themselves, and make
+Water in the River. For that reason you shall always see abundance
+of People, of both Sexes in the River, from Morning till Night;
+some easing themselves, others washing their bodies or Cloaths. If
+they come into the River purposely to wash their Cloaths, they strip
+and stand naked till they have done; then put them on, and march out
+again: both Men and Women take great delight in swimming, and washing
+themselves, being bred to it from their Infancy. I do believe it is
+very wholsom to wash Mornings and Evenings in these hot Countries,
+at least three or four Days in the Week: For I did use my self to it
+when I lived afterwards at Ben-cooly, and found it very refreshing and
+comfortable. It is very good for those that have Fluxes to wash and
+stand in the Rivers Mornings and Evenings. I speak it experimentally;
+for I was brought very low with that distemper at Achin; but by
+washing constantly Mornings and Evenings I found great benefit,
+and was quickly cured by it.
+
+In the City of Mindanao they speak two Languages indifferently: their
+own Mindanao Language, and the Malaya; but in other parts or the
+Island they speak only their proper Language, having little Commerce
+abroad. They have Schools, and instruct the Children to Read and
+Write, and bring them up in the Mahometan Religion. Therefore many
+of the words, especially their Prayers, are in Arabick; and many
+of the words of civility the same as in Turkey; and especially when
+they meet in the Morning, or take leave of each other, they express
+themselves in that Language.
+
+Many of the old People, both Men and Women, can speak Spanish, for the
+Spaniards were formerly settled among them, and had several Forts on
+this Island; and then they sent two Friers to the City, to convert
+the Sultan of Mindanao and his People. At that time these People
+began to learn Spanish, and the Spaniards incroached on them and
+endeavoured to bring them into subjection; and probably before this
+time had brought them all under their yoak, if they themselves had
+not been drawn off from this Island to Manila, to resist the Chinese,
+who threatened to invade them there. When the Spaniards were gone,
+the old Sultan of Mindanao, Father to the present, in whose time
+it was, razed and demolished their Forts, brought away their Guns,
+and sent away the Friers; and since that time will not suffer the
+Spaniards to settle on the Islands.
+
+They are now most afraid of the Dutch, being sensible how they have
+inslaved many of the Neighboring Islands. For that Reason they have a
+long time desired the English to settle among them, and have offered
+them any convenient Place to build a Fort in, as the General himself
+told us; giving this Reason, that they do not find the English so
+incroaching as the Dutch or Spanish. The Dutch are no less jealous
+of their admitting the English, for they are sensible what detriment
+it would be to them if the English should settle here.
+
+There are but few Tradesmen at the City of Mindanao. The chiefest
+Trades are Goldsmiths, Blacksmiths, and Carpenters. There are but
+two or three Goldsmiths; these will work in Gold or Silver, and make
+any thing that you desire: but they have no Shop furnished with Ware
+ready made for Sale. Here are several Blacksmiths who work very well,
+considering the Tools that they work with. Their Bellows are much
+different from ours. They are made of a wooden Cylinder, the Trunk
+of a Tree, about three Foot long, bored hollow like a Pump, and set
+upright on the ground, on which the Fire it self is made. Near the
+lower end there is a small hole, in the side of the Trunk next the
+Fire, made to receive a Pipe, through which the Wind is driven to
+the Fire by a great bunch of fine Feathers fastened to one end of
+the Stick, which closing up the inside of the Cylinder, drives the
+Air out of the Cylinder through the Pipe: Two of these Trunks or
+Cylinders are placed so nigh together, that a Man standing between
+them may work them both at once alternately, one with each Hand. They
+have neither Vice nor Anvil, but a great hard Stone or a piece of an
+old Gun, to hammer upon: yet they will perform their work making both
+common Utensils and Iron-works about Ships to admiration. They work
+altogether with Charcoal. Every Man almost is a Carpenter, for they
+can work with the Ax and Adds. Their Ax is but small, and so made that
+they can take it out of the Helve, and by turning it make an Adds of
+it. They have no Saws; but when they make Plank, they split the Tree
+in two, and make a Plank of each part, plaining it with the Ax and
+Adds. This requires much pains, and takes up a great deal of time;
+but they work cheap, and the goodness of the Plank thus hewed, which
+hath its grain preserv'd entire, makes amends for their cost and pains.
+
+They build good and serviceable Ships or Barks for the Sea, some
+for Trade, others for Pleasure; and some Ships of War. Their trading
+Vessels they send chiefly to Manila. Thither they transport Bees-wax,
+which, I think, is the only Commodity, besides Gold that they vend
+there. The Inhabitants of the City of Mindanao get a great deal of
+Bees-wax themselves: but the greatest quantity they purchase is
+of the Mountaneers, from whom they also get the Gold which they
+send to Manila; and with these they buy their Calicoes, Muslins,
+and China Silk. They send sometimes their Barks to Borneo and other
+Islands; but what they transport thither, or import from thence, I
+know not. The Dutch come hither in Sloops from Ternate and Tidore,
+and buy Rice, Bees-wax, and Tobacco: for there is a great deal of
+Tobacco grown on this Island, more than in any Island or Country
+in the East-Indies, that I know of, Manila only excepted. It is
+an excellent sort of Tobacco; but these People have not the Art of
+managing this Trade to their best advantage, as the Spaniards have
+at Manila. I do believe the Seeds were first brought hither from
+Manila by the Spaniards, and even thither, in all probability, from
+America: the difference between the Mindanao and Manila Tobacco is,
+that the Mindanao Tobacco is of a darker colour; and the Leaf larger
+and grosser than the Manila Tobacco, being propagated or planted in
+a fatter Soil. The Manila Tobacco is of a bright yellow colour, of an
+indifferent size, not strong, but Pleasant to Smoak. The Spaniards at
+Manila are very curious about this Tobacco, having a peculiar way of
+making it up neatly in the Leaf. For they take two little Sticks,
+each about a Foot long, and flat, and placing the Stalks of the
+Tobacco Leaves in a row, 40 or 50 of them between the two Sticks,
+they bind them hard together, so that the Leaves hang dangling
+down. One of these bundles is sold for a Rial at Fort St. George:
+but you may have 10 or 12 pound of Tobacco at Mindanao for a Rial:
+and the Tobacco is as good, or rather better than the Manila Tobacco,
+but they have not that vent for it as the Spaniards have.
+
+The Mindanao People are much troubled with a sort of Leprosie, the
+same as we observed at Guam. This Distemper runs with a dry Scurf all
+over their Bodies, and causeth great itching in those that have it,
+making them frequently scratch and scrub themselves, which raiseth the
+outer skin in small whitish flakes, like the scales of little Fish,
+when they are raised on end with a knife. This makes their skin
+extraordinary rough, and in some you shall see broad white spots
+in several parts of their Body. I judge such have had it, but are
+cured; for their skins were smooth, and I did not perceive them to
+scrub themselves: yet I have learnt from their own mouths that these
+spots were from this Distemper. Whether they use any means to cure
+themselves, or whether it goes away of it self, I know not: but I did
+not perceive that they made any great matter of it, for they did never
+refrain any Company for it; none of our People caught it of them,
+for we were afraid of it, and kept off. They are sometimes troubled
+with the Small Pox, but their ordinary Distempers are Fevers, Agues,
+Fluxes, with great pains, and gripings in their Guts. The Country
+affords a great many Drugs and Medicinal Herbs, whose Virtues are
+not unknown to some of them that pretend to cure the Sick.
+
+The Mindanao Men have many Wives: but what Ceremonies are used when
+they Marry I know not. There is commonly a great Feast made by the
+Bridegroom to entertain his Friends, and the most part of the Night
+is spent in Mirth.
+
+The Sultan is absolute in his Power over all his Subjects. He is but
+a poor Prince; for as I mentioned before, they have but little Trade,
+and therefore cannot be rich. If the Sultan understands that any Man
+has Money, if it be but 20 Dollars, which is a great matter among them,
+he will send to borrow so much Money, pretending urgent occasions for
+it; and they dare not deny him. Sometimes he will send to sell one
+thing or another that he hath to dispose of, to such whom he knows
+to have Money, and they must buy it, and give him his price; and if
+afterwards he hath occasion for the same thing, he must have it if
+he sends for it. He is but a little Man, between 50 or 60 Years old,
+and by relation very good natured, but over-ruled by those about
+him. [5] He has a Queen, and keeps about 29 Women, or Wives more,
+in whose company he spends most of his time. He has one Daughter by
+his Sultaness or Queen, and a great many Sons and Daughters by the
+rest. These walk about the Streets, and would be always begging things
+of us; but it is reported that the young Princess is kept in a Room,
+and never stirs out, and that she did never see any Man but her Father
+and Raja Laut her Uncle, being then about Fourteen Years Old.
+
+When the Sultan visits his Friends, he is carried in a small Couch on
+four Mens shoulders, with eight or ten armed Men to guard him; but
+he never goes far this way; for the Country is very Woody, and they
+have but little Paths, which render it the less commodious. When he
+takes his pleasure by Water, he carries some of his Wives along with
+him. The Proes that are built for this purpose, are large enough to
+entertain 50 or 60 Persons or more. The Hull is neatly built, with
+a round Head and Stern, and over the Hull there is a small slight
+House built with Bamboes; the sides are made up with split Bamboes,
+about four Foot high, with little Windows in them of the same, to open
+and shut at their pleasure. The roof is almost flat, neatly thatched
+with Palmeto Leaves. This House is divided into two or three small
+Partitions or Chambers, one particularly for himself. This is neatly
+Matted underneath, and round the sides; and there is a Carpet and
+Pillows for him to sleep on. The second Room is for his Women, much
+like the former. The third is for the Servants, who tend them with
+Tobacco and Betel-Nut; for they are always chewing or smoking. The
+fore and after-parts of the Vessel are for the Marriners to sit and
+Row. Besides this, they have Outlayers, such as those I described at
+Guam; only the Boats and Outlayers here are larger. These Boats are
+more round, like the Half-Moon almost; and the Bamboes or Outlayers
+that reach from the Boat are also crooked. Besides, the Boat is not
+flat on one side here, as at Guam; but hath a Belly and Outlayers
+on each side: and whereas at Guam there is a little Boat fasten'd to
+the Outlayers, that lies in the Water; the Beams or Bamboes here are
+fasten'd traverse-wise to the Outlayers on each side, and touch not
+the Water like Boats, but 1, 3 or 4 Foot above the Water, and serve for
+the Barge Men to sit and Row and paddle on; the inside of the Vessel,
+except only just afore and abaft, being taken up with the apartments
+for the Passengers. There run a-cross the Outlayers two tire of Beams
+for the Padlers to sit on, on each side the Vessel. The lower tire
+of these Beams is not above a Foot from the Water: so that upon any
+the least reeling of the Vessel, the Beams are dipt in the Water,
+and the Men that sit are wet up to their Waste: their Feet seldom
+escaping the Water. And thus as all our Vessels are Rowed from within,
+these are Paddled from without.
+
+The Sultan hath a Brother called Raja Laut, a brave Man. He is the
+second Man in the Kingdom. All Strangers that come hither to Trade
+must make their Address to him, for all Sea Affairs belong to him. He
+Licenceth Strangers to Import or Export any Commodity, and 'tis by
+his Permission that the Natives themselves are suffered to Trade:
+Nay the very Fishermen must [t]ake a Permit from him: So that there is
+no Man can come into the River or go out but by his leave. He is two
+or three Years younger than the Sultan, and a little Man like him. He
+has eight Women, by some of whom he hath Issue. He hath only one Son,
+about twelve or fourteen Years old, who was Circumcised while we were
+there. His Eldest Son died a little before we came hither, for whom
+he was still in great heaviness. If he had lived a little longer he
+should have Married the young Princess, but whether this second Son
+must have her I know not, for I did never hear any Discourse about
+it. Raja Laut is a very sharp Man; he speaks and writes Spanish, which
+he learned in his Youth. He has by often conversing with Strangers,
+got a great sight into the Customs of other Nations, and by Spanish
+Books has some knowledge of Europe. He is General of the Mindanayans,
+and is accounted an expert Soldier and a very stout Man; and the
+Women in their Dances, Sing many Songs in his praise.
+
+The Sultan of Mindanao sometimes makes War with his Neighbors the
+Mountaneers or Alfoores. Their Weapons are Swords, Lances and some
+Hand-Cressets. The Cresset [6] is a small thing like a Baggonet, which
+they always wear in War or Peace, at Work or Play, from the greatest
+of them to the poorest, or the meanest Persons. They do never meet
+each other so as to have a pitcht Battle, but they build small Works
+or Forts of Timber, wherein they plant little Guns, and lie in sight
+of each other 2 or 3 Months, skirmishing every Day in small Parties,
+and sometimes surprizing a Brestwork; and whatever side is like to be
+worsted, if they have no probability to escape by flight, they sell
+their lives as dear as they can; for there is seldom any quarter given,
+but the Conqueror cuts and hacks his Enemies to pieces.
+
+The Religion of these People is Mahometanism, Friday is their Sabbath;
+but I did never see any difference that they make between this Day
+and any other Day, only the Sultan himself goes then to the Mosque
+twice. Raja Laut never goes to the Mosque, but Prays at certain
+Hours, Eight or Ten times in a Day; where-ever he is, he is very
+punctual to his Canonical Hours, and if he be aboard will go ashore,
+on purpose to Pray. For no Business nor Company hinders him from this
+Duty. Whether he is at home or abroad, in a House or in the Field,
+he leaves all his Company, and goes about 100 Yards off, and there
+kneels down to his Devotion. He first kisses the Ground, then prays
+aloud, and divers times in his Prayers he kisses the Ground, and does
+the same when he leaves off. His Servants, and his Wives and Children
+talk and sing, or play how they please all the time, but himself is
+very serious. The meaner sort of People have little Devotion: I did
+never see any of them at their Prayers, or go into a Mosque.
+
+In the Sultan's Mosque there is a great Drum with but one Head called
+a Gong; which is instead of a Clock. This Gong is beaten at 12 a Clock,
+at 3, 6, and 9; a Man being appointed for that Service. He has a Stick
+as big as a Man's Arm, with a great knob at the end, bigger than a
+Man's Fist, made with Cotton, bound fast with small Cords: with this
+he strikes the Gong as hard as he can, about 20 strokes; beginning to
+strike leisurely the first 5 or 6 strokes; then he strikes faster, and
+at last strikes as fast as he can; and then he strikes again slower
+and slower so many strokes: thus he rises and falls three times,
+and then leaves off till three Hours after. This is done Night and Day.
+
+They circumcise the Males at 11 or 12 Years of Age, or older; and many
+are circumcised at once. This Ceremony is performed with a great deal
+of Solemnity. There had been no Circumcision for some Years before
+our being here; and then there was one for Raja Laut's Son. They
+chuse to have a general Circumcision when the Sultan, or General,
+or some other great Person hath a Son fit to be Circumcised; for
+with him a great many more are Circumcised. There is notice given
+about 8 or 10 Days before for all Men to appear in Arms, and great
+preparation is made against the solemn Day. In the Morning before the
+Boys are Circumcised, Presents are sent to the Father of the Child,
+that keeps the Feast; which, as I said before, is either the Sultan,
+or some great Person: and about 10 or 11 a Clock the Mahometan Priest
+does his Office. He takes hold of the fore-skin with two Sticks,
+and with a pair of Scissors snips it off. After this most of the
+Men, both in City and Country being in Arms before the House, begin
+to act as if they were ingaged with an Enemy, having such Arms as I
+described. Only one acts at a time, the rest make a great Ring of 2
+or 300 Yards round about him. He that is to exercise comes into the
+Ring with a great shriek or two, and a horrid look; then he fetches
+two or three large stately strides, and falls to work. He holds his
+broad Sword in one Hand, and his Lance in the other, and traverses
+his Ground, leaping from one side of the Ring to the other; and in
+a menacing posture and look, bids defiance to the Enemy, whom his
+Fancy frames to him; for there is nothing but Air to oppose him. Then
+he stamps and shakes his Head, and grinning with his Teeth, makes
+many ruful Faces. Then he throws his Lance, and nimbly snatches out
+his Cresset, with which he hacks and hews the Air like a Mad-man,
+often shrieking. At last, being almost tired with motion, he flies
+to the middle of the Ring, where he seems to have his Enemy at his
+Mercy, and with two or three blows cuts on the Ground as if he was
+cutting off his Enemy's Head. By this time he is all of a Sweat, and
+withdraws triumphantly out of the Ring, and presently another enters
+with the like shrieks and gesture. Thus they continue combating their
+imaginary Enemy all the rest of the Day: towards the conclusion of
+which the richest Men act, and at last the General, and then the Sultan
+concludes this Ceremony: He and the General with some other great Men,
+are in Armor, but the rest have none. After this the Sultan returns
+home, accompanied with abundance of People who wait on him there till
+they are dismist. But at the time when we were there, there was an
+after-game to be played; for the General's Son being then Circumcised,
+the Sultan intended to give him a second visit in the Night, so they
+all waited to attend him thither. The General also provided to meet
+him in the best manner, and therefore desired Captain Swan with his
+Men to attend him. Accordingly Captain Swan ordered us to get our
+Guns, and wait at the General's House till further Orders. So about
+40 of us waited till Eight a Clock in the Evening. When the General
+with Captain Swan, and about 1000 Men, went to meet the Sultan, with
+abundance of Torches that made it as light as Day. The manner of the
+march was thus: First of all there was a Pageant, and upon it two
+dancing Women gorgeously apparelled, with Coronets on their Heads,
+full of glittering Spangles, and Pendants of the same, hanging down
+over their Breast and Shoulders. These are Women bred up purposely for
+dancing: Their Feet and Legs are but little imployed, except sometimes
+to turn round very gently; but their Hands, Arms, Head and Body are in
+continual motion, especially their Arms, which they turn and twist so
+strangely, that you would think them to be made without Bones. Besides
+the two dancing Women, there were two old Women in the Pageant, holding
+each a lighted Torch in their Hands, close by the two dancing Women,
+by which light the glittering Spangles appeared very gloriously. This
+Pageant was carried by six lusty Men: Then came six or seven Torches,
+lighting the General and Captain Swan, who marched side by side next,
+and we that attended Captain Swan followed close after, marching in
+order six and six abreast, with each Man his Gun on his Shoulder,
+and Torches on each side. After us came twelve of the General's Men
+with old Spanish Match-locks, marching four in a row. After them about
+forty Lances, and behind them as many with great Swords, marching all
+in order. After them came abundance only with Cressets by their sides,
+who marched up close without any order. When we came near the Sultan's
+House, the Sultan and his Men met us, and we wheel'd off to let them
+pass. The Sultan had three Pageants [that] went before him: In the
+first Pageant were four of his Sons, who were about 10 or 11 Years
+old. They had gotten abundance of small Stones, which they roguishly
+threw about on the People's Heads. In the next were four young Maidens,
+nieces to the Sultan, being his Sisters Daughters; and in the 3d,
+there were three of the Sultan's Children, not above six Years
+old. The Sultan himself followed next, being carried in his Couch,
+which was not like your Indian Palankins, but open, and very little
+and ordinary. A multitude of People came after, without any order:
+but as soon as he was past by, the General, and Captain Swan, and all
+our Men, closed in just behind the Sultan, and so all marched together
+to the General's House. We came thither between 10 and 11 a Clock,
+where the biggest part of the Company were immediately dismist; but
+the Sultan and his Children, and his Nieces, and some other Persons
+of Quality, entred the General's House. They were met at the Head of
+the Stairs by the General's Women, who with a great deal of Respect
+conducted them into the House. Captain Swan, and we that were with
+him followed after. It was not long before the General caused his
+dancing Women to enter the Room, and divert the Company with that
+pastime. I had forgot to tell you that they have none but vocal
+Musick here, by what I could learn, except only a row of a kind of
+Bells without Clappers, 16 in number, and their weight increasing
+gradually from about three to ten pound weight. These were set in a
+row on a Table in the General's House, where for seven or eight Days
+together before the Circumcision day, they were struck each with a
+little Stick, for the biggest part of the Day making a great noise,
+and they ceased that Morning. So these dancing Women sung themselves,
+and danced to their own Musick. After this the General's Women, and
+the Sultan's Sons, and his Nieces danced. Two of the Sultan's Nieces
+were about 18 or 19 Years Old, the other two were three or four Years
+Younger. These Young Ladies were very richly drest, with loose garments
+of Silk, and small Coronets on their Heads. They were much fairer
+than any Women that I did ever see there, and very well featured;
+and their Noses, tho' but small, yet higher than the other Womens,
+and very well proportioned. When the Ladies had very well diverted
+themselves and the Company with dancing, the General caused us to fire
+some Sky-rockets, that were made by his and Captain Swan's Order,
+purposely for this Nights Solemnity; and after that the Sultan and
+his retinue went away with a few Attendants, and we all broke up,
+and thus ended this Days Solemnity: but the Boys being sore with
+their Amputation, went straddling for a fortnight after.
+
+They are not, as I said before, very curious or strict in observing
+any Days, or Times of particular Devotions, except it be Ramdam [i.e.,
+Ramadan] time, as we call it. The Ramdam time was then in August,
+as I take it, for it was shortly after our arrival here. In this
+time they Fast all Day and about seven a Clock in the Evening, they
+spend near an Hour in Prayer. Towards the latter end of their Prayer,
+they loudly invoke their Prophet, for about a quarter of an Hour,
+both old and young bawling out very strangely, as if they intended
+to fright him out of his sleepiness or neglect of them. After their
+Prayer is ended, they spend some time in Feasting before they take
+their repose. Thus they do every Day for a whole Month at least;
+for sometimes 'tis two or three Days longer before the Ramdam ends:
+For it begins at the New Moon, and lasts till they see the next New
+Moon, which sometimes in thick hazy Weather is not till three or four
+Days after the Change, as it happen'd while I was at Achin, where
+they continued the Ramdam till the New Moon's appearance. The next
+Day after they have seen the New Moon, the Guns are all discharged
+about Noon, and then the time ends.
+
+A main part of their Religion consists in washing often, to keep
+themselves from being defiled; or after they are defiled to cleanse
+themselves again. They also take great care to keep themselves from
+being polluted, by tasting or touching any thing that is accounted
+Unclean; therefore Swines Flesh is very abominable to them; nay,
+any one that hath either tasted of Swines flesh, or touched those
+Creatures, is not permitted to come into their Houses in many Days
+after, and there is nothing will scare them more than a Swine. Yet
+there are wild Hogs in the Islands, and those so plentiful, that they
+will come in troops out of the Woods in the Night into the very City,
+and come under their Houses, to romage up and down the Filth that they
+find there. The Natives therefore would even desire to lie in wait
+for the Hogs, to destroy them, which we did frequently, by shooting
+them and carrying them presently on board, but were prohibited their
+Houses afterwards.
+
+And now I am on this Subject, I cannot omit a Story concerning the
+General. He once desired to have a pair of Shoes made after the
+English Fashion, tho' he did very seldom wear any: So one [of] our
+Men made him a Pair, which the General liked very well. Afterwards
+some Body told him, That the Thread wherewith the Shoes were sowed,
+were pointed with Hogs-bristles. This put him into a great Passion;
+so he sent the Shoes to the Man that made them, and sent him withal
+more Leather to make another Pair, with Threads pointed with some
+other Hair, which was immediately done, and then he was well pleased.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XIII
+
+    Their coasting along the Isle of Mindanao, from a Bay on
+    the East-side to another, at the S.E. end. Tornadoes and
+    boisterous Weather. The S.E. Coast, and its Savannah and
+    plenty of Deer. They coast along the South-side to the River
+    of Mindanao City, and anchor there. The Sultan's Brother and
+    Son come aboard them, and invite them to settle there. Of
+    the Feasibleness and probable Advantage of such a Settlement,
+    from the neighboring Gold and Spice Islands. Of the best way
+    to Mindanao by the South Sea and Terra Australis; and of an
+    accidental Discovery there by Captain Davis, and a probability
+    of a greater. The Capacity they were in to settle here. The
+    Mindanayans measure their Ship. Captain Swan's Present to the
+    Sultan: his Reception of it, and Audience given to Captain
+    Swan, with Raja Laut, the Sultans Brother's Entertainment of
+    him. The Contents of two English Letters shewn them by the
+    Sultan of Mindanao. Of the Commodities, and the Punishments
+    there. The General's Caution how to demean themselves: at
+    his Persuasion they lay up their Ships in the River. The
+    Mindanaians Caresses. The great Rains and Floods at the
+    City. The Mindanaians have Chinese Accomptants. How their
+    Women dance. A Story of one John Thacker. Their Bark eaten
+    up, and their Ship endangered by the Worm. Of the Worms here
+    and elsewhere. Of Captain Swan. Raja Laut, the General's
+    Deceitfulness. Hunting wild Kine. The Prodigality of some
+    of the English. Captain Swan treats with a Young Indian of a
+    Spice-Island. A Hunting Voyage with the General. His punishing
+    a Servant of his. Of his Wives and Women. A sort of strong
+    Rice-drink. The General's foul Dealing and Exactions. Captain
+    Swan's Uneasiness and indiscreet Management. His Men Mutiny. Of
+    a Snake twisting about on their Necks. The main part of the
+    Crew go away with the Ship, leaving Captain Swan and some of
+    his Men: Several others poisoned there.
+
+
+Having in the two last Chapters given some Account of the Natural,
+Civil, and Religious State of Mindanao, I shall now go on with the
+prosecution of our Affairs during our stay there.
+
+'Twas in a Bay on the N. East-side of the Island that we came to an
+Anchor, as hath been said. We lay in this Bay but one Night, and part
+of the next Day. Yet there we got Speech with some of the Natives,
+who by signs made us to understand, that the City Mindanao was on
+the West-side of the Island. We endeavored to persuade one of them,
+to go with us to be our Pilot, but he would not: Therefore in the
+Afternoon we loosed from hence, steering again to the South East,
+having the Wind at S.W. When we came to the S.E. end of the Island
+Mindanao, we saw two small Islands [7] about three Leagues distant
+from it. We might have passed between them and the main Island,
+as we learnt since, but not knowing them, nor what dangers we might
+encounter there, we chose rather to Sail to the Eastward of them. But
+meeting very strong Westerly Winds, we got nothing forward in many
+Days. In this time we first saw the Islands Meangis, [8] which are
+about 16 Leagues distant from the Mindanao, bearing S.E. I shall have
+occasion to speak more of them hereafter.
+
+The 4th Day of July we got into a deep Bay, four Leagues N.W. from
+the two small Islands before mentioned. But the Night before, in a
+violent Tornado, our Bark being unable to beat any longer, bore away,
+which put us in some pain for fear she was overset, as we had like to
+have been our selves. We anchored on the South West side of the Bay,
+in fifteen fathom Water, about a Cables length from the shore. Here we
+were forced to shelter our selves from the violence of the Weather,
+which was so boisterous with Rains, and Tornadoes, and a strong
+Westerly Wind, that we were very glad to find this place to Anchor in,
+being the only shelter on this side from the West Winds.
+
+This Bay is not above two Mile wide at the Mouth, but farther in it
+is three Leagues wide, and seven fathom deep, running in N.N.W. There
+is a good depth of Water about four or five Leagues in, but Rocky
+foul Ground for about two Leagues in, from the Mouth on both sides of
+the Bay, except only in that place where we lay. About three Leagues
+in from the mouth, on the Eastern side, there are fair sandy Bays,
+and very good anchoring in four, five, and six fathom. The Land on
+the East side is high, Mountainous, and Woody, yet very well watered
+with small Brooks, and there is one River large enough for Canoes
+to enter. On the West side of the Bay, the Land is of a mean height
+with a large Savannah, bordering on the Sea, and stretching from the
+mouth of the Bay, a great way to the Westward.
+
+This Savannah abounds with long Grass, and it is plentifully stock'd
+with Deer. The adjacent Woods are a covert for them in the heat of
+the Day: but Mornings and Evenings they feed in the open Plains, as
+thick as in our Parks in England. I never saw any where such plenty
+of wild Deer, tho' I have met with them in several parts of America,
+both in the North and South Seas.
+
+The Deer live here pretty peaceably and unmolested, for there are no
+Inhabitants on that side of the Bay. We visited this Savannah every
+Morning, and killed as many Deer as we pleased, sometimes 16 or 18 in
+a Day; and we did eat nothing but Venison all the time we staid here.
+
+We saw a great many Plantations by the sides of the Mountains, on
+the East side of the Bay, and we went to one of them, in hopes to
+learn of the Inhabitants whereabouts the City was, that we might not
+over-sail it in the Night; but they fled from us.
+
+We lay here till the 12th Day before the Winds abated of their fury,
+and then we sailed from hence, directing our course to the Westward. In
+the Morning we had a Land Wind at North. At 11 a Clock the Sea breeze
+came at West, just in our Teeth, but it being fair Weather, we kept
+on our way, turning and taking the advantage of the Land breezes by
+Night, and the Sea breezes by Day.
+
+Being now past the S.E. part of the Island, we coasted down on the
+South side, and we saw abundance of Canoas a fishing, and now and
+then a small Village. Neither were these Inhabitants afraid of us
+(as the former) but came aboard; yet we could not understand them,
+nor they us, but by signs: and when we mentioned the word Mindanao,
+they would point towards it.
+
+The 18th Day of July we arrived before the River of Mindanao; the
+mouth of which lies in lat. 6 d. 22 m. N. and is laid in 231 d. 12
+m. Longitude West, from the Lizard in England [9]. We anchored right
+against the River in 15 fathom Water, clear hard Sand; about 2 Miles
+from the shore, and 3 or 4 Miles from a small Island, that lay without
+us to the Southward. We fired 7 or 9 Guns, I remember not well which,
+and were answered again with 3 from the shore; for which we gave one
+again. Immediately after our coming to an Anchor Raja Laut, and one of
+the Sultan's Sons came off in a Canoa, being rowed with 10 Oars, and
+demanded in Spanish what we were? and from whence we came? Mr. Smith
+(he who was taken Prisoner at Leon in Mexico) answered in the same
+Language, that we were English, and that we had been a great while
+out of England. They told us that we were welcome, and asked us
+a great many questions about England; especially concerning our
+East India Merchants; and whether we were sent by them to settle a
+Factory here? Mr. Smith told them that we came hither only to buy
+Provision. They seemed a little discontented when they understood
+that we were not come to settle among them: for they had heard of
+our arrival on the East-side of the Island a great while before,
+and entertained hopes that we were sent purposely out of England
+hither to settle a Trade with them; which it would seem they are very
+desirous of. For Capt. Goodlud had been here not long before to treat
+with them about it; and when he went away told them (as they said)
+that in a short time they might expect an Ambassador from England,
+to make a full bargain with them.
+
+Indeed upon mature thoughts, I should think we could not have done
+better, than to have complied with the desire they seemed to have of
+our settling here; and to have taken up our quarters among them. For as
+thereby we might better have consulted our own profit and satisfaction,
+than by the other loose roving way of life; so it might probably
+have proved of publick benefit to our Nation, and been a means of
+introducing an English Settlement and Trade, not only here, but
+through several of the Spice-Islands, which lie in its neighborhood.
+
+For the Islands Meangis, which I mentioned in the beginning of this
+Chapter, lye within twenty Leagues of Mindanao. These are three small
+Islands that abound with Gold and Cloves, if I may credit my Author
+Prince Jeoly, [10] who was born on one of them, and was at that time a
+Slave in the City of Mindanao. He might have been purchased by us of
+his Master for a small matter, as he was afte[r]wards by Mr. Moody,
+(who came hither to trade, and laded a Ship with Clove-Bark) and
+by transporting him home to his own Country, we might have gotten a
+Trade there. But of Prince Jeoly I shall speak more hereafter. These
+Islands are as yet probably unknown to the Dutch, who as I said before,
+indeavor to ingross all the Spice into their own Hands.
+
+There was another opportunity offered us here of settling on another
+Spice-Island that was very well inhabited: for the Inhabitants
+fearing the Dutch, and understanding that the English were settling
+at Mindanao, their Sultan sent his Nephew to Mindanao while we were
+there to invite us thither: Captain Swan conferr'd with him about it
+divers times, and I do believe he had some Inclination to accept the
+offer; and I am sure most of the Men were for it: but this never came
+to a head, for want of a true understanding between Captain Swan and
+his Men, as may be declared hereafter.
+
+Beside the benefit that might accrue from this Trade with Meangis,
+and other the Spice Islands, the Philippine Islands themselves, by a
+little care and industry, might have afforded us a very beneficial
+Trade, and all these Trades might have been managed from Mindanao,
+by settling there first. For that Island lyeth very convenient for
+Trading either to the Spice-Islands, or to the rest of the Philippine
+Islands: since as its Soil is much of the same nature with either of
+them, so it lies as it were in the Center of the Gold and Spice Trade
+in these parts; the Islands North of Mindanao abounding most in Gold,
+and those South of Meangis in Spice.
+
+As the Island Mindanao lies very convenient for Trade, so considering
+its distance, the way thither may not be over-long and tiresome. The
+Course that I would choose should be to set out of England about
+the latter end of August, and to pass round Terra del Fuego, and
+so stretching over towards New Holland, coast it along that Shore
+till I came near to Mindanao; or first I would coast down near the
+American Shore, as far as I found convenient, and then direct my Course
+accordingly for the Island. By this I should avoid coming near any of
+the Dutch Settlements, and be sure to meet always with a constant brisk
+Easterly Trade Wind, after I was once past Terra del Fuego. Whereas
+in passing about the Cape of Good Hope, after you are shot over the
+East-Indian Ocean, and are come to the Islands, you must pass through
+the Streights of Malacca or Sundy, or else some other Streights East
+from Java, where you will be sure to meet with Country [i.e., contrary]
+-winds, go on which side of the Equator you please; and this would
+require ordinarily 7 or 8 Months for the Voyage, but the other I should
+hope to perform in 6 or 7 at most. In your return from thence also you
+must observe the same Rule as the Spaniards do in going from Manila to
+Acapulco; [11] only as they run towards the North-Pole for variable
+Winds, so you must run to the Southward, till you meet with a Wind
+that will carry you over to Terra del Fuego. There are places enough
+to touch at for Refreshment, either going or coming. You may touch
+going thither on either side of Terra Patagonica, or, if you please,
+at the Gallapagoes Islands, [12] where there is Refreshment enough;
+and returning you may probably touch somewhere on New Holland, and
+so make some profitable discovery in these Places without going out
+of your way. And to speak my Thoughts freely, I believe 'tis owing
+to the neglect of this easie way that all that vast Tract of Terra
+Australis which bounds the South Sea is yet undiscovered: those that
+cross that Sea seeming to design some Business on the Peruvian or
+Mexican Coast, and so leaving that at a distance. To confirm which,
+I shall add what Captain Davis [13] told me lately, That after his
+departure from us at the Haven of Ria Lexa [14] (as is mentioned in
+the 8th Chap.) he went after several Traverses, to the Gallapagoes
+and that standing thus Southward for Wind, to bring him about Terra
+del Fuego, in the Lat. of 27 South, about 500 Leagues from Copayapo,
+[15] on the Coast of Chili, he saw a small sandy Island just by him;
+and that they saw to the Westward of it a long Tract of pretty high
+Land, tending away toward the North West out of sight. This might
+probably be the Coast of Terra Australis Incognita.
+
+But to return to Mindanao; as to the capacity we were then in, of
+settling our selves at Mindanao, although we were not sent out of
+any such design of settling, yet we were as well provided, or better,
+considering all Circumstances, than if we had. For there was scarce any
+useful Trade, but some or other of us understood it. We had Sawyers,
+Carpenters, Joyners, Brickmakers, Bricklayers, Shoemakers, Taylors,
+&c. we only wanted a good Smith for great Work; which we might have
+had at Mindanao. We were very well provided with Iron, Lead, and all
+sorts of Tools, as Saws, Axes, Hammers, &c. We had powder and Shot
+enough, and very good small Arms. If we had designed to build a Fort,
+we could have spared 8 or 10 Guns out of our Ship, and Men enough to
+have managed it, and any Affair of Trade beside. We had also a great
+Advantage above raw Men that are sent out of England into these places,
+who proceed usually too cautiously, coldly and formally, to compass
+any considerable design, which Experience better teaches than any
+Rules whatsoever; besides the danger of their Lives in so great and
+sudden a change of Air: whereas we were all inured to hot Climates,
+hardened by many Fatigues, and, in general, daring Men, and such
+as would not be easily baffled. To add one thing more, our Men were
+almost tired, and began to desire a quietus est; and therefore they
+would gladly have seated themselves any where. We had a good Ship
+too, and enough of us (beside what might have been spared to manage
+our new Settlement) to bring the News with the Effects to the Owners
+in England: for Captain Swan had already 5000 l. in Gold, which he
+and his Merchants received for Goods sold mostly to Captain Harris
+[16] and his Men: which if he had laid but part of it out in Spice,
+as probably he might have done, would have satisfy'd the Merchants
+to their Hearts content. So much by way of digression.
+
+To proceed therefore with our first Reception at Mindanao, Raja
+Laut and his Nephew sat still in their Canoa, and would not come
+aboard us; because, as they said, they had no Orders for it from the
+Sultan. After about half an Hour's Discourse, they took their leaves,
+first inviting Captain Swan ashore, and promising him to assist him
+in getting Provision; which they said at present was scarce, but in
+three or four Month's time the Rice would be gathered in, and then he
+might have as much as he pleased: and that in the mean time he might
+secure his Ship in some convenient place, for fear of the Westerly
+winds, which they said would be very violent at the latter end of
+this Month, and all the next, as we found them.
+
+We did not know the quality of these two Persons till after they
+were gone; else we should have fir'd some Guns at their Departure:
+When they were gone, a certain Officer under the Sultan came aboard
+and measured our Ship. A custom derived from the Chinese, who always
+measure the length and breadth, and the depth of the Hold of all Ships
+that come to load there; by which means they know how much each Ship
+will carry. But for what reason this Custom is used either by the
+Chinese, or Mindanao Men, I could never learn; unless the Mindanaians
+design by this means to improve their skill in Shipping, against they
+have a Trade.
+
+Captain Swan, considering that the Season of the Year would oblige
+us to spend some time at this Island, thought it convenient to
+make what interest he could with the Sultan; who might afterwards
+either obstruct, or advance his designs. He therefore immediately
+provided a Present to send ashore to the Sultan, viz. 3 Yards of
+Scarlet Cloth, 3 Yards of broad Gold Lace, a Turkish Scimiter and a
+Pair of Pistols: and to Raja Laut he sent 3 Yards of Scarlet Cloth,
+and 3 Yards of Silver Lace. This Present was carried by Mr. Henry
+More in the Evening. He was first conducted to Raja Laut's House;
+where he remained till report thereof was made to the Sultan, who
+immediately gave order for all things to be made ready to receive him.
+
+About Nine a Clock at Night, a Messenger came from the Sultan to bring
+the Present away. Then Mr. More was conducted all the way with Torches
+and armed Men, till he came to the House where the Sultan was. The
+Sultan with eight or ten Men of his Council were seated on Carpets,
+waiting his coming. The Present that Mr. More brought was laid down
+before them, and was very kindly accepted by the Sultan, who caused
+Mr. More to sit down by them, and asked a great many questions of
+him. The discourse was in Spanish by an Interpreter. This Conference
+lasted about an Hour, and then he was dismist, and returned again
+to Raja Laut's House. There was a Supper provided for him, and the
+Boats Crew; after which he returned aboard.
+
+The next Day the Sultan sent for Capt. Swan: He immediately went
+ashore with a Flag flying in the Boats Head, and two Trumpets sounding
+all the way. When he came ashore, he was met at his Landing by two
+principal Officers, guarded along with Soldiers, and abundance of
+People gazing to see him. The Sultan waited for him in his Chamber
+of Audience, where Captain Swan was treated with Tobacco and Betel,
+which was all his Entertainment.
+
+The Sultan sent for two English Letters for Captain Swan to read,
+purposely to let him know, that our East-India Merchants did design
+to settle here, and that they had already sent a Ship hither. One of
+these Letters was sent to the Sultan from England, by the East-India
+Merchants. The chiefest things contained in it, as I remember, for I
+saw it afterwards in the Secretaries Hand, who was very proud to shew
+it to us, was to desire some privileges, in order to the building of a
+Fort there. This Letter was written in a very fair Hand; and between
+each Line, there was a Gold Line drawn. The other Letter was left
+by Captain Goodlud, directed to any English Men who should happen
+to come thither. This related wholly to Trade, giving an account,
+at what rate he had agreed with them for Goods of the Island, and
+how European Goods should be sold to them; with an account of their
+Weight and Measures, and their difference from ours.
+
+The rate agreed on for Mindanao Gold, was 14 Spanish Dollars,
+(which is a current Coin all over India) the English Ounce, and 18
+Dollars the Mindanao Ounce. But for Bees-wax and Clove-bark, I do
+not remember the rate neither do I well remember the rates of Europe
+Commodities; but I think the rate of Iron was not above four Dollars
+a Hundred. Captain Goodlud's Letter concluded thus, Trust none of
+them, for they are all Thieves, but Tace is Latin for a Candle. We
+understood afterwards that Captain Goodlud was robb'd of some Goods
+by one of the General's Men, and that he that robb'd him was fled
+into the Mountains, and could not be found while Captain Goodlud was
+here. But the Fellow returning back to the City some time after our
+arrival here, Raja Laut brought him bound to Captain Swan, and told
+him what he had done, desiring him to punish him for it as he pleased;
+but Captain Swan excused himself; and said it did not belong to him,
+therefore he would have nothing to do with it. However, the General
+Raja Laut, would not pardon him, but punished him according to their
+own Custom, which I did never see but at this time.
+
+He was stript stark naked in the Morning at Sunrising, and bound
+to a Post, so that he could not stir Hand nor Foot, but as he was
+mov'd; and was placed with his Face Eastward against the Sun. In the
+Afternoon they turned his Face toward the West, that the Sun might
+still be in his Face; and thus he stood all Day, parcht in the Sun
+(which shines here excessively hot) and tormented with the Moskitos
+or Gnats: After this the General would have kill'd him, if Captain
+Swan had consented to it. I did never see any put to Death; but I
+believe they are barbarous enough in it: The General told us himself
+that he put two Men to Death in a Town where some of us were with him;
+but I heard not the manner of it. Their common way of punishing is to
+strip them in this manner, and place them in the Sun; but sometimes
+they lay them flat on their Backs on the Sand, which is very hot;
+where they remain a whole Day in the scorching Sun, with the Moskito's
+biting them all the time.
+
+This action of the General in offering Captain Swan the punishment of
+the Thief, caus'd Captain Swan afterwards to make him the same offer
+of his Men, when any had offended the Mindanao Men: but the General
+left such Offenders to be punished by Captain Swan, as he thought
+convenient. So that for the least Offence Captain Swan punished his
+Men, and that in the sight of the Mindanaians; and I think sometimes
+only for revenge; as he did once punish his Chief Mate Mr. Teat,
+he that came Captain of the Bark to Mindanao. Indeed at that time
+Captain Swan had his Men as much under command as if he had been in
+a King's Ship; and had he known how to use his Authority, he might
+have led them to any Settlement, and have brought them to assist him
+in any design he had pleased.
+
+Captain Swan being dismist from the Sultan, with abundance of
+civility, after about two Hours Discourse with him, went thence to Raja
+Laut's House. Raja Laut had then some difference with the Sultan, and
+therefore he was not present at the Sultan's reception of our Captain,
+but waited his return, and treated him and all his Men with boiled Rice
+and Fowls. He then told Captain Swan again, and urged it to him, that
+it would be best to get his Ship into the River as soon as he could,
+because of the usual tempestuous Weather at this time of the Year;
+and that he should want no assistance to further him in any thing. He
+told him also, that as we must of necessity stay here some time, so
+our Men would often come ashore; and he therefore desired him to warn
+his Men to be careful to give no afront to the Natives; who, he said,
+were very revengeful. That their Customs being different from ours, he
+feared that Captain Swan's Men might some time or other offend them,
+though ignorantly; that therefore he gave him this friendly warning,
+to prevent it: that his House should always be open to receive him
+or any of his Men, and that he knowing our Customs, would never be
+offended at any thing. After a great deal of such Discourse he dismist
+the Captain and his Company, who took their leave and came aboard.
+
+Captain Swan having seen the two Letters, did not doubt but that the
+English did design to settle a Factory here: therefore he did not much
+scruple the honesty of these People, but immediately ordered us to get
+the Ship into the River. The River upon which the City of Mindanao
+stands is but small, and hath not above 10 or 11 Foot Water on the
+Bar at a Spring-tide: therefore we lightened our Ship, and the Spring
+coming on, we with much ado got her into the River, being assisted by
+50 or 60 Mindanaian Fishermen, who liv'd at the Mouth of the River;
+Raja Laut himself being aboard our Ship to direct them. We carried
+her about a quarter of a Mile up, within the Mouth of the River,
+and there moored her, Head and Stern in a hole, where we always rode
+afloat. After this the Citizens of Mindanao came frequently aboard, to
+invite our Men to their Houses, and to offer us Pagallies. 'Twas a long
+time since any of us had received such Friendship, and therefore we
+were the more easily drawn to accept of their kindnesses; and in a very
+short time most of our Men got a Comrade or two, and as many Pagallies;
+especially such of us as had good Cloths, and store of Gold, as many
+had, who were of the number of those, that accompanied Captain Harris
+over the Isthmus of Darien, the rest of us being Poor enough. Nay,
+the very Poorest and Meanest of us could hardly pass the Streets, but
+we were even hal'd by Force into their Houses, to be treated by them;
+altho' their Treats were but mean, viz. Tobacco, or Betel-Nut, or a
+little sweet spiced Water. Yet their seeming Sincerity, Simplicity, and
+the manner of bestowing these Gifts, made them very acceptable. When
+we came to their Houses, they would always be praising the English,
+as declaring that the English and Mindanaians were all one. This they
+exprest by putting their two Fore-fingers close together, and saying,
+that the English and Mindanaians were samo, samo, [17] that is, all
+one. Then they would draw their Fore-fingers half a Foot asunder,
+and say the Dutch and they were Bugeto, which signifies so, that they
+were at such distance in point of Friendship: And for the Spaniards,
+they would make a greater Representation of distance than for the
+Dutch: Fearing these, but having felt, and smarted from the Spaniards,
+who had once almost brought them under.
+
+Captain Swan did seldom go into any House at first, but into Raja
+Laut's. There he dined commonly every day; and as many of his Men as
+were ashore, and had no Money to Entertain themselves, resorted thither
+about 12 a Clock, where they had Rice enough boiled and well drest, and
+some scraps of Fowls, or bits of Buffaloe, drest very nastily. Captain
+Swan was served a little better, and his two trumpeters sounded all
+the time that he was at Dinner. After Dinner Raja Laut would sit
+and Discourse with him most part of the Afternoon. It was now that
+Ramdam time, therefore the General excused himself, that he could not
+Entertain our Captain with Dances, and other Pastimes, as he intended
+to do when this solemn Time was past; besides, it was the very height
+of the wet Season, and therefore not so proper for Pastimes.
+
+We had now very tempestuous Weather, and excessive Rains, which so
+swell'd the River, that it overflowed its Banks; so that we had much
+ado to keep our Ship safe: For every now and then we should have a
+great Tree come floating down the River, and sometimes lodge against
+our Bows, to the endangering the breaking our Cables, and either the
+driving us in, over the Banks, or carrying us out to Sea; both which
+would have been very dangerous to us, especially being without Ballast.
+
+The City is about a Mile long (of no great breadth) winding with
+the Banks of the River on the Right Hand going up, tho' it hath many
+Houses on the other side too. But at this time it seemed to stand as
+in a Pond, and there was no passing from one House to another but in
+Canoas. This tempestuous Rainy Weather happened the latter end of July,
+and lasted most part of August.
+
+When the bad Weather was a little asswaged, Captain Swan hired a
+House to put our Sails and Goods in, while we careen'd our Ship. We
+had a great deal of Iron and Lead, which was brought ashore into this
+House. Of these Commodities Captain Swan sold to the Sultan or General,
+Eight or Ten Tuns, at the Rates agreed on by Captain Goodlud to be
+paid in Rice. The Mindanaians are no good Accomptants; therefore the
+Chinese that live here, do cast up their Accompts for them. After this
+Captain Swan bought Timber-trees of the General, and set some of our
+Men to Saw them into Planks, to Sheath the Ship's bottom. He had two
+Whip-Saws on Board, which he brought out of England, and four or five
+Men that knew the use of them, for they had been Sawyers in Jamaica.
+
+When the Ramdam time was over, and the dry time set in a little,
+the General, to oblige Captain Swan, entertained him every Night with
+Dances. The dancing Women that are purposely bred up to it, and make
+it their Trade, I have already described. But beside them, all the
+Women in general are much addicted to Dancing. They Dance 40 or 50 at
+once; and that standing all round in a Ring, joined Hand in Hand, and
+Singing and keeping time. But they never budge out of their places,
+nor make any motion till the Chorus is Sung; then all at once they
+throw out one Leg, and bawl out aloud; and sometimes they only Clap
+their Hands when the Chorus is Sung. Captain Swan, to retaliate the
+General's Favours, sent for his Violins, and some that could Dance
+English Dances; wherewith the General was very well pleased. They
+commonly spent the biggest part of the Night in these sort of Pastimes.
+
+Among the rest of our Men that did use to Dance thus before the
+General, there was one John Thacker, who was a Seaman bred, and
+could neither Write nor Read; but had formerly learnt to Dance in
+the Musick-Houses about Wapping: This Man came into the South Seas
+with Captain Harris, and getting with him a good quantity of Gold,
+and being a pretty good Husband of his Share, had still had some
+left, besides what he laid out in a very good Suit of Cloaths. The
+General supposed by his Garb and his Dancing, that he had been of
+noble Extraction; and to be satisfy'd of his Quality, asked of our
+Men, if he did not guess aright of him? The Man of whom the General
+asked this Question told him, he was much in the right; and that
+most of our Ship's Company were of the like Extraction; especially
+all those that had fine Cloaths; and that they came aboard only to
+see the World, having Money enough to bear their expences where-ever
+they came; but that for the rest, those that had but mean Clothes,
+they were only common Seamen. After this, the General shew'd a great
+deal of Respect to all that had good Clothes, but especially to John
+Thacker, till Captain Swan came to know the Business, and marr'd all;
+undeceiving the General, and drubbing the Noble-Man: For he was so
+much incensed against John Thacker, that he could never indure him
+afterwards; tho' the poor Fellow knew nothing of the Matter.
+
+About the middle of November we began to work on our Ship's bottom,
+which we found very much eaten with the Worm: For this is a horrid
+place for Worms. We did not know this till after we had been in
+the River a Month; and then we found our Canoas bottoms eaten like
+Honey-combs; our Bark, which was a single bottom, was eaten thro';
+so that she could not swim. But our Ship was sheathed, and the Worm
+came no farther than the Hair between the sheathing Plank, and the
+main Plank. We did not mistrust the General's Knavery till now: for
+when he came down to our Ship, and found us ripping off the sheathing
+Plank, and saw the firm bottom underneath, he shook his Head, and
+seemed to be discontented; saying he did never see a Ship with two
+bottoms before. We were told that in this place, where we now lay,
+a Dutch Ship was eaten up in two months time, and the General had all
+her Guns; and it is probable he did expect to have had Ours: Which I
+do believe was the main Reason that made him so forward in assisting
+us to get our Ship into the River, for when we went out again we had
+no Assistance from him. We had no Worms till we came to this place:
+For when we Careen'd at the Marias, the Worm had not touch'd us; nor at
+Guam, for there we scrubb'd; nor after we came to the Island Mindanao;
+for at the S.E. end of the Island we heel'd and scrubb'd also. The
+Mindanaians are so sensible of their destructive Insects, that whenever
+they come from Sea, they immediately hale their Ship into a dry Dock,
+and burn her bottom, and there let her lye dry till they are ready
+to get to Sea again. The Canoas or Proes they hale up dry, and never
+suffer them to be long in the Water. It is reported that those Worms
+which get into a Ships bottom in the salt Water, will die in the
+fresh Water; and that the fresh Water Worms will die in Salt Water:
+but in brackish Water both sorts will increase prodigiously. Now this
+place where we lay was sometimes brackish Water, yet commonly fresh;
+but what sort of Worm this was I know not. Some Men are of Opinion,
+that these Worms breed in the Plank; but I am perswaded they breed
+in the Sea: For I have seen Millions of them swimming in the Water,
+particularly in the Bay of Panama; for there Captain Davis, Captain
+Swan and my self, and most of our Men, did take notice of them divers
+times, which was the reason of our Cleaning so often while we were
+there: and these were the largest Worms that I did ever see. I have
+also seen them in Virginia, and in the Bay of Campeachy; in the
+latter of which places the Worms eat prodigiously. They are always
+in Bays, Creeks, Mouths of Rivers, and such places as are near the
+shore; being never found far out at Sea, that I could ever learn:
+yet a Ship will bring them lodg'd in its Plank for a great way.
+
+Having thus ript off all our Worm-eaten Plank, and clapt on new, by
+the beginning of December 1686, our Ships bottom was sheathed and
+tallowed, and the 10th Day went over the Bar, and took aboard the
+Iron and Lead that we could not sell, and began to fill our Water,
+and fetch aboard Rice for our Voyage: But C. Swan remain'd ashore
+still, and was not yet determin'd when to sail, or whither. But I
+am well assured that he did never intend to Cruise about Manila, as
+his Crew designed; for I did once ask him, and he told me, That what
+he had already done of that kind he was forc'd to; but now being at
+Liberty, he would never more Engage in any such Design: For, said he,
+there is no Prince on Earth is able to wipe off the Stain of such
+Actions. What other Designs he had I know not, for he was commonly
+very Cross; yet he did never propose doing any thing else, but only
+ordered the Provision to be got Aboard in order to Sail; and I am
+confident if he had made a motion to go to any English Factory, most
+of his Men would have consented to it, tho' probably some would have
+still opposed it. How ever, his Authority might soon have over-sway'd
+those that were Refractory; for it was very strange to see the Awe
+that these Men were in of him, for he punished the most stubborn and
+daring of his Men. Yet when we had brought the Ship out into the Road,
+they were not altogether so submissive, as while it lay in the River,
+tho' even then it was that he punished Captain Teat.
+
+I was at that time a Hunting with the General for Beef, which he
+had a long time promised us. But now I saw that there was no Credit
+to be given to his Word; for I was a Week out with him and saw but
+four Cows, which were so wild, that we did not get one. There were
+five or six more of our Company with me; these who were young Men,
+and had Dalilahs there, which made them fond of the Place, all agreed
+with the General to tell Captain Swan, that there were Beeves enough,
+only they were wild. But I told him the Truth, and advised him not
+to be too credulous of the General's Promises. He seemed to be very
+angry, and stormed behind the General's Back, but in his Presence
+was very mute, being a Man of small Courage.
+
+It was about the 20th Day of December when we returned from Hunting,
+and the General designed to go again to another place to Hunt for Beef;
+but he stayed till after Christmas-day, because some of us designed
+to go with him; and Captain Swan had desired all his Men to be aboard
+that Day, that we might keep it solemnly together: And accordingly
+he sent aboard a Buffaloe the Day before, that we might have a good
+Dinner. So the 25th Day about 10 a Clock, Captain Swan came aboard,
+and all his Men who were ashore: For you must understand that near
+a third of our Men lived constantly ashore, with their Comrades and
+Pagallies, and some with Women servants, whom they hired of their
+Masters for Concubines. Some of our Men also had Houses, which
+they hired or bought, for Houses are very cheap, for five or six
+Dollars. For many of them having more Money than they knew what to do
+with, eased themselves here of the trouble of telling it, spending it
+very lavishly, their prodigality making the People impose upon them,
+to the making the rest of us pay the dearer for what we bought, and
+to the endangering the like impositions upon such Englishmen as may
+come here hereafter. For the Mindanaians knew how to get our Squires
+Gold from them (for we had no Silver,) and when our Men wanted Silver,
+they would change now and then an Ounce of Gold, and could get for
+it no more than 10 or 11 Dollars for a Mindanao Ounce, which they
+would not part with again under 18 Dollars. Yet this, and the great
+prices the Mindanaians set on their Goods, were not the only way to
+lessen their stocks; for their Pagallies and Comrades would often be
+begging somewhat of them, and our Men were generous enough, and would
+bestow half an Ounce of Gold at a time, in a Ring for their Pagallies,
+or in a Silver Wrist-band, or Hoop to come about their Arms, in hopes
+to get a Nights Lodging with them.
+
+When we were all aboard on Christmas-day, Captain Swan and his
+two Merchants; I did expect that Captain Swan would have made some
+proposals, or have told us his designs; but he only dined and went
+ashore again, without speaking any thing of his Mind. Yet even then I
+do think that he was driving on a design, of going to one of the Spice
+Islands, to load with Spice; for the Young Man before mentioned, who I
+said was sent by his Unkle, the Sultan of a Spice Island near Ternate,
+to invite the English to their Island, came aboard at this time, and
+after some private Discourse with Captain Swan, they both went ashore
+together. This Young Man did not care that the Mindanaians should be
+privy to what he said. I have heard Captain Swan say that he offered
+to load his Ship with Spice, provided he would build a small Fort,
+and leave some Men to secure the Island from the Dutch; but I am
+since informed, that the Dutch have now got possession of the Island.
+
+The next Day after Christmas the General went away again, and five or
+six Englishmen with him, of whom I was one, under pretence of going
+a hunting; and we all went together by Water in his Proe, together
+with his Women and Servants, to the hunting place. The General always
+carried his Wives and Children, his Money and Goods with him: so we
+all imbarked in the Morning, and arrived there before Night. I have
+already described the fashion of their Proes, and the Rooms made in
+them. We were entertained in the General's Room or Cabbin. Our Voyage
+was not so far, but that we reached our Port before Night.
+
+At this time one of the General's Servants had offended, and was
+punished in this manner: He was bound fast flat on his Belly, on a
+Bamboe belonging to the Proe, which was so near the Water, that by
+the Vessel's motion, it frequently delved under Water, and the Man
+along with it; and sometimes when hoisted up, he had scarce time to
+blow before he would be carried under Water again.
+
+When we had rowed about two Leagues, we entered a pretty large
+deep River, and rowed up a League further, the Water salt all the
+way. There was a pretty large Village, the Houses built after the
+Country fashion. We landed at this place, where there was a House
+made ready immediately for us. The General and his Women lay at one
+end of the House, and we at the other end, and in the Evening all
+the Women in the Village danced before the General.
+
+While he staid here, the General with his Men went out every Morning
+betimes, and did not return till four or five a Clock in the Afternoon,
+and he would often complement us, by telling us what good Trust and
+Confidence he had in us, saying that he left his Women and Goods
+under our Protection, and that he thought them as secure with us six,
+(for we had all our Arms with us) as if he had left 100 of his own
+Men to guard them. Yet for all this great Confidence, he always left
+one of his principal Men, for fear some of us should be too familiar
+with his Women.
+
+They did never stir out of their own Room when the General was at
+Home, but as soon as he was gone out, they would presently come into
+our Room, and sit with us all Day, and ask a Thousand Questions of us
+concerning our English Women, and our Customs. You may imagine that
+before this time, some of us had attained so much of their Language
+as to understand them, and give them Answers to their Demands. I
+remember that one Day they asked how many Wives the King of England
+had? We told them but one, and that our English Laws did not allow
+of any more. They said it was a strange Custom, that a Man should
+be confined to one Woman; some of them said it was a very bad Law,
+but others again said it was a good Law; so there was a great Dispute
+among them about it. But one of the General's Women said positively,
+That our Law was better than theirs, and made them all silent by the
+Reason which she gave for it. This was the War Queen, as we called
+her, for she did always Accompany the General whenever he was called
+out to Engage his Enemies, but the rest did not.
+
+By this Familiarity among the Women, and by often discoursing [with]
+them, we came to be acquainted with their Customs and Priviledges. The
+General lies with his Wives by turns; but she by whom he had the
+first Son, has a double Portion of his Company: For when it comes
+to her turn, she has him two Nights, whereas the rest have him but
+one. She with whom he is to lye at Night, seems to have a particular
+Respect shewn her by the rest all the precedent Day; and for a Mark
+of distinction, wears a striped silk Handkerchief about her Neck,
+by which we knew who was Queen that Day.
+
+We lay here about five or six Days, but did never in all that time
+see the least sign of any Beef, which was the Business we came about;
+neither were we suffered to go out with the General to see the wild
+Kine, but we wanted for nothing else: However, this did not please us,
+and we often importuned him to let go out among the Cattle. At last he
+told us, That he had provided a Jar of Rice-drink to be merry with us,
+and after that we should go with him.
+
+This Rice-drink is made of Rice boiled and put into a Jar, where it
+remains a long time steeping in Water. I know not the manner of making
+it, but it is very strong pleasant Drink. The Evening when the General
+designed to be merry, he caused a Jar of this Drink to be brought into
+our Room, and he began to drink first himself, then afterwards his Men;
+so they took turns till they were all as drunk as Swine, before they
+suffered us to drink. After they had enough, then we drank, and they
+drank no more, for they will not drink after us. The General leapt
+about our Room a little while; but having his Load soon went to sleep.
+
+The next Day we went out with the General into the Savannah, where we
+had near 100 Men making of a large Pen to drive the Cattle into. For
+that is the manner of their Hunting, having no Dogs. But I saw not
+above 8 or 10 Cows, and those as wild as Deer so that we got none
+this Day: yet the next Day some of his Men brought in 3 Heifers,
+which they kill'd in the Savannah. With these we returned aboard,
+they being all that we got there.
+
+Captain Swan was much vext at the Generals Actions; for he promised
+to supply us with as much Beef as we should want, but now either could
+not, or would not make good his promise. Besides, he failed to perform
+his Promise in a bargain of Rice, that we were to have for the iron
+which he sold him, but he put us off still from time to time, and
+would not come to any Account. Neither were these all his Tricks;
+for a little before his Son was Circumcised, (of which I spake in
+the foregoing Chapter) he pretended a great streight for Money,
+to defray the Charges of that Day; and therefore desired Captain
+Swan to lend him about 20 Ounces of Gold; for he knew that Captain
+Swan had a considerable quantity of Gold in his possession, which
+the General thought was his own, but indeed [he] had none but what
+belonged to the Merchants. However he lent it the General, but when
+he came to an Account with Captain Swan, he told him, that it was
+usual at such solemn times to make Presents, and that he received it
+as a Gift. He also demanded Payment for the Victuals that our Captain
+and his Men did eat at his House. These things startled Captain Swan,
+yet how to help himself he knew not. But all this, with other inward
+troubles, lay hard on our Captain's Spirits, and put him very much
+out of Humour; for his own Company also were pressing him every Day
+to be gone, because, now was the heighth of the Easterly Monsoon,
+the only Wind to carry us farther into the Indies.
+
+About this time some of our Men, who were weary and tired with
+wandring, ran away into the Country and absconded, they being assisted,
+as was generally believed, by Raja Laut. There were others also,
+who fearing we should not go to an English Port, bought a Canoa,
+and designed to go in her to Borneo: For not long before a Mindanao
+Vessel came from thence, and brought a Letter directed to the chief
+of the English Factory at Mindanao. This Letter the General would
+have Captain Swan have opened, but he thought it might come from some
+of the East-India Merchants whose Affairs he would not intermeddle
+with, and therefore did not open it. I since met Captain Bowry [18]
+at Achin, and telling him this Story, he said that he sent that Letter,
+supposing that the English were settled there at Mindanao, and by this
+Letter we also thought that there was an English Factory at Borneo:
+so here was a mistake on both sides. But this Canoa, wherewith some
+of them thought to go to Borneo, Captain Swan took from them, and
+threatned the Undertakers very hardly. However, this did not so far
+discourage them, for they secretly bought another; but their Designs
+taking Air, they were again frustrated by Captain Swan.
+
+The whole Crew were at this time under a general Disaffection, and
+full of very different Projects; and all for want of Action. The
+main Division was between those that had Money and those that had
+none. There was a great Difference in the Humours of these; for they
+that had Money liv'd ashore, and did not care for leaving Mindanao;
+whilst those that were poor liv'd Aboard, and urg'd Capt. Swan to go
+to Sea. These began to be Unruly as well as Dissatisfy'd, and sent
+ashore the Merchants Iron to sell for Rack and Honey, to make Punch,
+wherewith they grew Drunk and Quarelsome: Which disorderly Actions
+deterr'd me from going Aboard; for I did ever abhor Drunkenness,
+which now our Men that were Aboard abandon'd themselves wholly to.
+
+Yet these Disorders might have been crusht, if Capt. Swan had used his
+Authority to Suppress them: But he with his Merchants living always
+ashore, there was no Command; and therefore every Man did what he
+pleased and encouraged each other in his Villanies. Now Mr. Harthop,
+who was one of Captain Swan's Merchants, did very much importune him
+to settle his Resolutions, and declare his Mind to his Men; which at
+last he consented to do. Therefore he gave warning to all his Men to
+come Aboard the 13th day of January, 1687.
+
+We did all earnestly expect to hear what Captain Swan would propose,
+and therefore were very willing to go Aboard. But unluckily for him,
+two days before this Meeting was to be, Captain Swan sent Aboard
+his Gunner, to fetch something ashore out of his Cabbin. The Gunner
+rummaging to find what he was sent for, among other things took out
+the Captain's Journal from America to the Island Guam, and laid [it]
+down by him. This Journal was taken up by one John Read, a Bristol man,
+whom I have mentioned in my 4th Chapter. He was a pretty Ingenious
+young Man, and of a very civil carriage and behaviour. He was also
+accounted a good Artist, and kept a Journal, and was now prompted
+by his curiosity, to peep into Captain Swan's Journal, to see how
+it agreed with his own; a thing very usual among Seamen that keep
+Journals, when they have an opportunity, and especially young Men, who
+have no great experience. At the first opening of the Book, he lights
+on a place in which Captain Swan had inveighed bitterly against most
+of his Men, especially against another John Reed a Jamaica man. This
+was such stuff as he did not seek after: But hitting so pat on this
+subject, his curiosity led him to pry farther; and therefore while
+the Gunner was busie, he convey'd the Book away, to look over it at
+his leisure. The Gunner having dispatch'd his business, lock'd up
+the Cabbin-door, not missing the Book, and went ashore. Then John
+Reed shewed it to his Namesake, and to the rest that were aboard,
+who were by this time the biggest part of them ripe for mischief; only
+wanting some fair pretence to set themselves to work upon it. Therefore
+looking on what was written in this Journal to be matter sufficient
+for them to accomplish their Ends, Captain Teat, who as I said before,
+had been abused by Captain Swan, laid hold on this opportunity to be
+revenged for his Injuries, and aggravated the matter to the height;
+perswading the Men to turn out Captain Swan from being Commander, in
+hopes to have commanded the Ship himself. As for the Sea-men they were
+easily perswaded to anything; for they were quite tired with this long
+and tedious Voyage, and most of them despaired of ever getting home,
+and therefore did not care what they did, or whither they went. It was
+only want of being busied in some Action that made them so uneasie;
+therefore they consented to what Teat proposed, and immediately all
+that were aboard bound themselves by Oath to turn Captain Swan out,
+and to conceal this design from those that were ashore, until the
+Ship was under Sail; which would have been presently, if the Surgeon
+or his Mate had been aboard; but they were both ashore, and they
+thought it no Prudence to go to Sea without a Surgeon: Therefore
+the next Morning they sent ashore one John Cookworthy, to hasten off
+either the Surgeon or his Mate, by pretending that one of the Men in
+the Night broke his Leg by falling into the Hold. The Surgeon told
+him that he intended to come aboard the next Day with the Captain,
+and would not come before: but sent his Mate, Herman Coppinger.
+
+This Man sometime before this, was sleeping at his Pegallies, and a
+Snake twisted himself about his Neck; but afterwards went away without
+hurting him. In this Country it is usual to have the Snakes come into
+the Houses, and into the Ships too; for we had several come aboard
+our Ship when we lay in the River. But to proceed, Herman Coppinger
+provided to go aboard; and the next day, being the time appointed for
+Captain Swan and all his Men to meet aboard, I went aboard with him,
+neither of us mistrusted what was designing by those aboard, till we
+came thither. Then we found it was only a trick to get the Surgeon off;
+for now, having obtained their Desires, the Canoa was sent ashore again
+immediately, to desire as many as they could meet to come aboard; but
+not to tell the Reason, lest Captain Swan should come to hear of it.
+
+The 13th Day in the Morning they weighed, and fired a Gun: Capt. Swan
+immediately sent aboard Mr. Nelly, who was now his chief Mate, to
+see what the matter was: To him they told all their Grievances, and
+shewed him the Journal. He perswaded them to stay till the next day,
+for an Answer from Captain Swan and the Merchants. So they came to
+an Anchor again, and the next Morning Mr. Harthop came aboard: He
+perswaded them to be reconciled again, or at least to stay and get
+more Rice: But they were deaf to it, and weighed again while he was
+aboard. Yet at Mr. Harthop's Perswasion they promised to stay till 2
+a Clock in the Afternoon for Captain Swan, and the rest of the Men,
+if they would come aboard; but they suffered no Man to go ashore,
+except one William Williams that had a wooden Leg, and another that
+was a Sawyer.
+
+If Capt. Swan had yet come aboard, he might have dash'd all their
+designs; but he neither came himself, as a Captain of any Prudence
+and Courage would have done, nor sent till the time was expired. So
+we left Captain Swan and about 36 Men ashore in the City, and 6 or
+8 that run away; and about 16 we had buried there, the most of which
+died by Poison. The Natives are very expert at Poisoning, and do it
+upon small occasions: Nor did our Men want for giving Offence, through
+their general Rogueries, and sometimes by dallying too familiarly with
+their Women, even before their Faces. Some of their Poisons are slow
+and lingering; for we had some now aboard who were Poison'd there;
+but died not till some Months after.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XIV
+
+    They depart from the River of Mindanao. Of the time lost or
+    gain'd in sailing round the World: With a Caution to Seamen,
+    about the allowance they are to take for difference of the
+    Suns declination. The South Coast of Mindanao. Chambongo Town
+    an Harbour with its Neighbouring Keys. Green Turtle. Ruins of
+    a Spanish Fort. The Westermost point of Mindanao. Two Proes
+    of the Sologues laden from Manila. An Isle to the West of
+    Sebo. Walking Canes. Isle of Batts, very large; and numerous
+    Turtles and Manatee. A dangerous Shoal. They sail by Panay
+    belonging to the Spaniards, and others of the Philippine
+    Islands. Isle of Mindora. Two Barks taken. A further account
+    of the Isle Luconia, and the City and Harbour of Manila. They
+    go off Pulo Condore to lye there. The Shoals of Pracel,
+    &c. Pulo Condore. The Tar-tree. The Mango. Grape-tree. The
+    Wild or Bastard Nutmeg. Their Animals. Of the Migration of
+    the Turtle from place to place. Of the Commodious Situation of
+    Pulo Condore; its Water and its Cochinchinese Inhabitants. Of
+    the Malayan Tongue. The Custom of prostituting their Women in
+    these Countries, and in Guinea. The Idolatry here, at Tunquin,
+    and among the Chinese Seamen, and of a Procession at Fort
+    St. George. They refit their Ship. Two of them dye of Poyson
+    they took at Mindanao. They take in Water, and a Pilot for the
+    Bay of Siam. Puly Uby; and Point of Cambodia. Two Cambodian
+    Vessels. Isles in the Bay of Siam. The tight Vessels and
+    Seamen of the Kingdom of Champa. Storms. A Chinese Jonk from
+    Palimbam in Sumatra. They come again to Pulo Condore. A bloody
+    Fray with a Malayan Vessel. The Surgeon's and the Author's
+    desires of leaving their Crew.
+
+
+The 14th Day of January, 1687, at 3 of the Clock in the Afternoon
+we sailed from the River of Mindanao, designing to cruise before
+Manila. [19]
+
+[During their stay at Mindanao the English first notice the change of
+time due to their having journeyed westward. There and in other places
+they find the people reckoning a full day ahead of themselves, due to
+the fact that the Portuguese had journeyed thither to the eastward. The
+computation at the Ladrones is the same as their own. "But how the
+reckoning was at Manila, and the rest of the Spanish Colonies in
+the Philippine Islands, I know not; whether they keep it as they
+brought it, or corrected it by the Accounts of the Natives, and of the
+Portuguese, Dutch and English, coming the contrary way from Europe."]
+
+We had the Wind at N.N.E. fair clear Weather, and a brisk Gale. We
+coasted to the Westward, on the South-side of the Island of Mindanao,
+keeping within 4 or 5 Leagues of the Shore. The Land from hence tends
+away W. by S. It is of a good height by the Sea, and very woody,
+and in the Country we saw high Hills.
+
+The next Day we were abrest of Chambongo [i.e., Zamboanga]; a Town
+in this Island, and 30 Leagues from the River of Mindanao. Here is
+said to be a good Harbour, and a great Settlement, with plenty of
+Beef and Buffaloe. It is reported that the Spaniards were formerly
+fortified here also: There are two shoals lie off this place, 2 or
+3 Leagues from the Shoar. From thence the Land is more low and even;
+yet there are some Hills in the Country.
+
+About 6 Leagues before we came to the West-end of the Island Mindanao,
+we fell in with a great many small low Islands or Keys, and about
+two or three Leagues to the Southward of these Keys, there is a long
+Island stretching N.E. and S.W. about 12 Leagues. [20] This Island
+is low by the Sea on the North-side, and has a Ridge of Hills in the
+middle, running from one end to the other. Between this Isle and the
+small Keys, there is a good large Channel: Among the Keys also there
+is a good depth of Water, and a violent Tide; but on what point of
+the Compass it flows, I know not, nor how much it riseth and falls.
+
+The 17th Day we anchored on the East-side of all these Keys, in
+8 fathom Water, clean Sand. Here are plenty of green Turtle, whose
+flesh is as sweet as any in the West Indies: but they are very shy. A
+little to the Westward of these Keys, on the Island Mindanao, we saw
+abundance of Coco-nut Trees: Therefore we sent our Canoa ashore,
+thinking to find Inhabitants, but found none, nor sign of any;
+but great Tracts of Hogs, and great Cattle; and close by the Sea
+there were Ruins of an old Fort. The Walls thereof were of a good
+heighth, built with Stone and Lime; and by the Workmanship seem'd to
+be Spanish. From this place the Land trends W.N.W. and it is of an
+indifferent heighth by the Sea. It runs on this point of the Compass
+4 or 5 Leagues, and then the Land trends away N.N.W. 5 or 6 Leagues
+farther, making with many bluff Points.
+
+We weigh'd again the 14th Day, and went thro' between the Keys; but met
+such uncertain Tides, that we were forced to anchor again. The 22d day
+we got about the Westermost Point of all Mindanao, and stood to the
+Northward, plying under the Shore, and having the Wind at N.N.E. a
+fresh Gale. As we sailed along further, we found the Land to trend
+N.N.E. On this part of the Island the Land is high by the Sea, with
+full bluff Points, and very woody. There are some small Sandy Bays,
+which afford Streams of fresh Water.
+
+Here we met with two Prows [i.e., praus] belonging to the Sologues,
+one of the Mindanaian Nations before mentioned. They came from Manila
+laden with Silks and Calicoes. We kept on this Western part of the
+Island steering Northerly, till we came abrest of some other of the
+Philippine Islands, that lay to the Northward of us; then steered
+away towards them; but still keeping on the West-side of them, and
+we had the Winds at N.N.E.
+
+The 3d of February we anchored in a good Bay on the West side of
+the Island, in Lat. 9 d. 55 min. where we had 13 Fathom-water, good
+soft Oaze. This Island hath no Name that we could find in any Book,
+out lieth on the West side of the Island Sebo. [21] It is about 8 or
+10 Leagues long, mountainous and woody. At this place Captain Read,
+who was the same Captain Swan had so much railed against in his
+Journal, and was now made Captain in his room (as Captain Teat was
+made Master, and Mr. Henry More Quarter-Master) ordered the Carpenters
+to cut down our Quarter-Deck, to make the Ship snug, and the fitter
+for sailing. When that was done, we heeled her, scrubbed her Bottom,
+and tallowed it. Then we fill'd all our Water, for here is a delicate
+small run of Water.
+
+The Land was pretty low in this Bay, the Mould black and fat, and
+the Trees of several Kinds, very thick and tall. In some places
+we found plenty of Canes, [22] such as we use in England for
+Walking-Canes. These were short-jointed, not above two Foot and a
+half, or two Foot ten Inches the longest, and most of them not above
+two Foot. They run along on the Ground like a Vine; or taking hold
+of the Trees, they climb up to their very tops. They are 15 or 20
+Fathom long, and much of a bigness from the Root, till within 5 or
+6 Fathom of the end. They are of a pale green Colour, cloathed over
+with a Coat of short thick hairy Substance, of a dun Colour; but it
+comes off by only drawing the Cane through your Hand. We did cut many
+of them, and they proved very tough heavy Canes.
+
+We saw no Houses, nor sign of Inhabitants; but while we lay here,
+there was a Canoa with 6 Men came into this Bay; but whither they
+were bound, or from whence they came, I know not. They were Indians,
+and we could not understand them.
+
+In the middle of this Bay, about a Mile from the Shore, there is
+a small low woody Island, not above a Mile in Circumference; our
+Ship rode about a Mile from it. This Island was the Habitation of
+an incredible number of great Batts, with Bodies as big as Ducks,
+or large Fowl, and with vast Wings: For I saw at Mindanao one of
+this sort, and I judge that the Wings stretcht out in length, could
+not be less assunder than 7 or 8 Foot from tip to tip; for it was
+much more than any of us could fathom with our Arms extended to the
+utmost. The Wings are for Substance like those of other Batts, of a
+Dun or Mouse colour. The Skin or Leather of them hath Ribs running
+along it, and draws up in 3 or 4 Folds; and at the joints of those
+Ribs and the Extremities of the Wings, there are sharp and crooked
+Claws, by which they may hang on any thing. [A further description
+of the great bats and their habits follows.] At this Isle also we
+found plenty of Turtle and Manatee, but no Fish.
+
+We stay'd here till the 10th of February, 1687, and then having
+compleated our Business, we sailed hence with the Wind at North. But
+going out we struck on a Rock, where we lay two Hours: It was very
+smooth Water, and the Tide of Flood, or else we should have lost
+our Ship. We struck off a great piece of our Rudder, which was all
+the damage that we received, but we more narrowly mist losing our
+Ships this time, than in any other in the whole Voyage. This is a
+very dangerous Shoal, because it does not break, unless probably it
+may appear in foul Weather. It lies about two mile to the Westward,
+without the small Batt Island. Here we found the Tide of Flood setting
+to the Southward, and the Ebb to the Northward.
+
+After we were past this Shoal, we Coasted along by the rest of the
+Philippine Islands, keeping on the West-side of them. Some of them
+appeared to be very Mountainous dry Land. We saw many Fires in the
+Night as we passed by Panay, a great Island settled by Spaniards,
+and by the Fires up and down it seems to be well settled by them;
+for this is a Spanish Custom, whereby they give Notice of any Danger
+or the like from Sea; and 'tis probable they had seen our Ship the
+day before. This is an unfrequented Coast, and 'tis rare to have any
+Ship seen there. We touched not at Panay, nor any where else; tho'
+we saw a great many small Islands to the Westward of us, and some
+Shoals, but none of them laid down in our Draughts.
+
+The 18th Day of Feb. we anchored at the N.W. end of the Island
+Mindora, [23] in 10 Fathom-water, about 3 quarters of a Mile from
+the Shore. Mindora is a large Island; the middle of it lying in
+Lat. 13. about 40 Leagues long, stretching N.W. and S.E. It is High
+and Mountainous, and not very Woody. At this Place where we anchored
+the Land was neither very high nor low. There was a small Brook of
+Water, and the Land by the Sea was very Woody, and the Trees high
+and tall, but a League or two farther in, the Woods are very thin and
+small. Here we saw great tracks of Hogs and Beef, and we saw some of
+each, and hunted them; but they were wild, and we could kill none.
+
+While we were here, there was a Canoa with 4 Indians came from
+Manila. They were very shy of us a while: but at last, hearing us
+speak Spanish, they came to us, and told us, that they were going to
+a Fryer that liv'd at an Indian Village towards the S.E. end of the
+Island. They told us also, that the Harbour of Manila is seldom or
+never without 20 or 30 Sail of Vessels, most Chinese, some Portugueze,
+and some few the Spaniards have of their own. They said, that when
+they had done their business with the Fryer they would return to
+Manila, and hoped to be back again at this place in 4 Days time. We
+told them, that we came for a Trade with the Spaniards at Manila, and
+should be glad if they would carry a Letter to some Merchant there,
+which they promised to do. But this was only a pretence of ours,
+to get out of them what intelligence we could as to their Shipping,
+Strength, and the like, under Colour of seeking a Trade; for our
+business was to pillage. Now if we had really designed to have Traded
+there, this was as fair an opportunity as Men could have desired: for
+these Men could have brought us to the Frier that they were going to,
+and a small Present to him would have engaged him to do any kindness
+in the way of Trade: for the Spanish Governors do not allow of it,
+and we must Trade by stealth.
+
+The 21st Day we went from hence with the Wind at E.N.E. a small
+gale. The 23d Day in the Morning we were fair by the S.E. end of the
+Island Luconia, the Place that had been so long desired by us. We
+presently saw a Sail coming from the Northward, and making after her
+we took her in 2 Hours time. She was a Spanish Bark, that came from
+a place called Pangasanam, a small town on the N. end of Luconia,
+as they told us; probably the same with Pagassinay, which lies on a
+Bay at the N. W. side of the Island. She was bound to Manila but had
+no goods aboard; and therefore we turned her away.
+
+The 23d. we took another Spanish Vessel that came from the same place
+of the other. She was laden with Rice and Cotton-Cloth, and bound for
+Manila also. These Goods were purposely for the Acapulco Ship: The
+Rice was for the Men to live on while they lay there, and in their
+return: and the Cotton-cloth was to make Sail. The Master of this
+Prize was Boatswain of the Acapulco Ship which escaped us at Guam,
+and was now at Manila. It was this Man that gave us the Relation of
+what Strength it had, how they were afraid of us there, and of the
+accident that happen'd to them, as is before mentioned in the 10th
+Chapter. We took these two Vessels within 7 or 8 Leagues of Manila.
+
+Luconia I have spoken of already: but I shall now add this further
+account of it. It is a great Island, taking up between 6 and 7
+degrees of Lat. in length, and its breadth near the middle is about
+60 Leagues; but the ends are narrow. The North end lies in about
+19 d. North Lat. and the S. end in about 12 d. 30 m. This great
+Island hath abundance of small Keys or Islands lying about it;
+especially at the North-end. The South-side fronts towards the rest
+of the Philippine Islands: Of these that are its nearest Neighbours,
+Mindora, lately mentioned, is the chief, and gives name to the Sea
+or Streight that parts it and the other Islands from Luconia: being
+called the Streights of Mindora.
+
+The Body of the Island Luconia is composed of many spacious plain
+Savannahs, and large Mountains. The North-end seems to be more plain
+and even, I mean freer from Hills, than the South-end: but the Land
+is all along of a good heighth. It does not appear so flourishing
+and green as some of the other Islands in this Range; especially
+that of St. John, Mindanao, Batt Island, &c. yet in some places it
+is very Woody. Some of the Mountains of this Island afford Gold,
+and the Savannahs are well stockt with herds of Cattle, especially
+Buaffaloes[sic]. These Cattle are in great plenty all over the
+East-Indies; and therefore 'tis very probable that there were many of
+these here even before the Spaniards come hither. But now there are
+now also plenty of other Cattle, as I have been told, as Bullocks,
+Horses, Sheep, Goats, Hogs, &c. brought hither by the Spaniards.
+
+It is pretty well inhabited with Indians, most of them, if not all,
+under the Spaniards, who now are masters of it. The Native Indians do
+live together in Towns; and they have Priests among them to instruct
+them in the Spanish Religion.
+
+Manila the chief, or perhaps the only City, lies at the foot of
+a ridge of high Hills, facing upon a spacious Harbour near the
+S.W. point of the Island, in about the Lat. of 14 d. North. It is
+environ'd with a high strong Wall, and very well fortify'd with
+Forts and Breast-works. The Houses are large, strongly built, and
+covered with Pan-tile. The Streets are large and pretty regular;
+with a Parade in the midst, after the Spanish fashion. There are a
+great many fair Buildings, beside Churches and other Religious Houses;
+of which there are not a few.
+
+The Harbour is so large, that some hundreds of Ships may ride here:
+and is never without many, both of their own and strangers. I have
+already given you an account of the two Ships going and coming between
+this place and Acapulco. Besides them, they have some small Vessels
+of their own; and they do not allow the Portuguese to trade here, but
+the Chinese are the chiefest Merchants, and they drive the greatest
+Trade; for they have commonly 20 or 30, or 40 Jonks in the Harbour at
+a time, and a great many Merchants constantly residing in the City,
+beside Shop-keepers, and Handy-crafts-men in abundance. Small Vessels
+run up near the Town, but the Acapulco. Ships and others of greater
+burthen, lye a League short of it, where there is a strong Fort also,
+and Store-houses to put Goods in.
+
+I had the major part of this relation 2 or 3 years after this time,
+from Mr. Coppinger our Surgeon, for he made a Voyage hither from
+Porto Nova, a Town on the Coast of Coromandel; in a Portuguese Ship,
+as I think. Here he found 10 or 12 of Captain Swan's men; some of
+those that we left at Mindanao. For after we came from thence, they
+brought a Proe there, by the Instigation of an Irish man, who went
+by the name of John Fitz-Gerald, a person that spoke Spanish very
+well; and so in this their Proe they came hither. They had been here
+but 18 months when Mr. Coppinger arrived here, and Mr. Fitz-Gerald
+had in this time gotten a Spanish Mustesa Woman to Wife, and a good
+Dowry with her. He then professed Physick and Surgery, and was highly
+esteemed among the Spaniards for his supposed knowledge in those Arts:
+for being always troubled with sore Shins while he was with us, he
+kept some Plaisters and Salves by him; and with these he set up upon
+his bare natural stock of knowledge, and his experience in Kibes. But
+then he had a very great stock of Confidence withal, to help out the
+other, and being an Irish Roman Catholick, and having the Spanish
+Language he had a great advantage of all his Consorts; and he alone
+lived well there of them all. We were not within sight of this Town,
+but I was shewn the Hills that over-looked it, and drew a draft of
+them as we lay off at Sea; which I have caused to be engraven among
+a few others that I took my self:....
+
+[The season for successful operations near Manila having passed,
+the mutineers decide to go to some islands near the Cambodian shore
+to wait until about May, the time for the Acapulco galleon, choosing
+those islands as they were somewhat retired. The prisoners are set
+ashore on the island of Luzon, and that island is left February 26. On
+March 14 anchor is cast on Pulo (or Island) Condore, the largest and
+only inhabited one of those islands which lie in north latitude 8 deg.
+40'. A short description of the islands, their products, fauna,
+and inhabitants (who are Cochinchinese) and some of their customs
+follows. At this island the ship is careened and refitted. There
+also "2 of our Men died, who were poison'd at Mindanao, they told
+us of it when they found themselves poison'd, and had linger'd ever
+since. They were opened by our Doctor, according to their own Request
+before they died, and their Livers were black, light and dry, like
+pieces of Cork." After filling the water-butts anchor is weighed
+(April 21) and the course taken to Pulo Ubi near Siam, reaching that
+island April 23. From that date until May 13 they cruise about the
+bay of Siam where they are becalmed. May 24 they anchor again at Pulo
+Condore, together with a Chinese vessel laden with pepper from Sumatra;
+from its men they learn that the "English were settled in the Island
+Sumatra, at a place called Sillabar; and the first knowledge we had
+that the English had any settlement on Sumatra was from these." [24]
+An attempt there to investigate a Malayan vessel ends fatally for a
+number of the English; for the Malays, thinking them to be pirates,
+set upon the boarding party, and kill a number of them. At that
+island also the surgeon, Herman Coppinger, attempts to escape, but
+is taken back to the ship. Dampier is only deterred from making the
+same attempt because he desires a more convenient opportunity. "For
+neither he nor I, when we were last on board at Mindanao, had any
+knowledge of the Plot that was laid to leave Captain Swan, and run
+away with the Ship; and being sufficiently weary of this mad Crew,
+we were willing to give them the slip at any place from whence we
+might hope to get a passage to an English Factory."]
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XV
+
+    They leave Pulo Condore, designing for Manila, but are driven
+    off from thence, and from the Isle of Prata, by the Winds,
+    and brought upon the Coast of China. Isle of St. John, on the
+    Coast of the Province of Canton; its Soil and Productions,
+    China Hogs, &c. The Inhabitants; and of the Tartars forcing
+    the Chinese to cut off their Hair. Their Habits, and the little
+    Feet of their Women. China-ware China-roots, Tea, &c. A Village
+    at St. John's Island, and of their Husbandry of their Rice. A
+    Story of a Chinese Pagoda, or Idol-Temple, and Image. Of the
+    China Jonks, and their Rigging. They leave St. John's and the
+    Coast of China. A most outragious Storm. Corpus Sant, a Light,
+    or Meteor appearing in Storms. The Piscadores, or Fishers
+    Islands near Formosa: A Tartarian Garrison, and Chinese Town
+    on one of these Islands. They anchor in the Harbour near the
+    Tartars Garrison, and treat with the Governour. Of Amoy in
+    the Province of Fokieu, and Macao a Chinese and Portuguese
+    Town near Canton in China. The Habits of a Tartarian Officer
+    and his Retinue. Their Presents, excellent Beef. Samciu,
+    a sort of Chinese Arack, and Hocciu a kind of Chinese Mum,
+    and the Jars it is bottled in. Of the Isle of Formosa, and
+    the five Islands; to which they give the Names of Orange,
+    Monmouth, Grafton, Bashee, and Goat-Islands, in general,
+    the Bashee-Islands. A Digression concerning the different
+    depths of the Sea near high or low Lands. The Soil, &c. as
+    before. The Soil, Fruits and Animals of these Islands. The
+    Inhabitants and their Cloathing. Rings of a yellow Metal
+    like Gold. Their Houses built on remarkable Precipices. Their
+    Boats and Employments. Their Food, of Goat Skins, Entrails,
+    &c. Parcht Locusts. Bashee, or Sugar-cane Drink. Of their
+    Language and Original, Launces and Buffaloe Coats. No Idols,
+    nor civil Form of Government. A young Man buried alive by
+    them; supposed to be for Theft. Their Wives and Children, and
+    Husbandry. Their Manners, Entertainments, and Traffick. Of the
+    Ships first Entercourse with these People, and Bartering with
+    them. Their Course among the Islands; their stay there, and
+    provision to depart. They are driven off by a violent Storm,
+    and return. The Natives Kindness to 6 of them left behind. The
+    Crew discouraged by those Storms, quit their design of Cruising
+    off Manila for the Acapulco Ship; and 'tis resolved to fetch
+    a Compass to Cape Comorin, and so for the Red-Sea.
+
+
+[The first part of this chapter, as is seen by the above list of
+contents, relates to China and islands near the Chinese coast. Most
+of the second half of the chapter relates to the Bashee or Batanes
+Islands and is as follows.]
+
+We stayed here [i.e., at the Piscador Islands near China] till the
+29th Day [of July, 1687], and then sailed from hence with the Wind
+at S.W. and pretty fair Weather. We now directed our course for
+some Islands we had chosen to go to, that lye between Formosa and
+Luconia. They are laid down in our Plots without any name, only with
+a figure of 5, denoting the number of them. It was supposed by us,
+that these Islands had no Inhabitants, because they had not any name
+by our Hydrographers. Therefore we thought to lye there secure, and
+be pretty near the Island Luconia, which we did still intend to visit.
+
+In going to them we sailed by the South West end of Formosa, leaving
+it on our Larboard-side. This is a large Island; the South-end is
+in Lat. 21 d. 20 m. and the North-end in 25 d. 10 m. North Lat. the
+Longitude of this Island is laid down 142 d. 5 m. to 143 d. 16
+m. reckoning East from the Pike of Tenariffe, so that 'tis but narrow;
+and the Tropick of Cancer crosses it. It is a High and Woody Island,
+and was formerly well inhabited by the Chinese, and was then frequently
+visited by English Merchants, there being a very good Harbour to
+secure their Ships. But since the Tartars have conquered China,
+they have spoiled the Harbour, (as I have been informed) to hinder
+the Chinese that were then in Rebellion, from Fortifying themselves
+there; and ordered the Foreign Merchants to come and Trade on the Main.
+
+The sixth day of August we arrived at the five Islands that we were
+bound to, and anchored on the East-side of the Northermost Island,
+in 15 Fathom, a Cable's length from the Shore. Here, contrary to our
+Expectation, we found abundance of Inhabitants in sight; for there
+were 3 large Towns all within a League of the Sea; and another larger
+Town than any of the three, and the backside of a small Hill close
+by also, as we found afterwards. These Islands lie in Lat. 20 d. 20
+m. North Lat. by my Observation, for I took it there, and I find
+their Longitude according to our Drafts, to be 141 d. 50 m. These
+Islands having no particular Names in the Drafts, some or other of
+us made use of the Seamens priviledge, to give them what Names we
+pleased. Three of the Islands were pretty large; the Westermost is
+the biggest. This the Dutchmen who were among us called the Prince
+of Orange's Island, in honour of his present Majesty. It is about
+7 or 8 Leagues long, and about two Leagues wide; and it lies almost
+N. and S. The other two great Islands are about 4 or 5 Leagues to the
+Eastward of this. The Northermost of them, where we first anchored, I
+called the Duke of Grafton's Isle, as soon as we landed on it; having
+married my W[i]fe out of his Dutchess's Family, and leaving her at
+Arlington-house, at my going Abroad. This Isle is about 4 Leagues long,
+and one League and a half wide, stretching North and South. The other
+great Island our Seamen called the Duke of Monmouth's Island. This
+is about a League to the Southward of Grafton Isle. It is about 3
+Leagues long, and a League wide, lying as the other. Between Monmouth
+and the South end of Orange Island, there are two small Islands of a
+roundish Form, lying East and West. The Eastermost Island of the two,
+our Men unanimously called Bashee Island, [25] from a Liquor which
+we drank there plentifully every day, after we came to an Anchor at
+it. The other, which is the smallest of all, we called Goat Island,
+from the great number of Goats there; and to the Northward of them all,
+are two high Rocks.
+
+Orange Island, which is the biggest of them all, is not Inhabited. It
+is high Land, flat and even on the top, with steep Cliffs against the
+Sea; for which Reason we could not go ashore there, as we did on all
+the rest.
+
+[Some general remarks on high and low lands and anchorages nearby
+follow, in which the author states almost as an axiom that good
+anchorages are found near low lands, while high rocky lands have
+poor anchorages.]
+
+But to return from this Digression, to speak of the rest of these
+Islands. Monmouth and Grafton Isles are very Hilly, with many of
+those steep inhabited Precipi[c]es on them, that I shall describe
+particularly. The two small Islands are flat and even; only the Bashee
+Island hath one steep scraggy Hill, but Goat Island is all flat and
+very even.
+
+The Mold of these Islands in the Valley, is blackish in some places,
+but in most red. The Hills are very rocky: The Valleys are well watered
+with Brooks of fresh Water, which run into the Sea in many different
+places. The Soil is indifferent fruitful, especially in the Valleys;
+producing pretty great plenty of Trees (tho' not very big) and thick
+Grass. The sides of the Mountains have also short Grass; and some of
+the Mountains have Mines within them, or the Natives told us, That
+the yellow Metal they shewed us, (as I shall speak more particularly)
+came from these Mountains; for when they held it up they would point
+towards them.
+
+The fruit of the Islands are a few Plantains, Bonanoes, Pineapples,
+Pumkins, Sugar-canes, &c. and there might be more if the Natives would,
+for the Ground seems fertile enough. Here are great plenty of Potatoes,
+and Yames, which is the common Food for the Natives, for Bread-kind:
+For those few Plantains they have, are only used as Fruit. They have
+some Cotton growing here of the small Plants.
+
+Here are plenty of Goats, and abundance of Hogs; but few Fowls,
+either wild or tame. For this I have always observed in my Travels,
+both in the East and West Indies, that in those Places where there
+is plenty of Grain, that is, of Rice in one, and Maiz in the other,
+there are also found great abundance of Fowls; but on the contrary,
+few Fowls in those Countries where the Inhabitants feed on Fruits and
+Roots only. The few wild Fowls that are here, are Parakites, and some
+other small Birds. Their tame Fowl are only a few Cocks and Hens.
+
+Monmouth and Grafton Islands are very thick inhabited; and Bashee
+Island hath one Town on it. The Natives of these Islands are short
+squat People; they are generally round visaged, with low Foreheads,
+and thick Eye-brows; their Eyes of a hazle colour, and small, yet
+bigger than the Chinese; short low Noses, and their Lip and Mouths
+middle proportioned. Their Teeth are white; their Hair is black,
+and thick, and lank, which they wear but short; it will just cover
+their Ears, and so it is cut round very even. Their Skins are of a
+very dark copper colour.
+
+They wear no Hat, Cap, nor Turban, nor any thing to keep off the
+Sun. The Men for the biggest part have only a small Clout to cover
+their Nakedness; some of them have Jackets made of Plantain-leaves,
+which were as rough as any Bear's-skin: I never saw such rugged
+Things. The Women have a short Petticoat made of Cotton, which comes a
+little below their Knees. It is a thick sort of stubborn Cloth, which
+they make themselves of their Cotton. Both Men and Women do wear large
+Ear-rings, made of that yellow Metal before mentioned. Whether it were
+Gold or no I cannot positively say: I took it to be so; it was heavy,
+and of the colour of our paler Gold. I would fain have brought away
+some to have satisfied my Curiosity; but I had nothing where with
+to buy any. Captain Read bought two of these Rings with some Iron,
+of which the People are very greedy; and he would have bought more,
+thinking he was come to a very fair Market, but that the paleness of
+the Metal made him and the Crew distrust its being right Gold. For
+my part, I should have ventured on the purchase of some, but having
+no property in the Iron, of which we had great store on board, sent
+from England, by the Merchants along with Captain Swan, I durst not
+barter it away.
+
+These Rings when first polished look very gloriously, but time makes
+them fade, and turn to a pale yellow. Then they make a soft Paste
+of red Earth, and smearing it over their Rings, they cast them into
+a quick Fire, where they remain till they be red hot; then they take
+them out and cool them in Water, and rub off the Paste; and they look
+again of a glorious Colour and Lustre.
+
+These People make but small low Houses. The sides which are made of
+small Posts, watled with Boughs, are not above 4 foot and a half high:
+the Ridge-pole is about 7 or 8 foot high. They have a Fire-place
+at one end of their Houses, and Boards placed on the Ground to lye
+on. They inhabit together in small Villages built on the sides and
+tops of rocky Hills, 3 or 4 rows of Houses one above another, and on
+such steep Precipices, that they go up to the first Row with a wooden
+Ladder, and so with a Ladder still from every Story up to that above
+it, there being no way to ascend. The Plain on the first Precipice may
+be so wide, as to have room both for a Row of Houses that stand all
+along on the Edge or Brink of it, and a very narrow Street running
+along before their Doors, between the Row of Houses and the foot of
+the next Precipice; the Plain of which is in a manner level to the
+tops of the Houses below, and so for the rest. The common Ladder to
+each Row or Street comes up at a narrow Passage left purposely about
+the middle of it; and the Street being bounded with a Precipice also
+at each end, 'tis but drawing up the Ladder, if they be assaulted,
+and then there is no coming at them from below, but by climbing up
+as against a perpendicular Wall: And that they may not be assaulted
+from above, they take care to build on the side of such a Hill, whose
+backside hangs over the Sea, or is some high, steep, perpendicular
+Precipice, altogether inaccessible. These Precipices are natural; for
+the Rocks seem too hard to work on; nor is there any sign that Art
+hath been employed about them. On Bashee Island there is one such,
+and built upon, with its back next the Sea. Grafton and Monmouth
+Isles are very thick set with these Hills and Towns; and the Natives,
+whether for fear of Pirates, or Foreign Enemies, or Factions among
+their own Clans, care not for Building but in these Fastnesses; which
+I take to be the Reason that Orange Isle, though the largest, and as
+Fertile as any, yet being Level, and exposed, hath no Inhabitants. I
+never saw the like Precipices and Towns.
+
+These Towns are pretty Ingenious also in building Boats. Their small
+Boats are much like our Deal Yalls, but not so big; and they are
+built with very narrow Plank, pinn'd with wooden Pins, and some
+Nails. They have also some pretty large Boats, which will carry
+40 or 50 Men. These they Row with 12 or 14 Oars of a side. They
+are built much like the small ones, and they Row doubled Banked;
+that is, two Men setting on one Bench, but one Rowing on one side,
+the other on the other side of the Boat. They understand the use of
+Iron, and work it themselves. Their Bellows are like those at Mindanao.
+
+The common Imployment for the Men is Fishing; but I did never see
+them catch much: Whether it is more plenty at other times of the Year
+I know not. The Women do manage their Plantations.
+
+I did never see them kill any of their Goats or Hogs for themselves,
+yet they would beg the Panches of the Goats that they themselves
+did sell to us: And if any of our surly Seamen did heave them into
+the Sea, they would take them up again, and the Skins of the Goats
+also. They would not meddle with Hog-guts, if our Men threw away any
+beside what they made Chitterlings and Sausages of. The Goat-skins
+these People would carry ashore, and making a Fire they would singe
+oft all the Hair, and afterwards let the Skin lie and Pearch on the
+Coals, till they thought it eatable; and then they would knaw it,
+and tear it to pieces with their Teeth, and at last swallow it. The
+Paunches of the Goats would make them an excellent Dish; they drest it
+in this manner. They would turn out all the Chopt Grass and Crudities
+found in the Maw into their Pots, and set it over the Fire, and stir
+it about often: This would Smoak and Puff, and heave up as it was
+Boyling; wind breaking out of the Ferment, and making a very savory
+Stink. While this was doing, if they had any Fish, as commonly they
+had 2 or 3 small Fish, these they would make very clean (as hating
+nastiness belike) and cut the Flesh from the Bone, and then mince the
+Flesh as small as possibly they could, and when that in the Pot was
+well boiled, they would take it up, and strewing a little Salt into it,
+they would eat it, mixt with their raw minced Flesh. The Dung in the
+Maw would look like so much boil'd Herbs minc'd very small; and they
+took up their Mess with their Fingers, as the Moors do their Pilaw,
+[26] using no Spoons.
+
+They had another Dish made of a sort of Locusts, whose Bodies were
+about an Inch and an half long, and as thick as the top of one's
+little Finger; with large thin Wings, and long and small Legs. At
+this time of the Year these Creatures came in great Swarms to devour
+their Potato-leaves, and other Herbs; and the Natives would go out
+with small Nets, and take a Quart at one sweep. When they had enough,
+they would carry them home, and Parch them over the Fire in an earthen
+Pan; and then their Wings and Legs would fall off, and their Heads and
+Backs would turn red like boil'd Shrimps, being before brownish. Their
+Bodies being full, would eat very moist, their Heads would crackle,
+in one's Teeth. I did eat once of this Dish, and liked it well enough;
+but their other Dish my Stomach would not take.
+
+Their common Drink is Water; as it is of all other Indians: Beside
+which they make a sort of Drink with the Juice of the Sugar-cane,
+which they boil, and put some small black sort of Berries among
+it. When it is well boiled, they put it into great Jars, and let it
+stand 3 or 4 days and work. Then it settles and becomes clear, and
+is presently fit to drink. This is an excellent Liquor, and very much
+like English Beer, both in Colour and Taste. It is very strong, and I
+do believe very wholesome: For our Men, who drunk briskly of it all day
+for several Weeks, were frequently drunk with it, and never sick after
+it. The Natives brought a vast deal of it every day to those aboard
+and ashore: For some of our Men were ashore at work on Bashee Island;
+which Island they gave that Name to from their drinking this Liquor
+there; that being the Name which the Natives call'd this Liquor by:
+and as they sold it to our Men very cheap, so they did not spare
+to drink it as freely. And indeed from the plenty of this Liquor,
+and their plentiful use of it, our Men call'd all these Islands,
+the Bashee Islands.
+
+What Language these People do speak I know not: for it had no affinity
+in sound to the Chinese, which is spoke much through the Teeth;
+nor yet to the Malayan Language. They called the Metal that their
+Ear-rings were made of Bullawan, which is the Mindana word for Gold;
+therefore probably they may be related to the Philippine Indians; for
+that is the general Name for Gold among all those Indians. I could not
+learn from whence they have their Iron; but it is most likely they go
+in their great Boats to the North end of Luconia, and Trade with the
+Indians of that Island for it. Neither did I see any thing beside Iron,
+and pieces of Buffaloes Hides, which I could judge that they bought
+of Strangers: Their Cloaths were of their own Growth and Manufacture.
+
+These Men had Wooden Lances, and a few Lances headed with Iron;
+which are all the Weapons that they have. Their Armour is a piece of
+Buffaloe-hide, shaped like our Carters Frocks, being without Sleeves,
+and sowed both sides together, with holes for the Head and the Arms to
+come forth. This Buff-Coat reaches down to their Knees: It is close
+about their Shoulders, but below it is 3 Foot wide, and as thick as
+a Board.
+
+I could never perceive them to Worship any thing, neither had they any
+Idols; neither did they seem to observe any one day more than other. I
+could never perceive that one Man was of greater Power than another;
+but they seemed to be all equal; only every Man ruling his own House,
+and the Children Respecting and Honouring their Parents.
+
+Yet 'tis probable that they have some Law, or Custom, by which they
+are govern'd; for while we lay here we saw a young Man buried alive
+in the Earth; and 'twas for Theft, as far as we could understand from
+them. There was a great deep hole dug, and abundance of People came to
+the Place to take their last Farewell of him: Among the rest, there
+was one Woman who made great Lamentation, and took off the condemn'd
+Person's Ear-rings. We supposed her to be his Mother. After he had
+taken his leave of her and some others, he was put into the Pit,
+and covered over with Earth He did not struggle, but yielded very
+quietly to his Punishment; and they cramm'd the Earth close upon him,
+and stifled him.
+
+They have but one Wife, with whom they live and agree very well;
+and their Children live very obediently under them. The Boys go out
+a Fishing with their Fathers; and the Girls live at home with their
+Mothers: And when the Girls are grown pretty strong, they send them
+to their Plantations, to dig Yames and Potatoes; of which they bring
+home on their Heads every day enough to serve the whole Family;
+for they have no Rice nor Maize.
+
+Their Plantations are in the Valleys, at a good distance from their
+Houses; where every Man has a certain spot of Land, which is properly
+his own. This he manageth himself for his own use; and provides enough,
+that he may not be beholding to his Neighbour.
+
+Notwithstanding the seeming nastiness of their Dish of Goats Maw,
+they are in their Persons a very neat cleanly People, both Men and
+Women: And they are withal the quietest and civilest People that
+I did ever meet with. I could never perceive them to be angry with
+one another. I have admired to see 20 or 30 Boats aboard our Ship at
+a time, and yet no difference among them; but all civil and quiet,
+endeavouring to help each other on occasion; No noise nor appearance
+of distaste: and although sometimes cross Accidents would happen,
+which might have set other Men together by the Ears, yet they were
+not moved by them. Sometimes they will also drink freely, and warm
+themselves with their Drink; yet neither then could I ever perceive
+them out of Humour. They are not only thus civil among themselves,
+but very obliging and kind to Strangers; nor were their Children rude
+to us, as is usual. Indeed the Women, when we came to their Houses,
+would modestly beg any Rags, or small pieces of Cloth, to swaddle
+their young ones in, holding out their Children to us; and begging
+is usual among all these wild Nations. Yet neither did they beg so
+importunely as in other Places; nor did the Men ever beg any thing
+at all. Neither, except once at the first time we came to an Anchor
+(as I shall relate) did they steal any thing; but dealt justly, and
+with great sincerity with us; and made us very welcome to their Houses
+with Bashee drink. If they had none of this Liquor themselves, they
+would buy a Jar of Drink of their Neighbours, and sit down with us:
+for we could see them go and give a piece or two of their Gold for
+some Jars of Bashee. And indeed among Wild Indians, as these seem
+to be, I wonder'd to see buying and selling, which is not so usual;
+nor to converse so freely, as to go aboard Stranger's Ships with so
+little caution: Yet their own small Trading may have brought them
+to this. At these entertainments they and their Family, Wife and
+Children drank out of small Callabashes; and when by themselves, they
+drink about from one to another; but when any of us came among them,
+they would always drink to one of us.
+
+They have no sort of Coin; but they have small Crumbs of the Metal
+before described, which they bind up very safe in Plantain Leaves,
+or the like. This Metal they exchange for what they want, giving
+a small quantity of it, about 2 or 3 Grains, for a Jar of Drink,
+that would hold 5 or 6 Gallons. They have no Scales, but give it by
+guess. Thus much in general.
+
+To proceed therefore with our Affairs, I have said before, that
+we anchored here the 6th day of August. While we were furling our
+Sails, there came near 100 Boats of the Natives aboard, with 3 or
+4 Men in each; so that our Deck was full of Men. We were at first
+afraid of them, and therefore got up 20 or 30 small Arms on our
+Poop, and kept 3 or 4 Men as Centinels, with Guns in their Hands,
+ready to fire on them if they had offered to molest us. But they
+were pretty quiet, only they pickt up such old Iron that they found
+on our Deck, and they also took out our Pump-Bolts, and Linch-Pins
+out of the Carriages of our Guns, before we perceived them. At last,
+one of our Men perceived one of them very busie getting out one of our
+Linch Pins; and took hold of the fellow, who immediately bawl'd out,
+and all the rest presently leaped overboard, some into their Boats,
+others into the Sea; and they all made away for the Shore. But when
+we perceived their Fright, we made much of him that was in hold,
+who stood Trembling all the while; and at last we gave him a small
+piece of Iron, with which he immediately leapt overboard and swam
+to his Consorts; who hovered about our Ship to see the Issue. Then
+we beckned to them to come aboard again, being very loth to lose a
+Commerce with them. Some of the Boats came aboard again, and they
+were always very Honest and Civil afterward.
+
+We presently after this sent a Canoa ashore, to see their manner of
+living, and what Provision they had: The Canao's Crew were made very
+welcome with Bashee drink, and saw abundance of Hogs, some of which
+they bought, and returned aboard. After this the Natives brought
+aboard both Hogs and Goats to us in their own Boats; and every day we
+should have 15 or 20 Hogs and Goats in Boats aboard by our side. These
+we bought for a small matter; we could buy a good fat Goat for an
+old Iron Hoop, and a Hog of 70 or 80 pound weight for 2 or 3 pound
+of Iron. Their drink also they brought off in Jars, which we bought
+for old Nails, Spikes, and Leaden Bullets. Besides the fore-mentioned
+Commodities, they brought aboard great quantities of Yams and Potatoes;
+which we purchased for Nails, Spikes, or Bullets. It was one Man's
+work to be all day cutting out Bars of Iron into small pieces with a
+cold Chisel: And these were for the great Purchases of Hogs and Goats,
+which they would not sell for Nails, as their Drinks and Roots. We
+never let them know what Store we have, that they may value it the
+more. Every Morning, as soon as it was light, they would thus come
+aboard with their Commodities; which we bought as we had occasion. We
+did commonly furnish our selves with as many Goats and Roots as served
+us all the day; and their Hogs we bought in large Quantities, as we
+thought convenient; for we salted them. Their Hogs were very sweet;
+but I never saw so many Meazled ones.
+
+We filled all our Water at a curious Brook close by us in Grafton's
+Isle, where we first anchored. We stayed there about three or four
+days, before we went to other Islands. We sailed to the Southward,
+passing on the East-side of Grafton Island, and then passed thro'
+between that and Monmouth Island; but we found no Anchoring till we
+came to the North end of Monmouth Island, and there we stopt during
+one Tide. The Tide runs very strong here, and sometimes makes a short
+chopping Sea. Its course among these Islands is S. by E. and N. by
+W. The Flood sets to the North, and Ebb to the South, and it riseth
+and falleth 8 Foot.
+
+When we went from hence, we coasted about 2 Leagues to the Southward,
+on the West side of Monmouth Island; and finding no Anchor-ground,
+we stood over to the Bashee Island, and came to an Anchor on the
+North East part of it, against a small sandy Bay, in 7 fathom clean
+hard Sand, and about a quarter of a Mile from the Shore. Here is a
+pretty wide Channel between these two Islands, and Anchoring all over
+it. The Depth of Water is 2, 14, and 16 Fathom.
+
+We presently built a Tent ashore, to mend our Sails in, and stay'd
+all the rest of our time here, viz. from the 13th day of August till
+the 26th day of September. In which time we mended our Sails, and
+scrubb'd our Ships bottom very well; and every day some of us went to
+their Towns, and were kindly entertained by them. Their Boats also
+came aboard with their Merchandize to sell, and lay aboard all Day;
+and if we did not take it off their Hands one Day, they would bring
+the same again the next.
+
+We had yet the Winds at S.W. and S.S.W. mostly fair Weather. In October
+we did expect the Winds to shift to the N.E. and therefore we provided
+to sail (as soon as the Eastern Monsoon was settled) to cruize off
+at Manila. Accordingly we provided a stock of Provision. We salted
+70 or 80 good fat Hogs, and bought Yams and Potatoes good store to
+eat at Sea.
+
+About the 24th day of September, the Winds shifted about to the East,
+and from thence to the N.E. fine fair Weather. The 25th it came at
+N. and began to grow fresh, and the Sky began to be clouded; and the
+Wind freshened on us.
+
+At 12 a clock at night it blew a very fierce Storm. We were then riding
+with our best Bower [27] a Head and though our Yards and Top-mast
+were down, yet we drove. This obliged us to let go our Sheet-Anchor,
+veering out a good scope of Cable, which stopt us till 10 or 11 a
+clock the next day. Then the Wind came on so fierce, that she drove
+again, with both Anchors a-head. The Wind was now at N. by W. and we
+kept driving till 3 or 4 a clock in the afternoon: and it was well
+for us that there were no Islands, Rocks, or Sands in our way, for
+if there had, we must have been driven upon them. We used our utmost
+endeavours to stop here, being loath to go to Sea, because we had six
+of our Men ashore, who could not get off now. At last we were driven
+off into deep Water, and then it was in vain to wait any longer:
+Therefore we hove in our Sheet Cable, and got up our Sheet Anchor,
+and cut away our best Bower, (for to have heav'd her up then would
+have gone near to have foundred us) and so put to Sea. We had very
+violent Weather the night ensuing, with very hard Rain, and we were
+forced to scud with our bare Poles till 3 a Clock in the morning. Then
+the Wind slacken'd, and we brought our Ship to, under a mizen, and
+lay with our Head to the Westward. The 27th day the Wind abated much,
+but it rained very hard all day, and the Night ensuing. The 28th day
+the Wind came about to the N.E. and it cleared up, and blew a hard
+Gale, but it stood not there, for it shifted about to the Eastward,
+thence to the S.E. then to the South, and at last settled at S.W. and
+then we had a moderate Gale and fair Weather.
+
+It was the 29th day when the Wind came to the S.W. Then we made all
+the Sail we could for the Island again. The 30th day we had the Wind at
+West, and saw the Islands; but could not get in before night. Therefore
+we stood off to the Southward till two a Clock in the morning; then we
+tackt, and stood in all the morning, and about 12 a clock, the 1st day
+of October, we anchored again at the place from whence we were driven.
+
+Then our six men were brought aboard by the Natives, to whom we gave
+3 whole Bars of Iron, for their kindness and civility, which was an
+extraordinary to them. Mr. Robert Hall was one of the Men that was
+left ashore. I shall speak more of him hereafter. He and the rest of
+them told me, that after the Ship was out of sight, the Natives began
+to be more kind to them than they had been before, and persuaded them
+to cut their Hair short, as theirs was, offering to each of them
+if they would do it, a young Woman to Wife, and a small Hatchet,
+and other Iron Utensils, fit for a Planter, in Dowry; and withal
+shewed them a piece of Land for them to manage. They were courted
+thus by several of the Town where they then were: but they took up
+their head quarters at the House of him with whom they first went
+ashore. When the Ship appeared in sight again, then they importuned
+them for some Iron, which is the chief thing that they covet, even
+above their Ear-rings. We might have bought all their Ear-rings, or
+other Gold they had, with our Iron-bars, had we been assured of its
+goodness; and yet when it was touch'd and compar'd with other Gold,
+we could not discern any difference, tho' it look'd so pale in the
+lump; but the seeing them polish it so often, was a new discouragement.
+
+This last Storm put our Men quite out of heart: for although it was not
+altogether so fierce as that which we were in on the Coast of China,
+which was still fresh in Memory, yet it wrought more powerfully, and
+frighted them from their design of cruising before Manila, fearing
+another Storm there. Now every Man wisht himself at home, as they
+had done an hundred times before: But Captain Read, and Captain Teat
+the Master, persuaded them to go toward Cape Comorin, and then they
+would tell them more of their Minds, intending doubtless to cruize
+in the Red Sea; and they easily prevailed with the Crew.
+
+The Eastern Monsoon was now at hand, and the best way had been to
+go through the Streights of Malacca; but Captain Teat said it was
+dangerous, by reason of many Islands and Shoals there, with which none
+of us were acquainted. Therefore he thought it best to go round on the
+East-side of all the Philippine Islands, and so keeping South toward
+the Spice Islands, to pass out into the East-Indian Ocean about the
+Island Timor.
+
+This seemed to be a very tedious way about, and as dangerous altogether
+for Sholes; but not for meeting with English or Dutch Ships, which
+was their greatest Fear. I was well enough satisfied, knowing that
+the farther we went, the more Knowledge and Experience I should get,
+which was the main Thing that I regarded; and should also have the
+more variety of Places to attempt an Escape from them, being fully
+resolv'd to take the first opportunity of giving them the slip.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XVI
+
+    They depart from the Bashee Islands, and passing by some
+    others, and the N. End of Luconia. St. John's Isle, and other
+    of the Philippines. They stop at the two Isles near Mindanao;
+    where they re-fit their Ship, and make a Pump after the Spanish
+    fashion. By the young Prince of the Spice Island they have
+    News of Captain Swan, and his Men, left at Mindanao: The Author
+    proposes to the Crew to return to him; but in vain; The Story
+    of his Murder at Mindanao. The Clove-Islands. Ternate. Tidore,
+    &c. The Island Celebes, and Dutch Town of Macasser. They
+    coast along the East side of Celebes, and between it and other
+    Islands and Sholes, with great difficulty. Shy Turtle. Vast
+    Cockles. A wild Vine of great Virtue for Sores. Great Trees;
+    one excessively big. Beacons instead of Buoys on the Sholes. A
+    Spout: a Description of them, with a Story of one. Uncertain
+    Tornadoes. Turtle. The Island Bouton, and its chief Town and
+    Harbour Callasusung. The Inhabitants Visits given and receiv'd
+    by the Sultan. His Device in the Flag of his Proe: His Guards,
+    Habit, and Children. Their Commerce. Their different esteem
+    (as they pretend) of the English and Dutch. Maritime Indians
+    sell others for Slaves. Their Reception in the Town. A
+    Boy with 4 rows of Teeth. Parakites. Crockadores, a sort
+    of White Parrots. They pass among other inhabited Islands,
+    Omba, Pentare, Timore, &c. Sholes. New Holland: laid down
+    too much Northward. Its Soil, and Dragon-trees. The poor
+    winking inhabitants: their Feathers, Habit, Food, Arms,
+    &c. The way of fetching Fire out of Wood. The Inhabitants
+    on the Islands. Their Habitations, Unfitness for Labour,
+    &c. The great Tides here. They design for the Island Cocos,
+    and Cape Comorin.
+
+
+The third Day of October 1687, we sailed from these Islands, standing
+to the Southward; intending to sail through among the Spice Islands. We
+had fair Weather, and the Wind at West. We first steer'd S.S.W. and
+passed close by certain small Islands that lye just by the North-end
+of the Island Luconia. [28] We left them all on the West of us, and
+past on the East-side of it, and the rest of the Philippine Islands,
+coasting to the Southward.
+
+The N. East-end of the Island Luconia appears to be good Champion
+Land, of an indifferent heighth, plain and even for many Leagues;
+only it has some pretty high Hills standing upright by themselves in
+these Plains; but no ridges of Hills, or chains of Mountains joyning
+one to another. The Land on this side seems to be most Savannah,
+or Pasture: The S.E. part is more Mountainous and Woody.
+
+Leaving the Island Luconia, and with it our Golden Projects, we
+sailed on to the Southward, passing on the East-side of the rest
+of the Philippine Islands. These appear to be more Mountainous,
+and less Woody, till we came in sight of the Island St. John; the
+first of that name I mentioned: the other I spake of on the Coast of
+China. This I have already described to be a very woody Island. Here
+the Wind coming Southerly, forced us to keep farther from the Islands.
+
+The 14 day of October we came close by a small low woody Island,
+that lieth East from the S.E. end of Mindanao, distant from it about
+20 Leagues. I do not find it set down in any Sea-Chart.
+
+The 15th day we had the Wind at N.E. and we steered West for the Island
+Mindanao, and arrived at the S.E. end again in the 16th day. There
+we went in and anchored between two small Islands, which lie in
+about 5 d. 10 m. North Lat. I mentioned them when we first came on
+this Coast. Here we found a fine small Cove, on the N.W. end of the
+Easternmost Island [i.e., Sarangani], fit to careen in, or hale ashore;
+so we went in there, and presently unrigg'd our Ship, and provided to
+hale our Ship ashore, to clean her bottom. These Islands are about 3
+or 4 Leagues from the Island Mindanao; they are about 4 or 5 Leagues
+in Circumference, and of a pretty good heighth. The Mold is black
+and deep; and there are two small Brooks of fresh Water.
+
+They are both plentifully stored with great high Trees; therefore
+our Carpenters were sent ashore to cut down some of them for our
+use; for here they made a new Boltsprit, which we did set here also,
+our old one being very faulty. They made a new Fore-yard too, and a
+Fore-top-mast: And our Pumps being faulty, and not serviceable, they
+did cut a Tree to make a Pump. They first squared it, then sawed it in
+the middle, and then hollowed each side exactly. The two hollow sides
+were made big enough to contain a Pump-box in the midst of them both,
+when they were joined together; and it required their utmost Skill to
+close them exactly to the making a tight Cylinder for the Pump-box;
+being unaccustomed to such work. We learnt this way of Pump-making
+from the Spaniards; who make their Pumps that they use in their Ships
+in the South-Seas after this manner; and I am confident that there
+are no better Hand-pumps in the World than they have.
+
+While we lay here, the young Prince that I mentioned in the 13th
+Chapter, came aboard. He understanding that we were bound farther
+to the Southward, desired us to transport him and his Men to his own
+Island. He shewed it to us in our Draft, and told us the Name of it;
+which we put down in our Draft, for it was not named there; but I
+quite forgot to put it into my Journal.
+
+This Man told us, that not above six days before this, he saw Captain
+Swan, and several of his Men that we left there, and named the Names of
+some of them, who, he said, were all well, and that now they were at
+the City of Mindanao; but that they had all of them been out with Raja
+Laut, fighting under him in his Wars against his Enemies the Alfoores;
+and that most of them fought with undaunted Courage; for which they
+were highly honoured and esteemed, as well by the Sultan, as by the
+General Raja Laut; that now Capt. Swan intended to go with his Men
+to Fort St. George, and that in order thereto, he had proffered forty
+Ounces of Gold for a Ship; but the Owner and he were not yet agreed;
+and that he feared that the Sultan would not let him go away till
+the Wars were ended.
+
+All this the Prince told us in the Malayan tongue, which many of us
+had learnt; and when he went away he promised to return to us again
+in 3 days time, and so long Captain Read promised to stay for him
+(for we had now almost finished our Business) and he seemed very glad
+of the opportunity of going with us.
+
+After this I endeavoured to perswade our Men, to return with the Ship
+to the River of Mindanao, and offer their Service again to Captain
+Swan. I took an opportunity when they were filling of Water, there
+being then half the Ships Company ashore; and I found all these very
+willing to do it. I desired them to say nothing, till I had tried
+the Minds of the other half, which I intended to do the next day;
+it being their turn to fill Water then; But one of these Men, who
+seemed most forward to invite back Captain Swan, told Captain Read
+and Captain Teat of the Project, and they presently disswaded the Men
+from any such Designs. Yet fearing the worst, they made all possible
+haste to be gone.
+
+I have since been informed, that Captain Swan and his Men stayed
+there a great while afterward; and that many of the Men got passage
+from thence in Dutch Sloops to Ternate, particularly Mr. Rofy,
+and Mr. Nelly. There they remained a great while, and at last got
+to Batavia (where the Dutch took their Journals from them) and so to
+Europe; and that some of Captain Swan's Men died at Mindanao; of which
+number Mr. Harthrope, and Mr. Smith, Captain Swan's Merchants were
+two. At last Captain Swan and his Surgeon going in a small Canoa aboard
+of a Dutch Ship then in the Road, in order to get Passage to Europe,
+were overset by the Natives at the Mouth of the River; who waited
+their coming purposely to do it, but unsuspected by them; where they
+both were kill'd in the Water. This was done by the General's Order, as
+some think, to get his Gold, which he did immediately seize on. Others
+say, it was because the General's House was burnt a little before,
+and Captain Swan was suspected to be the Author of it; and others say,
+That it was Captain Swan's Threats occasioned his own Ruin; for he
+would often say passionately, that he had been abused by the General,
+and that he would have satisfaction for it; saying also, that now he
+was well acquainted with their Rivers, and knew how to come in at any
+time; that he also knew their manner of Fighting, and the Weakness of
+their Country; and therefore he would go away, and get a Band of Men
+to assist him, and returning thither again, he would spoil and take
+all that they had, and their Country too. When the General had been
+informed of these Discourses, he would say, What, is Captain Swan made
+of Iron, and able to resist a whole Kingdom? Or does he think that we
+are afraid of him, that he speaks thus? Yet did he never touch him,
+till now the Mindanayans kill'd him. It is very probable there might
+be somewhat of Truth in all this; for the Captain was passionate,
+and the General greedy of Gold. But whatever was the occasion, so
+he was killed, as several have assured me, and his Gold seized on,
+and all his Things; and his Journal also from England, as far as Cape
+Corrientes on the Coast of Mexico. This Journal was afterwards sent
+away from thence by Mr. Moody (who was there both a little before and
+a little after the Murder) and he sent it to England by Mr. Goddard,
+Chief Mate of the Defence.
+
+But to our purpose: Seeing I could not persuade them to go to Captain
+Swan again, I had a great desire to have had the Prince's Company:
+But Captain Read was afraid to let his fickle Crew lie long. That
+very day that the Prince had promised to return to us, which was
+November 2, 1687, we sailed hence, directing our course South-West,
+and having the Wind at N.W.
+
+[The course of the ship after leaving Mindanao may be seen from the
+heading to this chapter. Of Australia (or New Holland, as it was then
+called) Dampier says: "New Holland is a very large tract of Land. It
+is not yet determined whether it is an Island or a main Continent;
+but I am certain that it joyns neither to Asia, Africa, nor America."]
+
+[From Australia (chap. xvii) the adventurers sail along until they
+reach Nicobar Island, where Dampier and two others receive permission
+to remain, together with four Malays and a Portuguese; and have various
+adventures with the natives of that island. Finally leaving there
+(chap. xviii), they go to Sumatra, where the small band is decimated
+by the death of one Malay and the Portuguese. The two Englishmen go to
+the English factory. Leaving the island, Dampier sets out as boatswain
+of an English ship for Nicobar, but returns to Achin. Thence he makes
+various voyages (in 1688 and 1689) in Eastern waters, and finally
+becomes gunner at the English factory at Bencouli (1690); but, that
+post proving uncongenial, he deserts and takes passage for England
+(January 2, 1691). The journey to the Dutch colony at the Cape of Good
+Hope (chap. xix--misnumbered xx) witnesses a slight engagement between
+the French, with whom hostilities have broken out, and the Dutch and
+English; and the mysterious death of many of the sailors on the English
+vessel, from the bad water, Dampier thinks. England is finally reached
+(chap. xx), and the author's long voyage is over, September 16, 1691.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PETITION FOR DOMINICAN MISSIONARIES
+
+
+Fray Francisco de Villalva of the Order of Preachers, and
+procurator-general (in virtue of powers which he presents) of the
+province of Santo Rosario, which the said order has in the Filipinas
+Islands, declares: That, as is well known, the religious of his
+order in the said islands have converted to the Catholic faith,
+and now have in their charge, the provinces of Cagayan, Pangasinan,
+Mandayas, part of Tagalos, Zambales, and the island of Babuyanes--in
+which territory there is diversity of languages, and a great number
+of convents provided with ministers for the instruction of the Indian
+natives; from this labor always has been and still is gathered the
+spiritual harvest which is well known. Moreover, those fathers have
+made extensive conquests in various parts of those kingdoms, founding
+many churches--as they actually are maintaining public worship at
+this very time in the vast empire of Great China. There they are
+suffering immense hardships and persecutions, shedding their blood in
+the violent acts committed by tyranny, in order to plant there the
+Christian faith and religion; for this cause, and in its defense,
+seventy-eight religious have given their lives as martyrs in that
+province, leaving the church made illustrious by this triumph. And
+besides this, they have in the city of Manila their principal convent,
+which continually maintains the practices of hearing confessions,
+preaching, and giving consolation in the sicknesses and trials of the
+citizens, with great comfort to all. They have also the college of
+Santo Tomas, in which are taught grammar, the arts, and scholastic
+and moral theology, to the benefit of all that community and the
+entire archipelago. They support students holding fellowships, usually
+twenty-four to thirty, without receiving any stipend: and have thus
+sent out, as they are still doing, graduates of much learning, for
+the dignities and curacies of those islands. They have also another
+college, that of San Juan de Letran, with more than a hundred orphan
+boys, the sons of poor soldiers who have died in the service of your
+Majesty--giving them all that is necessary for their support, and
+instructing them in reading, writing, religious conduct, and virtue;
+while those boys who are not inclined to study are aided in obtaining
+positions as soldiers, artillerists, mariners, and in other occupations
+in which they are employed to the service of your Majesty. Another
+enterprise is also at the expense and charge of the said religious
+order and province--the Parian, which is the silk-market of the
+Chinese; it is close to the walls of Manila, and from five to six
+thousand Chinamen usually reside in it. For the Christians preaching in
+their own language is furnished every feast-day in their own church,
+and there is continual preaching to the heathen through the streets;
+with this labor they have made a great many conversions, and gained an
+enormous number of souls. For this same nation those fathers maintain
+a hospital, in which, with the good example of those religious, and
+their instruction and continual assistance in the sicknesses of the
+Chinese, they have gained so great a harvest that from its foundation
+(which was in the former year of 1588) to the present year of 1677,
+[29] seldom has a patient died without receiving the water of holy
+baptism. This religious order also have at San Juan del Monte a
+sanctuary which is the object of devotion of all that colony; and
+at the port of Cavite, three leguas distant from Manila--where the
+galleons and other vessels of smaller size are built--they have the
+convent of San Thelmo, the religious of which assist the soldiers,
+mariners, and sailors with their preaching and instruction, so that
+all of them may live Christian and orderly lives.
+
+This religious province administers the functions entrusted to
+it without any worldly advantage, receiving neither imposts nor
+fees for burials, marriages, feast-days, or sermons--its religious
+being supported only by the stipend which your Majesty assigns to
+the ministers in the mission villages; and from this amount they
+spend much and distribute [alms] among the poor and needy Indians of
+their districts. Nor is there in any convent of the said province any
+fixed income; nor has the province ever accepted deposits or valuable
+articles, or permitted its individual religious to keep these things
+in their cells, or anything except a breviary and the holy Bible,
+for the preaching of the holy gospel. Their clothing is of coarse,
+rough frieze without, and their inner garments of what your Majesty
+(whom may God guard) grants them as alms. All this is evident by the
+publicity of the facts, and by official information which on various
+occasions has been sent to the glorious Catholic sovereigns, your
+Majesty's predecessors, and to their royal and supreme Council of
+the Indias by the governor and royal Audiencia of the islands, and
+the cabildos, ecclesiastical and secular, of the said city of Manila.
+
+In consideration of these things, and of the fact that so numerous
+Christian communities are persevering in the Catholic faith, and that
+these are spreading with the new conversions, his Majesty who is now
+in glory, moved by the fervent zeal which he always had for the good of
+souls, continued to send to the said islands religious of the Order of
+St. Dominic, in order that by their apostolic lives and doctrine they
+might teach and preach the holy gospel. And finally, in the past year
+of 1668 her Highness the queen-regent, the mother of your Majesty,
+was pleased to grant permission that some of those religious should
+go thither at the cost of the royal treasury; in accordance with this
+thirty-three religious went to those islands, thirty priests and three
+lay brethren. [30] But, although that permission and the number of
+missionaries were enough for one shipment, they do not suffice for the
+succor of so many souls as that province has in its charge, and for
+the new conversions which continually present themselves. Moreover,
+with the long voyage, the unaccustomed climates, the continual toil,
+and the austerity which is observed by this province--which follows the
+primitive rule of its order--the number of its members must necessarily
+diminish. This has actually been the case, since from the time when
+permission was given for the last shipload of religious, which was
+nine years ago, a greater number have died than those who went to the
+islands in that band, as was evident from the last reports which the
+said province sent [to Espana], and which the petitioner will exhibit,
+if necessary. And today, counting in the sick, crippled, and old men,
+there are not ninety priests in the said province; and even though
+there were many more, since more are actually necessary it is highly
+expedient that other and fresh religious should go thither, that they
+may be rendering themselves capable in the languages and ministries,
+so that ready and intelligent laborers may never be lacking for the
+instruction and teaching of the natives, and for the new conversions,
+which our sovereigns the Catholic kings of Espana have so earnestly
+striven to maintain and increase, sending religious every four or six
+years, and sometimes every two years; without the ministries being
+less than they are now, nor do fewer die now than then.
+
+In order to provide those who should go, and to find the number for
+whom your Majesty shall be pleased to grant permission, to obtain
+information about them, to examine into their virtue and learning,
+and to secure a judicious choice, the petitioner needs about a year,
+in which time he can go personally to the convents of the three
+provinces of Espana; for the importance of so delicate a matter will
+not permit that it be entrusted to letters alone. Accordingly, he
+should have at least the time until St. John's day next, or when the
+first fleet shall be equipped; otherwise he cannot sail from Espana
+and make a voyage to Filipinas with religious. To reach those islands,
+two years are usually required, and at the very least more than one
+year; and by that time eleven or twelve years will have passed since
+the last permission [of that sort]. In that protracted course of time,
+there must necessarily have occurred many deaths among the laborers
+who work in that vineyard--of whose labor and conversion of souls
+God has made watch-towers for our sovereigns the Catholic kings of
+Espana, and for their royal and supreme Council of the Indias, upon
+whom is laid this heavy weight of obligation--in fulfilling which they
+have always made every exertion, giving permissions, orders, means,
+and aid to the ministers who have gone thither to cultivate that field.
+
+Therefore the said province, and the said Fray Francisco de Villalva
+in its name, have recourse to the kindness and fervent zeal of your
+Majesty, with which you have always striven for the preservation and
+propagation of the Catholic faith; and prostrate at your royal feet
+he entreats that your Majesty will be pleased to take pity on so many
+souls and the conversions for which the religious of St. Dominic
+are caring and in which they are laboring in the said Filipinas
+Islands. They ask that you will grant to the said province forty
+religious, [31] and a suitable number of lay brethren; and to the
+petitioner permission to conduct them thither in his company, and the
+necessary supplies for him and them, so that on the first opportunity
+when there is a fleet they may embark for their voyage. In this, God
+our Lord will regard himself as well served; and that poor and remote
+province will be anew constrained, in return for this favor and grace,
+to continue its prayers and sacrifices for the life and health of
+your Majesty, and for the welfare and increase of your entire monarchy.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EVENTS IN FILIPINAS, 1686-88
+
+Diary of new events in Filipinas, from June, 1686 to June in 87
+
+
+On June 11, 1686, the galleon "Santo Nino" discovered, twenty-two
+leguas from the island of San Juan, a new island, larger than any
+of those discovered in Marianas; it is named San Bernabe, because it
+was discovered on the day of that saint.
+
+On July 11 the bells were rung in Manila for the arrival of the galleon
+"Santa Rosa."
+
+On the twelfth they hanged five Sangleys, who were found guilty in
+the mutiny.
+
+On the fourteenth news came that all the people who were in the lancha
+that lost its course in Marianas had safely reached port in Cagayan.
+
+On the eighteenth the courier [32] arrived with the mail.
+
+On the nineteenth the auditor Don Diego Calderon died.
+
+On the second of August, Licentiate Don Rafael Tome, a student in
+San Jose, died.
+
+On the twenty-seventh, the sloop for Marianas sailed from Cavite;
+and Fathers Diego de Zarzosa and Jacinto Garcia, [33] and Brother
+Melchor de los Reyes, embarked in it.
+
+On the twenty-sixth, our mail reached Manila. On the twenty-eighth,
+that from Roma was opened, and no [provision for our] government
+was found.
+
+At the beginning of September, the Augustinians brought suit against
+us before the archbishop, regarding the administration of Mariquina.
+
+On the sixth of October, Father Jose Lopez died in Palapag.
+
+On the twelfth the father provincial, Francisco Salgado, [34] and
+the father rector, Luis Pimentel, [35] were notified of the judicial
+decision by the archbishop--who, declaring himself to be a competent
+judge, notwithstanding [our] challenge of his cognizance, although he
+had approved our licenses and our administration of the sacraments,
+revoked the said licenses, and decreed that no one of the Society
+should minister in Mariquina, [36] and that the ministry there should
+devolve upon the Augustinians.
+
+On the same day, the twelfth of October, it was decided in a provincial
+council that the paths of government should be opened. The first was
+entered by Father Geronimo de Ortega, and the second by Father Juan
+Andres de Palavicino; but, on account of the death of both these,
+Father Luis Pimentel--at the time, rector of the college of San
+Ignacio--began to govern.
+
+On the thirteenth of October, the armada entered the port of Cavite.
+
+On the fifteenth, Father Antonio Jaramillo [37] began to officiate
+as rector of the college of Manila.
+
+On the eighteenth of October, a decree was made known to the provisor,
+who had gone to Mariquina and Pasig, forbidding any official whatever
+of the archbishopric from taking action in matters pertaining to the
+lawsuit of Mariquina.
+
+On the twenty-first, a decree was made known to the archbishop strictly
+charging him that he must refrain from taking action in the lawsuit
+of Mariquina, and that he must exhibit the records.
+
+On the eighteenth of December, the archbishop was notified and charged
+not to disturb us in the Mariquina affair. On the nineteenth, a similar
+charge was laid upon the prior of Pasig; and another, on the twentieth,
+on the prior-general of the Augustinians.
+
+On the same day, the twentieth of December, the archbishop sent a
+denunciation of excommunication, with the curse of God--Father, Son,
+and Holy Spirit--and his own, and that of the apostles Peter and Paul,
+to the governor and to Auditor Bolivar, in order that they should
+not interfere in the Mariquina affair.
+
+
+
+Year of 1687
+
+On the twenty-first of January, 1687, General Don Juan de Zalaeta was
+arrested by order of the governor, and thrust into the sulphur dungeon
+[calabozo de azufre]. Item, they also arrested Licentiate Don Miguel
+de Lozama, and conveyed him, wearing two pairs of fetters, to the
+fort of San Gabriel. The goods of both were seized, and several of
+their clerks arrested.
+
+On the twenty-second, Dona Ynes, the wife of the said Don Miguel,
+sent a petition to the said governor, who answered that the judge of
+the suit was Don Francisco Velasco, alcalde-in-ordinary. Dona Ynes came
+before the royal Audiencia, and that body passed an act providing that
+the said alcalde should, after taking the confession of the accused,
+present the documents within twenty-four hours. The governor, having
+seen this decree, issued another, prohibiting further action by
+the royal Audiencia, and ordering the alcalde to prosecute the case
+without surrendering the documents. At night the governor summoned the
+auditors and fiscal to a conference, and made an address to them--from
+which resulted, as was noticed, great fear in the auditors, who almost
+decided to forsake the Audiencia, and take refuge in sanctuary.
+
+On the seventh of February, they arrested the auditor Don Diego
+de Viga, put him on a vessel, and conveyed him to the island of
+Mariveles. At the same time they made the most careful search, in
+order to seize the auditor Don Pedro de Bolivar; but by that time he
+had fled to sanctuary.
+
+On the fourteenth of February, they took from his house, where she
+had remained with guards, Dona Josefa Moran de la Cueva, the wife
+of the auditor Don Pedro de Bolivar, and carried her into banishment
+at Abucay.
+
+On the sixteenth, they also seized Dona Ynes, sister of the said Dona
+Josefa, and wife of Licentiate Don Miguel de Lezama, and carried her
+to the same place, Abucay.
+
+On the twenty-sixth of February, the college of the Society of Jesus
+was surrounded [by soldiers], to remove thence the person of the
+auditor Don Pedro de Bolivar; and not finding him, the men remained
+on guard, both within and without the college, for the space of nine
+days. In that time they searched the house eleven times--four of
+these with violence, wrenching the locks from doors, and breaking open
+tables; but they did not find the said Don Pedro. At the end of the
+nine days, he showed himself, of his own accord, and they arrested
+him and took him to Mariveles; several days before they had removed
+from the said island the auditor Don Diego de Viga, and transferred
+him to that of Lucban.
+
+Just about this time a new Audiencia was formed, which was thus
+arranged: the governor was its president; the royal fiscal became
+an auditor, Captain Don Jose Cervantes was judge of Audiencia, and
+Captain Juan de Agulo attorney-general.
+
+On the fourth of March--the day on which [the college of] the Society
+was first searched with violence--the English pirate captured a sloop
+of the king's, which was coming from Pangasinan laden with three
+thousand cabans of cleaned rice. Item, he also captured a champan
+belonging to the alcalde of Pangasinan, which came laden with rice
+and other products. [38]
+
+On the same day, the fourth of March, the archbishop sent to Mariquina
+to investigate whether Father Diego de Ayala was officiating as
+cura; the latter prevented the notary from doing so, and, when other
+people went to make the said investigation, he told them that they
+need not take that trouble--that he was acting as cura in virtue of
+the bull of St. Pius V and of his assignment [to that parish] by the
+[royal] patron.
+
+On the fifth of March there was preaching in the royal chapel by a
+Recollect friar, against whom the governor issued a royal decree very
+sharply rebuking him, which he caused to be read to all the religious
+orders. A few days later, the archbishop sent an act to the prior of
+Pasig, ordering him to officiate as cura to the people of Cainta. [39]
+
+About Christmas, the royal magazines in Panay were burned, and in them
+some six thousand cabans of rice. On the first of March, Saturday, the
+Augustinians set fire to the cottage on the ranch which the college
+of the Society of Jesus at Yloilo owns in Suaraga. On the following
+Saturday, March 8, fire visited the Augustinians, destroying a visita,
+a church and convent, and more than forty houses in the village. Item,
+and the following Saturday, March 15, the church and house were
+burned in the village of Dumangas, without their being able to save
+their valuables, or to prevent the burning of the pious offerings
+[colectas] of Cebu, which had been stored [in that convent]; and,
+besides this, more than two thousand cabans of rice.
+
+On the sixteenth of March, Passion Sunday, while Father Diego de
+Ayala was saying mass in the village, the church was entered by armed
+men, with Bachelor Teodoro de Aldana, the notary of the archbishop;
+the prior of Pasig, with two laymen; and other people. After mass
+was ended, they read to the Indians an act by the archbishop, which
+commanded them, under penalty of flogging and the galleys, to appear
+within three days before the prior of Pasig, resorting to the latter
+for religious ministrations, and to repeat the sacraments.
+
+On the seventeenth of March, the father procurator, Antonio de Borja,
+[40] presented a petition to the governor that he, as vice-patron,
+should take measures regarding the violent spoliation which the
+archbishop had inflicted on the Society. The governor referred the
+petition to the royal fiscal, as being his Lordship's counselor,
+but the said fiscal excused himself. Then it was referred to Doctor
+Cervantes, to Fray Francisco de Santa Ynes, and to many other persons,
+both ecclesiastics and laymen, but all excused themselves; and in
+these proceedings much time passed, so that it was the end of May
+before anything was accomplished.
+
+On the nineteenth of March, in the afternoon, the secretary came to
+deliver in behalf of the royal court a verbal message to the father
+procurator [sic] Antonio Jaramillo, advising him of the oversight of
+the preacher, who that morning in the sermon--at which the governor
+and the king's fiscal were present--had omitted to use the phrase,
+"very potent sir." The same message was sent to the superiors of the
+other religious orders, because, several days before, the prior of
+St. Augustine and another religious, a Dominican, had fallen into
+the same offense, when preaching in the royal chapel.
+
+On the twenty-seventh of March, Holy Thursday, the monument [41]
+of the Tagalogs in the church of Santo Domingo was burned. On
+the twenty-eighth, Good Friday, there was a fire in Binondo and
+part of Tondo; and one thousand two hundred and sixty houses were
+destroyed--two hundred and fifty-eight in the village of Tondo, and one
+thousand and two in that of Binondo. Thirteen persons were burned to
+death, and many others escaped only with serious injuries. The fire
+caught three times in the church of Binondo, but the Indians of San
+Miguel and Dilao put it out.
+
+On the twelfth of April the archbishop demanded aid from the governor,
+and with it arrested the cantor Don Geronimo de Herrera, and placed
+him in the fort of Santiago. Soon afterward, the governor caused the
+arrest of Don Juan de Cordoba and one Carcano, respectively procurator
+and receptor in the royal Audiencia; and afterward, on the twentieth
+of April, of Blas de Armenta, secretary of the court, and of Captain
+Diego de Vargas and others.
+
+On the twenty-second of April Father Ferragut died in the college.
+
+On the eighteenth of April, Domingo Diaz came to give the father
+rector, Antonio Jaramillo, a copy of a petition by the Augustinians;
+the father rector, before he knew that the said Domingo Diaz had come,
+had made, in scriptis [i.e., in writing], his protest of incompetency
+of the judge, and of challenge and appeal.
+
+On the twenty-third of April, the father procurator, Antonio de
+Borja, sent to the archbishop a document in which was set forth in
+due form the said protest, challenge, and appeal. He also presented
+to the governor a petition that he would give proper attention to the
+disturbance which the Society had suffered, and the injury inflicted
+on the royal patronage.
+
+On the twenty-eighth of April, Domingo Diaz came again to give Father
+Borja a copy of another petition from the Augustinians, who said that
+the challenge and appeal which he had interposed were of no force.
+
+On the fourth of May, they brought Captain Mateo Perea under arrest
+from the Lake [of Bay], and left him in his own house with guards. On
+the sixth of May, Domingo Diaz came to make known to Father Borja an
+act of the archbishop--who declaring that there was no occasion for
+the challenge and appeal interposed, commanded that the parties should
+make their complaint; and that within six days the documents for the
+sentence should be brought to his illustrious Lordship. On the tenth
+of May, Father Antonio Borja presented before the royal Audiencia a
+plea of fuerza, in order that he might make known the injury which
+the archbishop had done to the Society and the royal patronage.
+
+On the fourteenth of May, Domingo Diaz came to summon for the
+sentence of the archbishop the father rector, Pedro de Oriol, [42]
+who replied that he did not regard himself as summoned, or acknowledge
+his illustrious Lordship as a competent judge. On the same day, the
+fourteenth, Licentiate Don Antonio Roberto was brought a prisoner
+from Marinduque; and they placed him in the provisor's house, with
+a pair of very heavy fetters.
+
+On the fifteenth of May, the father rector, Pedro de Oriol, presented
+a petition to the governor, asking him to issue a juridical testimony
+of his recourse [to the Audiencia] with a plea of fuerza; and that
+notification be sent to the archbishop that his illustrious Lordship
+must not take any further action until the royal court should decide
+what must be done.
+
+On the seventeenth of May, Domingo Diaz came to make known the sentence
+of the archbishop, which declared that the Augustinians were the lawful
+parish priests of Mariquina, and that the sacraments administered by
+the fathers of the Society since October 12, 1686, had no force. The
+reply to all was, [that such proceeding was] null, and contrary to
+law. On the nineteenth of May, Father Borja came before the royal
+court a second time with a plea of fuerza. On the twentieth of May,
+the royal court resolved to issue a royal decree to the archbishop,
+commanding him to deliver up the documents in the Mariquina lawsuit.
+
+On the twenty-third of May, they arrested the dean, Don Miguel Ortiz
+de Cobarrubias, by order of the archbishop; they placed him in the
+provisor's house, and seized his goods. At the end of May, they
+carried the two auditors, and soon afterward Don Juan de Zalaeta and
+Don Miguel de Lezama, to Cagayan, as exiles; and they were placed one
+in each of the four garrisons that are maintained in the said province.
+
+On the third of June, a notary came from the archbishop with a petition
+from the Augustinians, who were asking his illustrious Lordship to
+confirm the sentence that he had pronounced. Father Borja made a reply,
+more than two sheets in length.
+
+On the fifth of June, a royal decree was made known to the archbishop
+that he must exhibit the documents in the Mariquina lawsuit, and
+his illustrious Lordship said that he would reply and would send the
+papers--which were in regard to the value of the sacraments.
+
+On the eighth of June the archbishop held a consultation with the
+royal Audiencia, asking its aid to arrest and punish Fathers Diego
+de Ayala and Pedro Cano. [43] Up to today, June 24, the archbishop
+has not exhibited the documents in the Mariquina lawsuit.
+
+
+
+News of this year of 1688 and part of the last one, with an appendix
+of other points
+
+1. The ship "Santo Nino" which sailed from Cavite last year, 1687,
+put back to the port of Bagatao, to the grief of everyone--not only
+on account of the deterioration of property and the very considerable
+damages, but also this greatly delayed the remedy which is needed
+by the public calamities and the oppression under which this colony
+lies. The ship's return to port is attributed to the excessive lading
+which it carried, to careless arrangements and lack of proper outfit,
+and to the undue timidity of those who had charge of the vessel.
+
+2. The Recollect fathers made a raid through the lands of Silang,
+which they call Alipaopao, Oyaye, Malinta, etc.; and, trying to adjudge
+them to the ranch of Sarmiento, which they had recently bought through
+the agency of General Endaya, they committed unheard-of atrocities
+in the houses and grain-fields of the Indians--burning and ravaging
+them as furiously and horribly as if an army of Camucones had raided
+them. The Indians lost, as appears from a juridical statement that
+was drawn up, more than three thousand pesos.
+
+3. A Dominican friar in Cagayan refused to absolve a Spaniard at the
+hour of death, in spite of all his entreaties for absolution. Although
+the friar had begun to hear his confession, the dying man could not
+proceed with it, being stopped by the nausea which comes at death,
+and he therefore died without absolution. I do not know all the
+circumstances in this case.
+
+4. Another friar in the same province refused to absolve Auditor
+Don Diego de Viga, unless he would first express I know not what
+protestations and detestations. The auditor replied that, for what
+concerned the banishment of the archbishop, his conscience had not
+given him any uneasiness, because he had understood that he acted
+in regard to it in accordance with the laws and decrees of our king
+a sovereign so Catholic as is that of Espana; and that in affairs
+in which he had felt scruples, and had proceeded according to human
+judgment, there was nothing for which to employ the friar's zeal,
+and still less occasion for his trying to have him make those
+detestations and protestations. Nevertheless, the friar persisted
+[se estuvo en sus trece] in refusing to absolve him; and Don Diego,
+embracing the holy Christ and uttering fervent acts of contrition,
+said that he appealed to the mercy of God, and thus he died. He was
+buried in consecrated ground, although afterward, it is reported,
+the archbishop sent orders that his bones should be disinterred,
+and removed from consecrated ground.
+
+5. Dona Josefa de la Cerda, the wife of Auditor Bolivar, died [44]
+in her exile, from anxiety and grief and despair. She asked for
+a confessor from the Society, which was not granted to her. The
+Dominican friar who served as parish priest in the village where
+she was an exile refused to absolve her unless she would comply with
+certain conditions, with which those fathers are wont to fetter and
+hinder souls. She was not minded to comply with these, or to make
+her confession to a religious of that order; and while a Franciscan
+who had been granted to her was on his way, she died. They spread the
+report that she had died impenitent, and buried her on the seashore.
+
+6. The archbishop, since he came back from his exile, has not ceased
+to wage war on this city. He demanded aid for arresting the religious
+of the seraphic father St. Francis, who preached in favor of the royal
+patronage; item, for arresting those who were ministering in Mariquina,
+the fathers of the Society; item, for seizing Father Cano; and all
+these acts proceed from the fury and partiality of Father Verart.
+
+7. The bishop of Sinopolis died, and orders were given that he be
+buried in [the church of] the Society of Jesus. This the archbishop
+and his friars took so ill that the latter refused to go to his
+funeral and burial, to the surprise and scandal of the whole city;
+and the archbishop prevented the cabildo from paying the last honors
+to the bishop in the church of the said order, declaring that it was
+polluted by [containing] the remains of Senor Grimaldos, who in the
+opinion of the said fathers died excommunicate.
+
+8. The archbishop forcibly took from the fathers of the Society the
+administration of the village of Cainta and Jesus de la Pena, and
+gave it to the Augustinian fathers--thus revenging himself on those
+of the Society, whom he regarded as enemies; and for this cause he
+commanded them to tear down their buildings at Jesus de la Pena,
+to the foundations--the governor aiding him in this atrocious act,
+contrary to the laws and privileges of the royal patronage.
+
+
+
+Appendix
+
+1. The goods which the governor shipped as contraband, of which the
+accountant made a written statement, are two hundred and thirty-five
+packages.
+
+2. The vessels which Endaya has built, with the authority that he
+possesses, are two pataches and a champan.
+
+3. The amount which the governor received from the Marques de la
+Laguna, at Santa Rosa, was one hundred thousand pesos.
+
+4. What the governor did with Blas Rodriguez [45] on account of the
+quantity of gold taels which he gave him.
+
+5. Of the Dominican friar who went to look at the bulls of Don
+Fernando, that he might enter as a Franciscan.
+
+6. How not even this gentleman has escaped from the anger of the
+archbishop and Verart.
+
+7. Of the inundation in Cagayan; of the locusts, famine, earthquakes,
+and drouths; of disturbances, etc. [46]
+
+8. Of the rosary entirely made of silver coins, [47] one hundred and
+fifty thousand in number, which, it is said, the blessed Dominican
+fathers gave to the governor.
+
+9. Of the imprisonment of Roberto; and why and how the provisor went,
+with great clatter of weapons and constables, to arrest a brother of
+the Society.
+
+10. How Father Pedroche, who had been banished from these islands,
+escaped from Acapulco, and came back dressed as a Recollect.
+
+11. Of the Dominican friar who killed another in Cagayan. [48]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE PARDO CONTROVERSY
+
+
+Brief relation of events in the city of Manila, in the Filipinas
+Islands
+
+
+The fiscal of the royal Audiencia of these islands, Licentiate Don
+Diego Viga, received two letters and an official report, with many
+depositions of witnesses, which were sent to him by the alcalde-mayor
+of the province of Ilocos. [49] These letters and documents were to
+the effect that by the continued residence of Bachelor Sebastian
+Arqueros de Robles, ecclesiastical head of the bishopric of Nueva
+Segovia, in the village of Vigan (which is the capital of the said
+province of Ilocos)--under the pretext of ministering ad interim to
+the natives of the village of Bangues, [50] which had for many years
+remained vacant--the natives were becoming uneasy and disturbed. This
+was hindering in the exercise of their duties not only the officers of
+justice, but also Licentiate Diego de Espinosa Maranon, the proprietary
+beneficed cura of the said village of Vigan, with whom the said acting
+bishop had notorious disputes. [According to the aforesaid documents],
+all the trouble arose from the fact that the said ecclesiastical
+ruler maintained his brothers and relatives in the said village, who
+with his authority and presence there were causing notable injuries
+and annoyances; and a decree was asked from the royal Audiencia,
+providing that the said acting bishop should nominate in the usual
+form persons for presentation to the benefice of Bangues, and that
+he should change his residence to the capital of his diocese, [51]
+and should not live at the village of Vigan, except during the period
+which is allowed to the ecclesiastical visitors by the holy Council.
+
+This royal decree was accordingly issued, and the said acting bishop
+replied that his residence in the village of Vigan was by the order
+and command of the archbishop, and that he had no way in which to
+fulfil the decree; and he presented the warrant and order which he
+held for the said residence, and some informal certificates by a few
+religious. This royal Audiencia, considering the disturbances and
+troubles which might result from issuing the second royal decree,
+ordered that it be temporarily suspended; and that meanwhile the
+president, governor, and captain-general should discuss and confer
+with the archbishop as to measures for securing peace, and those most
+expedient for a good example to the community.
+
+This verbal reply [52] which the said archbishop gave to the said
+governor gave occasion for the issue of a royal decree that the said
+archbishop should command the ecclesiastical ruler of Nueva Segovia
+to go to reside at the capital of his bishopric; but the latter would
+not obey, excusing himself with various pretexts. The said archbishop
+and his attorney-general [promotor fiscal] repeatedly urged that he
+be furnished with certified copies of the acts in virtue of which the
+royal decrees had been issued; and in the last petition, presented
+by the said attorney-general, he inserted the following clause:
+
+"In order that his Majesty may apply the needed corrective, and
+remove the violence and oppression experienced by the ecclesiastical
+jurisdiction; for, if one of its ministers attempts to administer
+justice to a subordinate, the culprit finds shelter in the royal
+Audiencia--not only to free himself from ecclesiastical justice, but
+also that they may begin legal proceedings against, and even exile, his
+superior and judge, who rightly desires and strives to punish him. And
+all the above was made evident by the aforesaid acts; and it has come
+to our knowledge through trustworthy persons that, in the petitions
+which were presented for the issuance of the said decrees, the respect
+due to the archbishop and to his high office was forgotten; and that,
+in the investigations which were made for this purpose, inquiries
+were directed into the hidden faults of ecclesiastical persons,
+and attempt had been made to punish them with the first of the said
+decrees, without punishing the chief authors [of those evil acts],
+who were laymen. Moreover, decrees had been issued only against the
+ecclesiastical judge on account of their own hidden faults, or those
+of other persons, intimidating him therewith in order that he should
+not administer justice in future; and a satisfactory account ought to
+be given to the said archbishop of the reasons which had influenced
+this royal Audiencia to issue the decrees. After [the publication of]
+the royal and canonical decrees, the archbishop had a right to command
+the clerk of the court to give him the said copy; but for the sake of
+the quiet and comfort of this community, he had commanded him first
+to request the acts from this royal Audiencia, making the proper and
+necessary requisitions therefor, and asking that the said secretary
+of the Audiencia be ordered and commanded to give him the said copy."
+
+As it was evident that the motives which existed for the despatch of
+the first royal decree were still further justified by such writings,
+the second was issued, which the said archbishop obeyed no better;
+on the contrary he said, in the reply that he made to this second
+royal decree, that he entreated the royal Audiencia to give little
+hope for aid to the ecclesiastics. [53]
+
+The royal Audiencia, influenced by the report made to it by the
+fiscal, and considering the disrespectful and indecorous character
+of the attorney-general's communication, and that it was entirely
+directed against the reputation and equitable procedure of the supreme
+tribunal and its ministers, issued a royal decree that the archbishop
+should punish his attorney-general, and should be warned how much
+he had derogated from his own dignity by having allowed such lack
+of respect. To this the archbishop replied that the attorney-general
+did not deserve punishment, because the petition had been presented
+by his own order and mandate.
+
+At this time the ecclesiastical cabildo presented themselves in
+recourse to the royal Audiencia, with a paper signed by their dean,
+[54] the dignitaries, the canons, and the other prebends, imploring
+the royal aid against the archbishop on account of the acts of fuerza
+and violence which were suffered by the cabildo, its members, and all
+the clergy. [55] They declared that the worst of these were due to the
+fact that the said archbishop had at his side a religious of the Order
+of St. Dominic, named Fray Raymundo Verart; [56] that the archbishop
+had retained him, ever since he came from Spain, under the title of
+counselor [asesor] and director; that he had gained such influence
+that he directed all the actions of the said archbishop; and that
+his decisions were so extraordinary that he kept all minds in a state
+of notable disquiet--to such a degree that he even refused recourse
+from the acts of fuerza, endeavoring to render the jurisdiction of the
+archbishop absolute, and to exclude his Majesty (as represented in the
+Audiencia) from his highest prerogative, that of aid to his oppressed
+ecclesiastical vassals. They represented that the archbishop acted as
+an advocate in the very suits in which he was judge; that he lived
+outside the city, in a hospital of Sangleys [57] which is in charge
+of the religious of St. Dominic, from which resulted injury and delay
+in the despatch of business; that he could think of nothing but his
+friars, and behaved as one of them--for on the day of election of
+provincial he had rendered obedience to the father who was elected,
+and in the procession he walked in the fifth rank--regarding himself
+as first of all a friar, although he was archbishop-elect; and that
+he treated the cabildo and its members ill, showing aversion to them.
+
+With this petition for relief the dean and cabildo presented a
+mass of records in proof of their argument, asking that decrees be
+issued: one for the archbishop, that he should remove from his side
+the said Fray Raymundo; [58] and another for the father provincial
+of St. Dominic, that he should send the said religious to the remote
+parts of the missions in charge of his order, agreeably to the purpose
+and vocation for which he had come to these islands at the cost of
+the royal exchequer.
+
+In this matter both first and second decrees were issued for the said
+archbishop and the father provincial of St. Dominic, neither of whom
+was willing to render obedience, the archbishop returning some very
+uncivil answers. [59] Finally, the latter took exception to Doctor
+Don Diego Calderon, assigning as the cause of this proceeding his
+remarks about the ecclesiastical jurisdiction; he also challenged Don
+Diego Antonio de Viga [the fiscal] for the mode of expression which
+he had used in his writings. By this expedient the proceedings of
+the Audiencia were suspended, for lack of judges--for at that time
+it contained only the two gentlemen, Don Francisco de Montemayor and
+Don Diego Calderon--until Doctors Don Christoval de Grimaldo and Don
+Pedro Sebastian de Bolivar y Mena, the recently-arrived [auditors],
+[60] could examine the question of the said challenge. At the petition
+of Doctor Don Estevan Lorenzo de la Fuente y Alanis, who also had just
+arrived, they declared that there was no cause for it; and without
+doubt it would result thus, since the challenge was not sworn to, or
+presented, in accordance with the regulations of the royal laws. They
+likewise commanded that the said archbishop be requested and charged to
+maintain in all things friendly relations with the [royal] ministers,
+not only in writing to them but in speech. When he was notified of
+this royal decree, he gave a very sharp answer, and concluded by
+saying that his own behavior would be governed in accordance with
+the actions of the ministers, as he thus tells them in all his replies.
+
+This royal Audiencia, considering his insolent replies and disobedience
+to the royal decrees, and the scandals thus caused, and that the whole
+arose from the influence of Father Raymundo Verart, determined, for
+the more thorough justification and proof of the whole matter; that
+an investigation should be made by the auditor Don Pedro de Bolivar,
+with regard to the injuries and other pernicious consequences which
+were being caused to the public welfare, and which gave occasion to the
+complaint of the ecclesiastical cabildo about the assistance rendered
+to the archbishop by the said father Fray Raymundo Verart--[all the
+more] as his illustrious Lordship had, before the said father came to
+these islands, conducted himself in entire harmony and most friendly
+intercourse with the royal Audiencia, the ecclesiastical cabildo,
+and the other courts. The affair being in this condition, the said
+father provincial, Fray Baltasar de Santa Cruz, was summoned before
+the royal [court in] session, where they related to him the pernicious
+consequences to the public welfare which were accruing from the said
+assistance [of Father Verart], and were steadily increasing on account
+of his acts of disobedience. The said provincial was admonished to
+the fulfilment and execution of what was charged upon him in the said
+two royal decrees, making him responsible for all the difficulties
+that might result; but he resisted them at every point, repeating his
+[former] replies. This bold attitude caused the Audiencia, on even more
+justifiable grounds, to despatch a third decree, which the said father
+provincial, Fray Baltasar de Santa Cruz, persisted in disobeying.
+
+In the midst of these proceedings, another decree against the said
+archbishop was claimed and demanded by Bachelor Diego de Espinosa
+Maranon, saying that his Lordship had denied the just appeal that he
+had made from an act which entailed [on him] an irreparable hardship;
+and a royal decree was issued for him that the said archbishop must
+grant the said appeal; or, even if he were not obliged to grant it,
+his acts must be sent [to the Audiencia], in order to know whether
+he committed fuerza in denying the appeal. [61] The said archbishop
+did not obey this decree; before this, he had not, at the outset,
+consented to let a receptor of this royal Audiencia enter to make
+known to him one of its acts; and the matter was not followed up
+(although in this recourse they went so far as to despatch the second
+decree), for Bachelor Diego de Espinosa Maranon desisted from it,
+at the instance of certain persons.
+
+To the above-mentioned changes and indispensable acts of assistance
+granted by this royal Audiencia, is added that which was secured by
+the illustrious bishop-elect of Nueva Segovia, Doctor Don Francisco
+Pizarro de Orellana, who came before the royal Audiencia, saying
+that the archbishop had, in the credentials which he had given to the
+bishop, reserved for his own cognizance the case of Bachelor Diego de
+Espinosa Maranon--although this was a trial in the first instance,
+and the said bachelor was under the bishop's parochial care and was
+cura of the benefice of Vigan, one of the parishes belonging to his
+bishopric. The said bishop requested a royal decree that the papers
+should be furnished to him by the said archbishop in the customary
+form, and that the said cases should be referred to him. In this
+affair they went so far as to issue the fourth royal decree; but the
+said archbishop did not obey one of them. [62]
+
+The same resistance was encountered by four other royal decrees issued
+against the said archbishop, at the demand, and appeal from fuerza,
+interposed by Master Don Geronimo de Herrera y Figueroa, cantor of
+this holy cathedral church. He was a prisoner of the said archbishop
+in the college of Santo Tomas of this city, an indictment having been
+brought against him, charging him with being guilty of disrespect for
+the archiepiscopal dignity, and having at the session of the cabildo
+concurred in their demand for relief, [63] of which mention has
+been made--that the said archbishop should remove from his side Fray
+Raymundo Verart, and the rest that is stated above. The said Master
+Don Geronimo had alleged that the said archbishop was not competent
+to act as judge, of which exception he had notified the prelate; but
+the latter without settling this question--which, as pre-judicial,
+[64] ought to have been summarily decided--proceeded in the case. Even
+if he were a competent judge, he ought to proceed with the adjunct
+judges, [65] as ordained by the holy Council of Trent; but, [not]
+heeding these considerations, the said archbishop proceeded with
+fuerza and violence, which he wreaked on Don Geronimo's person. This
+case was decidedly within the cognizance of this royal Audiencia, and
+to its organization and civil jurisdiction belongs the removal of the
+fuerza with which the prelate had oppressed Don Geronimo. Upon this
+ground they issued the said four decrees, to attain their object, in
+order that the said archbishop should send them the acts, so that it
+might be ascertained whether or not he had committed fuerza, or else
+should send these with his notary; but he refused to obey the decrees.
+
+The royal Audiencia, striving, in whatever pertained to its side,
+to avoid inflicting the chastisement which his actions demanded, in
+order to see whether their tolerance would constrain him to lay aside
+his arbitrary proceedings, had suspended, with the clause "for the
+present," the execution of the penalties of banishment which he was
+declared to have incurred. [66] This suspension had been attributed
+to negligence of the Audiencia--at which all the people were quite
+disconsolate; afterward it was known that the court had not acted
+without very deliberate resolution, which had been influenced no
+little by the zealous efforts of the governor; when all were hoping
+for a change in the sentiments of the archbishop, the courage of the
+auditors was still further strengthened. For the Order of the Society
+[of Jesus] presented an executory decree, issued by the royal and
+supreme Council of Indias, in regard to the precedence of the college
+of San Joseph over that of Santo Tomas, which is in charge of the
+Dominican religious--in which matter the Society has encountered much
+opposition from that order; they have even gone so far as to break out
+in threats, which the Society has seen carried out. But immediately
+the ecclesiastical attorney-general, with license from the archbishop
+(who had made legal complaint), demanded in the royal Audiencia aid
+and the proper documents against the decree, [67] in order that the
+commander of the capitana "Santa Rosa"--which had just put back through
+stress of weather, and had not yet reached the port--might be furnished
+with a warrant for the seizure of the bales [of merchandise] which,
+he said, were coming in the said ship on the account of the Society
+of Jesus. At the same time the reverend Father Francisco Salgado,
+provincial of the said order of the Society, came before the said
+royal Audiencia with a plea of appeal, on account of which the said
+archbishop instituted suit against that father's order, opposing the
+numerous privileges and bulls of exemption which aid it. While these
+actions were pending, and before anything had been decided in them,
+the said father provincial made representations that, notwithstanding
+the said questions were still (as I have said) unsettled, he was
+informed that a notary of the said archbishop had gone to the said
+ship on various matters of business, thus showing lack of respect to
+this royal Audiencia. He urged that documents should be issued, in
+order that no further proceedings be taken in this matter, and that
+the commander of the ship should not permit [the seizure of goods]
+until the points at issue were settled. But, although these decrees
+were issued, they produced no result; for, as is evident from competent
+testimony, the agents of the archbishop went to the said ship, on the
+day following that on which the attorney-general had demanded aid,
+and, without presenting any warrant to the commander, had undertaken
+and proceeded to make seizures and deposits of bales. [68] This affair
+was not finally decided, because it was known outside of court that
+the archbishop had relinquished his claims therein. [69]
+
+In this royal Audiencia a suit was pending for a long time
+between Captain Don Pedro de Sarmiento y Leoz, as husband of Dona
+Michaela de Lisarralde [70]--daughter of Don Juan de Lisarralde,
+and great-granddaughter of Dona Maria de Roa, deceased, who had been
+executrix for the said Don Juan de Lisarralde, and guardian of the
+said Dona Michaela--against Father Geronimo de Ortega of the Society
+of Jesus (who had been executor [71] for Bachelor Nicolas Cordero, and
+is executor for the said Dona Maria de Roa), over the guardianship and
+inheritance which belonged to the said Dona Michaela, and the account
+which had been demanded for all the above affairs. The said father,
+in conformity with the acts which had been made known to him in this
+regard, presented the accounts in the royal Audiencia, after the
+appointment, acceptance, and oath-taking of auditors therefor. This
+suit, as stated, lasted a long time, [72] and in it came up revised
+acts of the said royal Audiencia ordering that all who were interested
+in the said executorships should prefer their claims in the said royal
+Audiencia. The affair being in this condition, the said captain Don
+Pedro Sarmiento--urged on by Licentiate Nicolas de la Vega Caraballo,
+[73] an ally of the archbishop--demanded before the said archbishop
+that the said Father Ortega should be commanded, under penalty of
+censure, to furnish him the said accounts. This command was laid
+upon him by repeated acts; nevertheless, the said father refused
+[the ecclesiastical] jurisdiction, since he had [the case] in a
+competent tribunal, pending judgment, and the said accounts had
+been presented--in proof of which he presented sworn statements to
+the said archbishop. Nevertheless, the latter persisted in ordering
+the said father to give him the said accounts--even going so far as
+to denounce him as excommunicated. The ground for this action was,
+that in the ecclesiastical court demand had been made by the said Don
+Pedro for the surrender of the bequest [74] to the said Archdeacon
+Cordero. Father Ortega made appeal in the proper quarter from this
+censure, but the archbishop refused to allow the said appeal; from
+this arose the recourse to royal aid from the act of fuerza in having
+denied to the father the said appeal and attempted to compel him
+to what he had no right to do--the surrender of the said accounts,
+which had already been presented in the said royal Audiencia. [75]
+On that account, and because of the very nature of the case, it was
+wholly within the cognizance of the royal Audiencia, and concerned
+laymen. For this reason, the usual royal decree was issued, in order
+that the notary should come to make report. This being made known
+to the archbishop, he made a very prolix reply, taking the ground,
+in very disrespectful language, that the appeal was not legitimate,
+and that he was not obliged to send the documents; but saying that,
+upon the necessary declarations, and with the stipulation that the acts
+should not pass into the possession of any official of the Audiencia,
+but must remain in the hands of his own notary, he would give orders
+that the latter should go to make the report, whenever the Audiencia
+should command it, but he must refuse to absolve the said father. The
+Audiencia, in order to avoid new occasions for controversy with this
+prelate, overlooked his imposing upon it a condition, and one which
+was so unusual. Domingo Diaz [76] having made the report, and noted
+in the course of it two false assertions--which he discovered while
+inspecting the acts, having read them through--the said notary went
+away, carrying them with him, without waiting for the opinion and
+decision of the said royal Audiencia on them to be affirmed. That
+tribunal declared the said suit, [77] and the cognizance of it, as it
+concerned laymen, to be altogether secular--as were also questions
+of guardianship, inheritance, the charge of property, dowries,
+and other matters of that nature; and that, by virtue of this, all
+[episcopal] acts regarding these questions be suspended in this royal
+Audiencia. As for the pious legacies contained in the said testaments,
+the archbishop was declared to have committed fuerza in not granting to
+Father Ortega the appeal which he had interposed before the delegate
+of his Holiness; and the Audiencia resolved that, in consequence of
+all the above facts, the prelate should absolve the said father, and
+immediately remove his name from the list of excommunicated persons,
+and that a royal decree [to this effect] be issued in his behalf. When
+this was made known to the archbishop, he gave an extremely insolent
+and uncivil reply, opposing the authority of this royal Audiencia,
+the royal jurisdiction, the governor, and the auditors. He refused
+to send the acts [to the Audiencia], or to absolve the said father,
+and declared in plain terms that he would persist in this opposition,
+and that the Audiencia might therefore inflict whatever violence they
+chose on him and his dignity.
+
+Another instance: Sargento-mayor Don Juan Gallardo--who was chief
+magistrate, castellan, and commander of the seamen and sailors,
+in the port of Cavite (the most important port in these islands,
+and its command one of the highest military posts)--had a prisoner,
+an artillerist named Lorenco Magno. [78] The said archbishop sent
+him a letter of requisition, demanding that Don Juan hand over to
+him the said prisoner and the suit that had been brought against him;
+or that he should declare under oath whether or not that suit was in
+his hands. In this letter of requisition the archbishop did not state
+the cause for which his illustrious Lordship said he had accused the
+aforesaid [prisoner, which was] bigamy. The said castellan, moreover,
+noticed in it certain imperative expressions and the archbishop
+addressed him as vos [i.e., "you"], [79] in the manner which is
+customary in the royal decrees. The said castellan sent the prisoner to
+the archbishop, who issued another letter of requisition, in the same
+form as the preceding, at the petition of Francisca Ignacia, wife of
+the said Lorenco Magno--against whom, it was declared, he was carrying
+on a suit for divorce--demanding that immediately, without any delay,
+under penalty of excommunication and a fine of five hundred pesos,
+the said castellan should within three hours deliver to the notary a
+certified statement of the suit which he had instituted against the
+said Lorenco Magno. The castellan came before the royal Audiencia with
+his deposition regarding these two letters of requisition, demanding
+that the said archbishop be requested and charged to observe, in the
+communications that he might send to the judicial officers of his
+Majesty, the forms ordained by law, treating the magistrates with the
+courtesy due to their position. These acts having been considered in
+the Audiencia, a royal decree was despatched requiring that the said
+archbishop must, in the requisitions which he might send to the royal
+magistrates, treat them with due politeness, conforming to the forms
+of law and usage--not using imperative terms, or the word vos. When
+the archbishop was notified of this royal decree, he gave an answer
+full of uncivil, improper, and disrespectful expressions against the
+royal jurisdiction, the governor, and the auditors. The latter had
+issued an act that Doctor Don Joseph Zervantes and Master Nicolas de
+la Vega Caravallo should not meddle with the profession of advocate,
+into which they had thrust themselves--from which resulted consequences
+pernicious to the public welfare, since they had not taken the courses
+of study in the school of law. When notified of the act, they replied
+that the archbishop had already ordered them not to plead in secular
+tribunals, and the said Caravallo added that he was the only one
+who could issue such commands. On the following day the archbishop
+issued an act in opposition to that of the Audiencia, commanding that
+no petitions should be accepted in his court that were not signed by
+the said Doctor Zervantes and Master Caravallo. The fiscal, when all
+the replies had been shown to him, demanded that, without giving
+opportunity for any further acts of disobedience or disrespect,
+they should execute upon the person of the reverend archbishop the
+penalties which he had been declared to have incurred--banishment,
+and the loss of his secular revenue [temporalidades]; and that, for
+this purpose, the clause "for the present," contained in the act of
+October 1 in the past year of 82, be revoked and erased, and the act
+put into execution on May 1 of the said year [i.e., 1683]. These acts
+having been considered by the royal Audiencia with the attention and
+mature deliberation which so grave a matter demanded, it was decided
+that sentence of banishment should be executed on the archbishop, and
+that he should be sent to the village of Lingayen, in the province of
+Pangasinan, a village of Christian Indians in charge of the Dominican
+religious. This charge was committed to Doctor Don Christoval Grimaldo
+de Herrera and Sargento-mayor Juan de Veristain, alcalde-in-ordinary,
+who fulfilled it with the utmost discretion, quietness, and moderation;
+[80] and the archbishop was embarked in a barcoluengo, in which the
+forethought of the governor had provided all his kitchen equipment,
+with everything else that was necessary for his support and the needs
+of the voyage. [81]
+
+The royal Audiencia had proceeded very cautiously, for, foreseeing the
+tumults or disturbances that are wont to arise on such occasions, and
+endeavoring to avoid whatever could serve as an incentive thereto, they
+recognized that the ringing of the bells in making any demonstrations
+might act as such incentive; and they asked the governor to command
+that guards be posted in the bell-tower of the church, and in the house
+of Master Juan Goncalez de Guzman, the provisor, so that the latter
+could not order any demonstration to be made while the sentence of
+banishment was being executed. On the same day when this was done, the
+royal Audiencia sent a decree to the cabildo, ordering that they should
+conduct themselves in all respects amicably with the royal Audiencia
+and the other royal officials, not allowing any acts of violence to
+be inflicted on the vassals of his Majesty, or hindering them from
+appealing to the Audiencia in cases of fuerza. The cabildo were also
+warned not to accept any documents of appointment from the ruler
+of the archbishopric, or allow him to exercise jurisdiction, until
+the person appointed should present himself before the royal court,
+where he must take the customary oath. To this decree the cabildo
+rendered obedience; and, the very illustrious master Don Fray Ximenez
+Barrientos, bishop of Troya and assistant bishop of these islands,
+having presented himself before the cabildo with the appointment
+of ruler [of the archdiocese]--which the archbishop had conferred
+upon him on the twenty-seventh of March, when the said archbishop
+was already declared an exile--he was referred by the cabildo to the
+Audiencia. Being present there, his appointment was, in consequence
+of the demand made by the fiscal that license should not be granted
+to him, suspended in that court, for weighty reasons there presented,
+and it was referred to the Council, in order that his Majesty might
+decide according to his pleasure; and [it was declared that] in the
+interim the cabildo should govern the archdiocese. [82] And here it
+occurs to me to remark, parenthetically, that, although the secrets
+and the justifiable motives of the Audiencia are inscrutable, we may
+regard it as probable that their principal reason for this action
+was their knowledge of the fact that this bishop, a few days after
+arriving in this city, had preached in the convent of Santo Domingo,
+on the day of the naval battle, [83] and the entire tendency of his
+sermon was to disparage the royal jurisdiction and rebuke those who
+would appeal to it. He said that this entire city was a university of
+vices, although of that he could have had no experience; and it was
+he who had exerted most influence on the actions of the archbishop,
+over and over again strengthening him in acts of disobedience [to the
+secular government]. The cabildo, since the Audiencia had not accepted
+the said bishop as ecclesiastical ruler, declared that the see was
+vacant by interpretation [of that act]; and the bishop of Troya replied
+that they could not have sent him better news, as he did not desire to
+take charge of other men's flocks. Thereupon he immediately went back
+to the convent of San Juan del Monte, outside the walls of this city;
+[84] and on the following day a Dominican religious set out to stir
+up the other religious orders (except the Society), that after sunset
+prayers they should ring the bells for an interdict. This was done by
+[the convent of] Santo Domingo. [85] [He also told them] that Master
+Juan Gonzalez de Guzman, provisor of the said archbishop, would post
+as excommunicated the dean, Master Don Miguel Ortiz de Cobarrubias,
+whom the cabildo had appointed ecclesiastical ruler. At this, the dean
+asked the governor for the aid of some infantry, to go to the convent
+of Santo Domingo, to which the said master had retreated, to remove
+him thence. This was granted; but, on going to the said convent,
+they encountered much opposition to their entrance, on the part of
+the religious. The dean was so insolently treated by them that he was
+obliged, in order to prevent greater troubles, to return and inform
+the governor and the royal Audiencia, then in session. That court
+issued a royal decree to notify the superiors of the religious orders
+that in publishing an interdict [86] they must follow the metropolitan
+church [matriz]; and thus was prevented a great scandal, disturbance,
+and popular commotion in this city--in which, since the said sentence
+of banishment was carried out, the utmost peace has been experienced,
+nor has there occurred the slightest disturbance.
+
+I must not omit, since it is a part of this account, the following
+information: On Epiphany [dia de Reyes; in 1682] while the royal
+Audiencia were present in the holy cathedral church, a sermon was
+preached there by father Fray Francisco de Villalva, a Dominican
+religious, whose language was insolent in the highest degree. He
+spoke openly and expressly against the governor, the auditors, and
+the ecclesiastical cabildo (which he pointed out as the source of
+disturbances in the community), saying to the archbishop: "Let not your
+illustrious Lordship concern himself with the secular revenues; look to
+God [for maintenance]." He tried to disparage the royal jurisdiction,
+and rebuked appeals to the Audiencia--saying so much that he gave cause
+for that tribunal to send by its chaplain a message to the archbishop,
+asking him to order the preacher to cease. His illustrious Lordship
+replied that the preacher was doing his duty, and the latter, in
+the face of these demonstrations, went on with the sermon even to
+the end. Afterward, by order of the court, the auditor Don Pedro de
+Bolivar put the said father on a ship, to be taken to the province
+of Cadbalogan--in which he must remain until the opportunity should
+arrive, by the departure of a ship [from Manila], for him to embark
+for Madrid, whither the acts were to be sent. This was carried out,
+and, although the ship was driven back to port, he is now going on
+board the capitana. [87] May God conduct these affairs for our good,
+and preserve your Grace [88] for many years. Manila, June 15, 1683.
+
+
+Juan Sanchez
+
+
+
+
+A curious relation of events in the city of Manila since the arrival
+of the ships in the year 1684.
+
+On the ninth of July the bells were rung for the [arrival of the]
+ship "Santa Rosa," with certain news that it was opposite Baco, and
+had brought the new governor, Admiral Don Gabriel de Curucelaegui
+y Arriola--who, on account of the fury of the storms, would not be
+able to make his entrance into this city until August 24. [On that
+occasion] he was received with loud applause, triumphal arches, and
+laudatory speeches. On that day occurred some memorable events. At
+five o'clock in the morning there was a severe earthquake, although
+it caused but little damage to the city. In the afternoon, while
+his Lordship, before entering through the Puerta Real, was taking
+the customary oath in order that the keys might be delivered to him,
+the horse of his Majesty's fiscal became unruly, and attacked those
+who were near him with kicks and bites. He who came out worst from
+this was the secretary whom his Lordship brought over; he was injured
+in one leg by some kicks, from the effects of which he suffered for
+several days. [89] When the governor had entered the city, and when
+he was about two pike-lengths from the gate, the balcony above it,
+which was full of people, fell; some were killed, others crippled or
+maimed, and others bruised. Among them were friars and lay-brothers,
+negroes and whites. With these events, the common people began to
+indulge in much gossip.
+
+When Don Gabriel had taken possession of his government, his first act
+was to retire Captain Mateo Lopez Perea, and to make Captain Miguel
+Sanchez government secretary, quite contrary to their wishes. The
+second was to appoint as chief chaplain of the royal chapel the canon
+Master Don Pablo de Aduna, as a reward for having always withdrawn
+himself from the cabildo, without choosing to acknowledge it as
+ecclesiastical ruler. The third (and the source of many others) was
+to bring back our troubles, so that the whole pancake [tortilla] was
+turned bottom upwards--even going so far as to revoke the sentence
+of banishment on the archbishop, and bring him to Manila. This, as
+those say who understand the matter, is the most extraordinary thing
+that has occurred anywhere in the Spanish domain; for he was exiled
+for disobeying sixteen royal decrees and I have given an account
+to his Majesty of these sixteen points of disobedience, or [rather]
+this disobedience of sixteen points. The preambles of these points,
+or their history, required much time and no little paper; but they
+will be summarized as briefly as possible.
+
+After the exile of the archbishop, the actions, conversations,
+and sermons of the Dominican fathers were so wild and extravagant,
+against the members of the Audiencia, the ecclesiastical cabildo,
+and the Theatins [i.e., the Jesuits], that their mildest act was to
+call all of the latter Pharisees or heretics, and utter other jests
+of that sort, even from the pulpit. Consequently the royal Audiencia
+felt obliged to advise its president, then Don Juan de Vargas, that
+he should apply a corrective to these acts. This was a royal decree,
+requesting and charging the [Dominican] provincial to send to the
+port of Cavite the friars Bartolome Marron, [90] Raimundo Verart,
+and P. Pedroche, [91] and to make them ready, at the cost of the
+order, for [the journey to] Espana; and to send to Cagayan the two
+lecturers in theology, Fray Juan de Santo Domingo [92] and Fray
+Francisco de Vargas, [93] and not allow them to leave that province
+without a special order from the government. The provincial answered
+that those religious had not done any of the things that were alleged
+of them except by his order, and that therefore the blame, if there
+were any, was his and not theirs; and that all of them were ready
+to die for the faith. Again he was requested and charged as before,
+the provincial [94] also being summoned to go to Espana, to give
+account of his acts. These orders were resisted, whereupon the convent
+was surrounded with infantry. As the provincial and Fray Pedroche
+refused to go out afoot, the soldiers took them from the convent,
+carrying them with the utmost propriety and respect, by order of
+the provisor, who was summoned for this function. They went away,
+Father Pedroche hurling excommunications, from which escaped only the
+alcalde-in-ordinary Pimentel, who conveyed them to Cavite, because
+he had given them excellent bread and pastries. At this, not only the
+Dominican fathers and their friends took to flight, but Quintero [95]
+and his barangay--especially when they saw some embarked for Espana,
+and others for Cagayan. Then, the news of the change in government
+having come, was begun the fabrication of a scheme or plot, well
+covered up, as follows:
+
+They fully persuaded the governor that this [96] one was a
+schismatic--as it were, another Inglaterra in the time of Henry VIII;
+and, to forward their schemes--as he had, before all the religious
+orders, recognized the cabildo as ecclesiastical ruler--they persuaded
+the father provincial of St. Augustine, Father Jose Duque, to render,
+and command all his friars to render, obedience to the bishop of Troya
+[97]--who had been nominated as head of the diocese by the archbishop,
+but whose appointment the royal Audiencia had suspended. The father
+provincial did so, in a circular letter sent to all the friars of
+his order, arousing the resentment that might be expected in the
+ecclesiastical cabildo, and much more in the royal Audiencia.
+
+As soon as the news of the ship arrived, the Troyan wrote and made
+public a document with this title: "Advice to those who come as
+strangers to these islands, that they may not err in their judgment of
+things pertaining to the banishment of the archbishop." This paper had
+no solidity, and answer to it was made in another, in which the former
+was utterly demolished [98] with sharp arguments. The provincial made
+another reply, over his signature, of the same quality as the former
+document, but with not slight attacks on the authority and patronage
+of our king. On the same day when the governor entered the city [i.e.,
+August 24] in the afternoon, on that morning came into Manila Fray
+Bartolome Marron (who went about secretly), and Fathers Juan de Santo
+Domingo and Juan de Vargas, who were the lecturers exiled to Cagayan;
+the latter went publicly through the city, scorning the royal authority
+by which they were exiled. Immediately began the intrigue--which,
+according to report, came already planned from Mejico.
+
+The governor questioned the religious orders, requesting and charging
+them to answer the points that go with this letter, which were set
+forth by the bishop of Troya. The fathers of St. Francis in their
+paper declared themselves for the king our sovereign, and approved
+what had been done by the royal court. The Augustinian fathers said,
+"Viva Troya!" [99] with a document full of depositions--some made
+by so evil a brain as that of Fray Raimundo Verart (but signed by
+the father provincial Duque); some by two stray (that is, recently
+arrived) lecturers, one of whom confessed that he had never heard
+of the works of Solorzano; and the last who signed the paper was
+Fray Gaspar de San Agustin, the procurator-general, who on account
+of being learned in grammar, thought that, as versed in the art of
+Nebrija [100] (who was an auditor), it was the same to know how to
+conjugate past tenses as to comprehend futures. [101] The Recollect
+fathers followed their brethren, but with so few depositions that
+I judge the number did not reach the plural of the Greeks. [102]
+This paper was much commended, and it is something which I admired,
+knowing that it was the work of their provincial, Fray Ysidro; and
+when it was seen it was recognized as his by the style and manner
+of expression--the stamp of the pulpit, which is that [vocation] for
+which God has given him grace. The Theatins evaded a reply, recognizing
+the game (or rather flame) [juego, o fuego] that was being started;
+but they say that in their apology they explained this omission, and
+expressed their opinions with no little care--saying that they were
+ignorant of what had passed in the sessions of the royal court; and
+that, as it was to be inferred that the royal Audiencia had informed
+his Majesty of everything, they could not pass judgment on those acts.
+
+These papers, or collections of papers, were going about, when the
+Troyan plunged in medias res and decided the question. One Sunday
+morning at five o'clock, he went with his notary Caraballo, and
+fiscals, and an escort of soldiers, and entered all the churches
+(except the cathedral), where he published himself as ecclesiastical
+ruler, and commanded that they should not recognize the cabildo as
+such. To this [he added] the penalty of major excommunication and of
+being considered schismatics, if they did not go to render obedience
+within three days; and he left posted in all the churches copies of
+his act. [103] This was an action so extraordinary that, if this
+were a town of the common people, a riot would have occurred. All
+the members of the ecclesiastical cabildo repaired to the governor,
+who received them with scant welcome, and without giving them the
+title of "Lordship," [Senoria] which is their due when they appear
+officially as the cabildo. He told the dean to tell his story;
+and when the latter replied that that cabildo was not going to tell
+stories, the governor again told him to go on with his story. They
+told him in few words what had occurred, and what had just been done;
+but when they again told him that the bishop of Troya had taken with
+him an escort of soldiers, he said that he had no knowledge of such
+a thing. In conclusion, they stated that by three royal decrees they
+had been charged with the government [of the see]; and that he should
+give them another decree, commanding them to surrender it to the
+bishop of Troya, or that he should approve the bishop's appointment,
+and immediately they would surrender the government to him; and
+with that they went away. Immediately the governor held a session
+(or rather sessions) of the Audiencia, which lasted three days;
+and at the end of that time "the mountain brought forth," [104]
+by a majority of votes. It resulted that, at ten o'clock at night,
+there was a peal of bells, as if for a ship from Castilla; and the
+members of the cabildo, escorted by many personages, went to render
+obedience to the Troyan. He informed them that he could not absolve
+them unless they would swear obedience to the archbishop, which they
+must also render to his provisor, Juan Gonzalez, on their knees, asking
+his pardon for the injuries that they had done him, and making amends
+for the losses that he had suffered. When they resisted, laymen came
+in among them and undertook to surround them (as they did); and after
+they fell on their knees they placed their hands on the missal, and,
+as good men who stood in fear of God, they were granted absolution,
+but ad reincidentiam, until the archbishop should decree what would
+be most expedient. On another day the Troyan was received in the
+cathedral, with military display, the long ringing of the bells, etc.
+
+The governor, who had already decided to restore the archbishop to his
+see [105]--but without showing the least indication of rehabilitating
+the royal jurisdiction, and establishing obedience to what had been
+commanded--despatched General Don Tomas de Andaya and Sargento-mayor
+Don Gonzales Samaniego [106] for his illustrious Lordship; they were
+accompanied by the Dominican father Fray Baltasar de Santa Cruz.
+
+His illustrious Lordship came here, and was received with military
+display, a salvo of artillery, etc. He entered the city clad in his
+pontifical robes, and went to the palace of the governor, who was
+awaiting him; [107] they remained a short time in conversation, the
+governor straitly charging him [to maintain] peace. Then he went to
+his own house, where he found the superiors of the religious orders,
+who also had gathered in the cathedral with many other religious to
+welcome him. He remained two days within Manila, and, without visiting
+the superiors, or returning their visit to him, he contented himself
+with calling on Generals Tejada, Andaya, and Quintero; and he crossed,
+near San Gabriel, to the house of Don Francisco de Atienza, who is
+sargento-mayor of the army.
+
+Everyone promised himself an Octavian peace; but in ten or twelve days
+war made its appearance, and the more experienced were continually
+in dread. On the twenty-eighth of November, the eve of the feast
+of the table of the blessed sacrament, notification was sent to the
+cabildo, the superiors of the religious orders, and all the curas and
+missionaries within and without the walls, that no one should admit
+into any of their churches the auditors, Don Juan de Vargas Hurtado,
+and many other persons, both citizens and military officers, [108]
+as having incurred the penalties in the bull De la cena. At this the
+entire community felt as the pious reader can understand, recognizing
+that the royal authority had been trampled under foot and outraged--and
+the more so, that some persons who promptly came to him for absolution
+were required to swear upon the holy gospels that they would never
+aid in the banishment, exile, or imprisonment of an ecclesiastic, even
+though this be ordered by the king himself, in person. Thereupon, they
+frankly declared that they would not take such an oath, and returned
+to their homes, scandalized at such a reply. Those who most resented
+this stroke were the auditors, especially as, on the following day,
+when their platform was already placed in the cathedral, and all
+had resolved to go there, the archbishop sent them a message that
+they should suspend their attendance there for a time, until these
+affairs were adjusted. Thereupon, coram omni populo [i.e., "in the
+presence of all the people"] who had gathered to see what was going on,
+the platform was removed [from the cathedral]. The auditors keenly
+resented this; but since they are to blame in having done what they
+could not be forced to do, let them pay the penalty.
+
+The governor astonished at a thing so unexpected, again questioned
+the religious orders, in the strictest manner, on various points; the
+principal of these was in regard to the royal ministers [comision],
+whether or not they had incurred censure by having acted according
+to the laws of his Majesty--which was the same as inquiring whether
+the said laws were just or unjust. The Augustinians and Recollects
+evaded answering this. The Franciscans were doubtful; but, learning
+that the Jesuits had answered and publicly declared that now was the
+time to stand by our king and give blood and life for him, and that
+they all would do so in what was not contrary to the law of God, the
+fathers of St. Francis were also encouraged, and they came to the same
+resolution. The Theatins gave notice of their decision to the governor;
+but they told him that sometimes it was necessary to make the occasion
+and whet the blade; and, since now they were drawing the sword, they
+would strike a sure blow and draw blood. Considering the feelings of
+the Audiencia, and its embarrassed condition, they sent one of their
+fathers even to its hall of assembly, to make known their resolution
+to the auditors; those gentlemen were much relieved, and thanked the
+Jesuits for their courtesy. This was made known throughout the city,
+and the people expected that this document would be circulated; but
+it seems that the threat alone was as effectual as the stroke could
+have been. For, at the instance of the governor, his illustrious
+Lordship went to the royal court on the sixth day of December, on
+which was celebrated the fiesta of St. Francis Javier; and, as the
+result of his visit, the session was closed and all [the auditors]
+went to the fiesta, to the great joy of the entire city. We do not
+know what occurred in the session of the Audiencia; [109] only one
+[writer] mentions that its members were absolved, and others state,
+more explicitly, that the absolution was only given in the archbishop's
+mind, and explained by himself with a sort of benediction. It seems
+that, as a result, they put an end to the lawsuits; but, when the
+water stopped falling, it rained pebbles.
+
+On Saturday, December 10, the ecclesiastical cabildo, which had
+governed the see, was notified of all these matters, and that it
+must be regarded as suspended and under censure [110] for having
+accepted the government. At the same time, edicts were posted making
+null all the confessions made to the members of the cabildo or to
+those persons to whom they had given license [to hear confessions],
+and all other things that had been effected by their authority--as
+marriages, [the bestowal of] chaplaincies and curacies, etc. [111]
+These edicts commanded that, under penalty of major excommunication,
+latae sententiae, all [persons concerned] should present themselves
+within six days, with the documents and other papers [in the case];
+[112] thereupon many men who were dissatisfied with their wives, and
+women tired of their husbands, tried to find other spouses who were
+more congenial. The scruples of people regarding their confessions
+may well be imagined; and this, too, when Lent was past. But the
+most astute (although harsh) measure was the command, under the same
+penalty, that no one should speak, assert, or teach anything contrary
+to the tenor of the said edict. The Dominican fathers, moreover,
+even said in the pulpits, when exultant tanquam victores capta preda,
+[113] that there is no person in these islands, except the Dominican
+religious, who has the ability or learning to make a decision in a case
+of morals. Thus the poor prebends are suspended; nor have they any
+recourse, since the royal Audiencia is now disarmed. The archbishop
+proceeded to welcome them with much kindness, telling them that now
+they came to his illustrious Lordship, because they had recourse in
+no other direction--words which have aroused much comment, as being
+insulting to the king and inimical to his royal patronage; and he
+added, that they deserved to be degraded from office and handed over
+to the secular power. Above all, he tried to deprive them of their
+prebends, and to thrust into the cathedral that dealer in fireworks,
+Caraballo, and others of that stamp. The worst is, that he declares
+that they cannot be dispensed from their irregular administration [of
+the see]--nor can appeal be taken to the delegate of his Holiness,
+or to any other--by any bishop of these islands, since all four are
+Dominicans and follow the lead of the archbishop; and all the four
+cities and bishoprics of these islands are entirely unsettled with
+lawsuits and excommunications at every step. No attention is paid to
+the officials of his Majesty, the more discreet of whom acquiesce. It
+is necessary to apply a very exemplary corrective; for they [i.e.,
+the ecclesiastical authorities] have gone to such an extreme that
+to issue royal decrees to them is the same as to throw caps at the
+tarasca. [114] They act with contempt for the royal authority, which
+even the most remote barbarians fear and reverence.
+
+On the first of December was published the residencia of Don Juan de
+Vargas Hurtado; and a fortnight later the city challenged the judge
+of residencia, by saying that it was conducted with fraud, as the
+said judge was bribed. The challenge was admitted, and he named for
+his associate Senor Calderon; as the latter declined, he named Senor
+de Viga, and then Senor Bolivar, both of whom did the same. The judge
+continued to nominate other persons, and all excused themselves. [115]
+As a result, it seems, Don Juan de Vargas was anchored to his island
+[116] for several years. He himself has caused this, since he has not
+the dexterity to apply a curb of silver with the royal arms to Captain
+Quintanilla, the scrivener of the residencia--who still endeavors to
+urge it on, although he does not lead the plot.
+
+A second embassy came from Borney; and General Don Juan de Morales is
+going with the title of ambassador, to establish peace at once. [117]
+They say a Theatin will accompany him, to pave the way for introducing
+the faith into that kingdom.
+
+The commander [of the galleon] for Castilla is Don Francisco
+Zorrilla; the sargento-mayor, Don Bernardo de Andaya; the chief
+pilot, Lazcano. [Here is the list of] alcaldes-mayor: Of Tondo,
+Don Pedro Lozano; of Pampanga, Samaniego; of Bulacan, Armijo; of
+Bay, Don Antonio de Ortega; of Balayan, Don Juan Antonio de Tabara;
+of Tayabas, Captain Conde; of Albay, Captain Ariola; of Pangasinan,
+Arcega; of Ylocos, the former sargento-mayor of Cavite; of Calamianes,
+Don Alonso de Leon; of Mindoro, Prada; of Panay, Don Agustin Crespo;
+of the island of Negros, Captain Adriano; of Caraga, Captain Blas
+Rodriguez. For accountant of his Majesty, Juan del Pozo y Gatica;
+for castellan of Cavite, Don Alonso de Aponte; for sargento-mayor of
+that port, Francisco Sanchez.
+
+Considerable is being done on the galleon in Sorsogon, where the
+"Santelmo" was wrecked; they say that General Don Tomas de Andaya
+will go there for its construction, with title of lieutenant-governor
+and commander-in-chief for Mariveles; he is in high favor with the
+governor.
+
+The bishop of Sinopolis is coming from Cebu, his patience quite
+exhausted with the follies and impertinences of Don Diego de Aguilar,
+who has worn out that unfortunate community with his extravagant
+actions, all originating in his insatiable greed. The ecclesiastical
+ruler of Cagayan is the bishop of Troya.
+
+On the twenty-third of December the members of the cabildo came again
+to cast themselves at the feet of the archbishop; and, after a long
+harangue of misereres and entreaties, he replied to them by asking
+if they were not ashamed to show their faces, and other things of the
+like sort, in the tone of a tercerilla, [118] and then left them. It
+may well be imagined with what joy they must have celebrated the
+Christmas feasts.
+
+The evil genius of the archbishop at present is Fray Juan Ybanez,
+otherwise named de San Domingo; he is the lecturer that was exiled to
+Cagayan. He has made strenuous efforts to deprive the members of the
+chapter of their prebends--regarding which the archbishop had three
+times sent advice to the governor; the latter replied, to the third of
+these communications, that the archbishop should say no more on this
+point, because he would not do what he asked. It is a great pity that
+this gentleman should have meddled by recalling the archbishop from
+banishment, since that act has been the source of the disturbances
+in this unhappy community, troubles which will exist for many years;
+for it cannot be doubted that he has in other respects conducted the
+government well, and with unwearying efforts--especially in what
+concerns the increase of the royal revenues. But he is thoroughly
+repentant for his error, at seeing his hopes of peace frustrated,
+which was the purpose in his decision.
+
+
+
+1685
+
+The prebendaries remained suspended until the fourth Sunday in
+Lent [i.e., March 25], when the [censure for] irregular government
+was removed from them; but for this purpose a conference was first
+summoned by the archbishop. It included the bishop of Sinopolis, the
+superiors and masters of the religious orders--and with them crowded
+in all the swarm of doctors and masters of Santo Tomas, to the no
+little annoyance of the bishop and the religious orders. In this
+conference the question was asked whether the members of the cabildo
+were worthy of being absolved for their irregular acts. All answered
+in the affirmative, except little Master Caraballo; and he said that
+his illustrious Lordship could not grant the dispensation, as these
+were cases that concerned the faith, specifying his declaration in
+the document which was drawn up. The Dominican fathers gave the same
+opinion; but the bishop of Sinopolis replied to them, saying that if
+this were a matter contrary to the faith, as they seemed to imagine,
+they could not discuss it, since that pertained to another tribunal;
+it was finally decided that the absolution should be given to the
+prebendaries. When we were all expecting that this would be done,
+as it ought to be, within the body of the ecclesiastical cabildo,
+the fourth Sunday of Lent having arrived, the archbishop commanded
+that there should be no preaching in any of the churches of this
+city, or in those without the walls; and that all the people should
+repair to the cathedral in the afternoon. He commanded that two seats
+should be made ready there--one outside the church, in order that the
+countless multitude who were present might enjoy this so edifying act;
+and the other at the great altar itself. The altar and the cibary
+were covered with a canopy.
+
+At ten in the morning, he declared the members of the cabildo to be
+excommunicated; and, the facts being as I have already stated above,
+they were now absolved ad reincidentiam, by the bishop of Troya;
+such relapse [reincidencia] had not occurred in any instance, and
+therefore the declaration of the canons was without cause, and only
+directed at a very scandalous paper on the absolution--which was
+performed with great ostentation, in the following manner.
+
+At four in the afternoon, the archbishop being seated on the chair
+which stood outside the holy church, assisted by his provisor, Juan
+Gonzalez, and a racionero, the prebends went to him, and, while they
+knelt there, a judicial record was read to them of all the offenses
+committed--that is, all the enactments made--by them while governing
+the archbishopric; and, while they were there before the public in
+that embarrassing condition, [en calzas y en jubon] [119] the names
+of all those who supported the cabildo, and recognized that body as
+the ecclesiastical ruler, were read. He even published the Theatins,
+on account of an opinion that they gave to the cabildo at the latter's
+request, on the question whether the cabildo could release on bail
+the cantor Herrera from prison--since he did not appear, nor could
+his case be prosecuted, nor was there hope that he would appear soon,
+for it was more than a year and a half that he had spent in prison;
+the Theatins decided this query in the affirmative, saying that the
+cabildo not only could, but ought to, release him. Those who signed
+the paper were the past provincials, Javier Riquelme, former rector of
+San Jose, and Tomas de Andrade, [120] rector of the great college and
+of their university; Fathers Alejo Lopez [121] and Jaime Vestart, at
+present masters in theology; Ysidro Clarete [122] and Pedro Lope. [123]
+Although the matter was so plain, and the paper was signed by so many
+fathers, the archbishop annulled that act, as if he were the supreme
+pontiff of the Church. This is a matter at which the Theatins have
+smiled much, but with a smile that but conceals their annoyance. [124]
+The members of the chapter expressed their detestation of all that
+they had done, and took oath upon the holy gospels that they would not
+again commit such crimes, besides many other oaths that they took,
+which were required from them--oaths very offensive to the king our
+sovereign. Finally, they were absolved as if they were heretics--the
+harshness of the archbishop reaching such a pitch that he wished to
+flog them, and already held in his hand the rattan for doing this;
+but, after many entreaties from their relatives, he refrained from
+carrying out this threat. This inquisitional act being finished, the
+archbishop entered the church with them, and, seated on his chair
+while they stood, he delivered a speech in which he treated them,
+and the religious orders that recognized them as ecclesiastical
+rulers, as if they were heretics--although the Dominican fathers,
+who also had thus recognized them, escaped from this. Those who were
+most offended were the Theatins; and although they are now silent,
+one may be sure that they are gathering up their stones. Thus ended
+this act, which grieved the hearts of all; and on the following
+day the archbishop commanded that they should go to the convent
+of Santo Domingo to sing a mass, as a thanksgiving for such absurd
+performances. It was sung by the treasurer Valencia, assisted by his
+illustrious Lordship; and the sermon was by the father vicar-general,
+Fray Bartolome Marron--who, carried away by his fervent spirit,
+emptied his sack of foolish ideas. Among other things, he declared
+(besides making many threats) that the Order of St. Dominic was the
+sister of the clergy, and in proof of this alleged that his convent
+was ruled by the cathedral clock (although this was a matter generally
+known, and of no great importance).
+
+Don Juan de Vargas was excommunicated, and interdicted from entering
+the church, but he was not posted as such. The archbishop would not
+allow them to go to say mass in his house, without heeding the wretched
+health of his wife, or his having so large a family--and he suffered
+the more hardship, as he remained in his house on the island. [125]
+Besides, when he went out of his house he took with him, as always, his
+trumpeter; this the archbishop could not endure, for it sounded ill to
+the Dominicans. Accordingly, they notified him of an act that he should
+not be accompanied with trumpets, because he was scandalizing those
+who were weak in the faith--although it was a fact that such scandal
+was not presented before either the weak or the great. With this,
+Vargas undertook recourse to the royal Audiencia; and, the document
+being drawn up, he sent it to the governor, with the request that it
+be considered in the session of that court. His Lordship withheld it,
+desiring to settle once for all with the archbishop that he should
+recall the excommunication or interdict; but, this settlement being
+somewhat delayed, his Lordship returned the petition to Don Juan, with
+the message that he must have patience for a few days, while he would
+make every effort (as he did) to secure a settlement; but that, if he
+should not accomplish it in that time, Don Juan should avail himself
+of his right. During the four days, various arguments and letters
+passed between his Lordship and the archbishop; and at the end of
+that time the latter, urged by the diligent efforts of the governor,
+consented to yield, but in the wrong direction; for he threatened
+Don Juan de Vargas with being posted as publicly excommunicated,
+to the great annoyance of his Lordship. Don Juan de Vargas did not
+resort a second time to the royal tribunal; but instead he went to
+the archbishop and demanded absolution. The prelate commanded him to
+go to Father Marron and Father Verart, and ask their pardon, and to
+do what they should order him to do. He did so, and they commanded
+him to go to the provisor on the same errand; and the latter sent him
+to little Caraballo, the dealer in fireworks. All this he fulfilled,
+even to signing a letter for the king, in which he retracted all that
+he had written against the Dominicans; in one word, he signed what they
+placed before him, already written. We all supposed that he would be
+quickly absolved, and he himself demanded this; but answer was made
+to him that his illustrious Lordship would notify him of it, and of
+the time and manner thereof. All this was to give time for the return
+from Cagayan of the bishop of Troya, so that Don Juan should ask his
+pardon and compensate him for the injuries which that prelate judged
+Don Juan had inflicted on him. He came from Cagayan about Holy Week,
+and that time passed without any mention of absolution, until, on Holy
+Saturday, the archbishop going to give the Easter salutations to the
+governor, the latter addressed him very fittingly--telling him that it
+seemed very wrong that at a time when Christ our Lord suffered for men,
+and not only pardoned but even excused those who were tormenting him,
+his Lordship, who stood in the place of Christ, was incriminating Don
+Juan de Vargas, and refusing to pardon him even after he had obeyed,
+in so edifying a manner, all the commands that had been laid upon him,
+although those commands were unjust, and ought not to be obeyed. This
+was the substance of the discourse, which lasted more than an hour;
+and they discussed therein the question of the absolution, with the
+warmth which will be related.
+
+The archbishop summoned an assembly, by means of the document which
+I send you with this, full of contemptuous remarks about the royal
+authority--as the paper itself shows, without further explanation. The
+good old man is obliged to decide with the Troyan and his friars what
+he has to do, and then seek the support of the religious orders. For
+this conference a letter was written to the bishop of Sinopolis,
+and the latter told the fireworks secretary his poor opinion of such
+conferences; that if he must do what was there determined by the
+friars, and if this was to be like the former conference--so many
+black-gowns [negritos] crowding in, and, when one asked a question,
+its stirring up fifteen hundred other things--it was best to cease
+having such assemblies. The bishop remained at home, but sent his
+written opinion that the archbishop ought to absolve Don Juan de
+Vargas, and that privately. The Franciscans and Theatins did not
+attend the conference, nor did they send their opinions--excusing
+themselves by letter, with various pretexts, which did not taste like
+honey to him. The archbishop wrote to the guardian of St. Francis
+an ill-tempered letter, threatening him with vengeance; but the
+guardian was not asleep, nor did he forget the rule of "interrogation
+and reply," etc. At the said conference were present the Troyan,
+the Augustinian and Recollect provincials, and the two Dominicans
+Marron and Verart, the axletrees of the other cart; these last and
+the Troyan said that poor Vargas could not be absolved. Father Duque,
+the Augustinian provincial, declared that he could and ought to be
+absolved, and that privately, saying: "As for the offences of Vargas,
+either they are or are not committed against the faith; if they are
+against the faith, as is being assumed, they do not belong to your
+illustrious Lordship or to us, and it is not allowable to discuss them
+here." Verart sprang to his feet like a flash, and began to argue
+with the Recollect. In such debates the entire afternoon went by,
+without their reaching any decision. At the end of a week the sentence
+was uttered, and Vargas was notified that for four months he must do
+what follows: During the first month, he must go on every feast-day
+to divine worship in the cathedral, clad in the sackcloth robe of
+a penitent, and with a halter round his neck; and in this guise,
+he must listen in public to mass. The second month, he must do the
+same at the convent of San Domingo; the third month, at San Gabriel;
+and the fourth, at Binondo--and this, when it had been decided in the
+conference that he should be "absolved privately," which are the formal
+terms of the sentence! When he was notified of this, he appealed from
+that decree to the court where this matter legally belonged; [126]
+but as all the bishops were Dominicans, where could he go where they
+would not confirm his sentence? Accordingly, Vargas came before the
+royal Audiencia, asking a laymen's decree. [127] His petition was
+considered in the session of that court, and [afterward] shown to
+the fiscal of his Majesty, who [at the time] was absent, inspecting a
+Chinese ship. In this state (which is not one of innocence) the affair
+remains at the time of this writing; but if it shall be decided before
+the ship sails [for Acapulco] I will write further.
+
+I only omitted to state that the first sentence of the archbishop was,
+that Vargas might choose between the punishment above described and
+the following one (which is not to be talked about): He should erect
+in the plaza, at his own expense, a scaffold or stage, and then give
+notice that it was there; and the archbishop would go to absolve
+him thereon. Vargas must go thither naked from the girdle upward,
+wearing yellow hose, and carrying a green candle; and on the stage he
+would be flogged. And in truth he deserved the lash, since, by not
+sending to Espana, as the royal Audiencia decided, the two friars
+who made war on him, he finds himself today in so great affliction,
+which also occasions the royal authority to be insulted as never
+before has been seen in all the [Spanish] realm.
+
+At this same time poor Don Juan de Vargas finds himself in the fray
+of his residencia. [128] For this investigation the governor named,
+as associates of the judge, his Majesty's accountant, Captain Don Juan
+del Pozo Gattica, and Sargento-mayor Lucas Mateo de Urquiza. The secret
+inquiry ended a week ago, but they have not made known the findings
+therein, which are said to be favorable. Only the Dominican fathers,
+in whom he trusted for this emergency, have aided him by contributing
+[a document of] fifty-three sections, regarding his entire life and
+character--many of these concerning the Zambals of Playahonda, whom
+he had assigned to the Dominicans; [129] and the first section goes
+to show that he "lacked the chief qualifications of a knight"--the
+way in which they speak of him. The city, through its attorney,
+made fifty-six charges against him; and among these they demanded
+from him damages for the losses that this community had suffered
+from the return to port of the ship or galleon "Santa Rosa"--because
+instead of ballast they placed in it wax, and for fifteen hundred
+other articles that were included in the lading of the ship. As soon
+as the secret inquiry was ended, Admiral Faura was arrested in the
+fort, and Sargento-mayor Gallardo at the entrance of the bastion;
+and all their goods were seized--but not much of their property was
+found; if there had been, it would have showed that they were fools,
+and certainly they are not of that sort. All agree that six hundred
+thousand pesos would not suffice Don Juan de Vargas for what they
+demand from him. [130]
+
+In Camarines there are great controversies between the bishop and
+the Franciscans, whose commissary, Fray Ysidro de la Madre de Dios,
+made very sarcastic [saladas] remarks to the bishop who, it seems,
+does not relish so much salt. The former acted so that the bishop
+demanded from the royal Audiencia that they should send that friar to
+Espana. It is to be noticed that this good religious is so devout that
+his friars, on account of his modest behavior, call him "the Theatin"
+[i.e., "the Jesuit"]; but seeing himself accused on such a ground,
+he was furiously angry, going so far as to tell the bishop that
+everything was going to destruction since bishops so ignorant as his
+illustrious Lordship were appointed, etc. The royal Audiencia made
+no answer to the bishop's demand, except in general terms; for that
+religious has a well-established reputation, and it is acknowledged
+that he has cause [for what he says].
+
+By a loyal decree the bishop of Troya was notified that he must raise
+the censures that he had laid upon the alcaldes-mayor, the collectors
+[of tribute], and the rest of the officers of justice throughout
+the bishopric of Cagayan. Up to the time of this writing, he has not
+replied; if he shall do so, I will add a note of it.
+
+The royal court soon responded to the petition by Don Juan de Vargas,
+by a royal decree which was sent to the archbishop, to the effect
+that he should absolve Vargas ad reincidentiam, and send them the
+acts. It was doubted whether the governor would sign it, because he
+disliked lawsuits and controversies, and because this was to decide
+the point at issue; but he signed it. The secretary of the court went
+to make the decree known, and the good old man took the document for
+the ceremony of kissing it and placing it on his head--but, placing it
+in his breast, told the secretary that he needed time to reply to it;
+that those gentlemen [of the Audiencia] took their time for planning
+these decrees, and expected that he would reply in haste; and that
+he must send him stamped paper for a reply. The secretary replied
+that he had orders not to leave the royal decree with the bishop,
+and that his illustrious Lordship could answer that he heard it,
+and afterward reply by means of a long letter whatever he chose; but
+the latter was obstinate, [131] and refused to give back the decree,
+and told him to wait for his answer. Since this will be actually made
+by Fray Marron and Fray Verart, it will make much trouble. In fine, he
+has, however, already explained extra-judicially his intention--which
+is, that even if they cut off his head he will not lower a shred
+of sail; and if he posts the governor and auditors on the list of
+excommunicated persons, it will be [not only] what can be demanded,
+but what they deserve. It is expected that the contest will be renewed,
+[132] and affairs point to nothing less.
+
+The archbishop has now replied to the decree, and his answer was
+to send a bunch, or olla podrida, [133] of papers which he calls
+"acts." Regarding the absolution, he says therein that he cannot
+absolve Don Juan de Vargas, since it is a matter which concerns the
+Inquisition. The Audiencia held a session on the first of the month,
+regarding the archbishop's reply; their conclusion has not been
+made public.
+
+A military council was held to deliberate upon the reestablishment
+of [a fort at] Zamboanga, and all voted that this should be
+accomplished. The city was informed of this, as a command of his
+Majesty, in order that the citizens might aid the enterprise; but
+they were of a contrary opinion, for reasons which it is said, are
+frivolous. The truth is, according to report, that they do not like to
+be exiled [there]. The governor demanded the opinion of the Theatins,
+which they gave in accordance with that of the military council,
+very energetically demolishing the reasons adduced by the city. The
+whole matter, it seems, is going before the royal Council. Manila,
+June 8, 1685.
+
+
+
+Occurrences during the term of government of Cruzalaegui
+
+1. With the publication in Manila of the coming of Admiral Don Gabriel
+de Cruzalaegui in the ship "Santa Rosa," to govern these islands,
+was revealed the obligation which he brought from Mejico to restore
+the archbishop.
+
+2. Before the said governor arrived, the bishop of Troya published
+a document with the title, "Advice to those who come newly to these
+islands, that they may not err in judgment regarding the banishment
+of the archbishop." In this writing there were propositions opposed
+to the Audiencia, the cabildo, and the royal decisions.
+
+3. Reply was made to this by an anonymous writer, against whom Fray
+Raimundo Verart came out with drawn sword, issuing a manifesto that
+was full of assertions hostile to the royal jurisdiction and to
+the cabildo.
+
+4. The governor entered Manila on August 24, 1684. There was an
+earthquake on that day, an unusual occurrence for that time; and
+soon after he had passed through the Puerta Real the balcony fell,
+and with it more than one hundred persons--of whom many were injured,
+some died, and others were crippled.
+
+5. The governor soon manifested the partiality that he felt for the
+Dominicans, intriguing with Fray Francisco de Vargas and Fray Juan
+de Ybanez, who had been sent out of the city by the royal Audiencia,
+but had returned to it before the entry of the said governor; he
+did the same with Verart and Marron, who had been banished, but left
+their hiding-places and appeared [in the city] when he entered it.
+
+6. Under cover of the favor which the governor showed to the
+Dominicans, they made impudent speeches in the pulpits against the
+royal Audiencia and the cabildo; and they refused to join them in
+public functions, regarding them as excommunicated. For the same
+reason, they would not go to the procession for the publication of
+the bull, even when they were commanded to do so by the commissary
+of the Crusade.
+
+7. The cabildo rendered account to the governor, in a very learned
+document, of their government during the absence of the archbishop;
+the Audiencia also made him a very suitable report of what they had
+done. But the governor paid no attention to either of the two reports,
+in order to carry his own point, the restitution of the archbishop.
+
+8. The governor endeavored to influence the auditors at his will,
+doing them some favors and making some approaches to them, which
+they, faithful to their king, resisted. Not being able to subdue
+them by this method, he arranged that a demand be contrived by means
+of Don Tomas de Endaya and Don Francisco de Atienza (both of them
+regidors and belonging to his faction), that the city should sign a
+letter of advice to the governor, in which they should represent to
+him the difficulties arising from the banishment of the archbishop,
+and the uneasiness of the people occasioned by their uncertainty as
+to what would be done in regard to the government of the cabildo,
+etc.; and request his Lordship to adopt such measures as should be
+most opportune to put an end to their anxiety. Those of the governor's
+following signed this paper very readily; those who follow the truth,
+reluctantly; and there was one who refused to sign.
+
+9. The governor consulted the religious orders upon this point, and
+upon the excommunications which the Dominicans were [word blotted
+in MS.]. The Society of Jesus excused themselves from responding
+to such a consultation, because they observed the malicious design
+with which it was asked. The Franciscans at first excused themselves,
+but afterward answered in favor of the cabildo. The Augustinians were
+ready to suit the pleasure of the governor, on account of being very
+intimate with the Dominicans; and the same was done by the Recollects,
+who follow the Augustinians in everything.
+
+10. With the said opinions, obtained by pressure, the governor ordered
+that the bishop of Troya should begin to rule the archbishopric, under
+the protection of the governor. This he did, one Sunday, which they
+fixed, October 22; and he was styled governor of the archbishopric, and
+personally went about posting in the churches certain edicts in which
+he summoned the entire cabildo to appear before the ecclesiastical
+court within the next three days, under penalty of being regarded as
+publicly excommunicated, to give satisfaction for having arrogated
+to themselves the government; and on the same day he took away Juan
+Gonzalez, who was a prisoner in his own house, and carried him to
+[the convent of] San Agustin; and to the persons whom he found there
+he intimated that they would have this man as provisor.
+
+11. This so violent mode of proceeding caused much disquiet in the
+community; and if the cabildo, desiring to maintain the peace which
+the bishop of Troya and his friars were disturbing, had not yielded,
+some tumult among the people would have resulted, so great was their
+excitement.
+
+12. The ecclesiastical cabildo repaired to the governor in regard to
+this case, and were coldly received by him. A session of the royal
+Audiencia was held; the fiscal set forth the right of the cabildo,
+and justified their government; but notwithstanding this the governor
+declared himself for the bishop of Troya, and displayed the [written]
+opinions mentioned above, with which he confirmed the former pretension
+of restoring the archbishop.
+
+13. During the four days while the sessions of the Audiencia lasted,
+there were long debates in the palace, and much confusion among the
+people. The governor talked loudly, and expressed opinions that the
+cabildo must not govern. The fiscal stripped off his robe, indignant
+that the royal patronage was not respected. During those days, no
+receptor or court secretary was allowed to enter the session, so that
+no testimony of the proceedings should be taken. The Dominican friars
+[went] in crowds to the palace. Marcos Quintero, who is entirely for
+them, had offered to the governor, it is said, to pay whatever fine
+he might impose for this.
+
+14. [The bishop of] Troya governed the archbishopric in the interval
+before the archbishop was restored to his see. Endaya went on this
+errand with a royal decree, obtained by the utmost violence, and
+given very reluctantly by the auditors, who were afraid, because the
+governor intimidated them by the language he used. He received the
+archbishop with [salvos of] artillery and muster of the troops.
+
+15. The archbishop, instigated by his friars, began to take his
+revenge on November 22 of the same year. He sent notifications to the
+ecclesiastical cabildo, the religious orders, etc., of an act ordering
+that they should not admit into their churches the master-of-camp
+Don Juan de Vargas Hurtado, or the auditors, or many other persons
+and military officers who had a share in his banishment, or in the
+deportation of the Dominican provincial and other friars.
+
+16. The cabildo wrote to the archbishop to inquire whether entrance
+to the church should be denied to the auditors if they came in a body
+as the Audiencia, as they go on communion days [dias de tabla]; and
+he replied that this should be done, in whatever manner they might
+go to church. In consequence of this, the Audiencia did not attend
+at two communion feasts; these were the commemoration of the blessed
+sacrament in the cathedral, and the day of St. Andrew the Apostle.
+
+17. The governor showed a desire to settle with the bishop his
+relations with the Audiencia; and he arranged that on the sixth of
+December all the auditors should be present together in the palace,
+and that the archbishop should come to meet them, as if by chance,
+and talk with them, and thus have a sort of absolution conferred--a
+mummery [mogiganga] by which they could attend that day the feast of
+St. Javier, which was celebrated at the church of the Society of Jesus.
+
+18. All those proscribed in the archbishop's act went to ask for
+absolution; and he commanded them to take oath that they would not
+obey the ministers of the king in matters pertaining to ecclesiastical
+persons. For others, the formula of the oath was, that they must swear
+to observe the sacred canons. This proceeding caused great disquiet
+in the minds of the citizens.
+
+19. Some disturbances led to others. On the ninth of December
+notification was served on the dean and four dignitaries of the
+cabildo, with a canon, that they must be regarded as under censure
+as irregular, for having assumed the government of the church, and
+for having arrested Juan Gonzalez and Don Pablo de Aduna.
+
+20. The cabildo found itself entirely defenseless against the
+manifest anger of the archbishop, without power to appeal either to
+[the ecclesiastical court of] Camarines--since its bishop, the head
+of that court, was of the Dominican faction--or to [the court of]
+Cagayan, since Troya was there; or to the Audiencia, since recourse to
+that body was prohibited, and the governor did not wish to interfere
+with the archbishop.
+
+21. On the same day, the ninth of December, an edict of the
+archbishop was posted in which were annulled the sacraments of
+penance administered by the said prebends, and the licenses which
+they had given for hearing confessions, preaching, etc.; item,
+the marriages solemnized without the permission of his provisor,
+Juan Gonzalez--and they rained down censures, excommunications,
+and threats by the thousand, according to the fury of Father Verart,
+who directed all these. By another edict, dated January 8, all the
+legal causes and suits which had been tried before the cabildo and
+its provisor were declared null and void.
+
+22. The said measures produced innumerable perplexities. Soon
+afterward, the archbishop attempted to deprive the said prebends
+of their appointments; and to this end he held a conference with
+the governor, proposing most unworthy persons in the place of those
+prebends. This proposal was considered in the session of the Audiencia,
+and censured as irregular and out of order; and it went no further.
+
+23. The archbishop issued an act against the trumpet of Don Juan
+de Vargas, commanding that he conduct himself as an excommunicated
+person. Soon afterward (on February 10, 1685), he posted Don Juan
+on all the church doors as publicly excommunicated. The latter had
+recourse to the royal aid, and wrote an excellent document in his
+defense; but the governor did nothing for him, and only commanded
+him to obey the archbishop and be reconciled with him.
+
+24. Seeing himself deprived of recourse, the poor gentleman did all
+that he could to procure a reconciliation with the archbishop and
+the Dominican friars. He was commanded to beg the pardon of all the
+aggrieved parties, even from the most inferior lay brethren; and he did
+this, at the cost of many rebuffs. After this, the archbishop obliged
+him to swear, declare, and attest that when he sent the archbishop in a
+vessel to his exile he had sent him away without supplies of everything
+necessary, although this was manifestly false, for provision was made
+as if for a royal person. Even when he had done what was demanded
+from him, the archbishop would not even take his name from the list
+of excommunicates, such was his hatred for Don Juan. Ab ira et odio
+et mala voluntate monachi dominici libera nos, Domine. [134]
+
+25. The archbishop claimed that the senior auditor, Doctor Don Diego
+Calderon, should [not] be absolved from the censures which, the
+archbishop informed him, he had incurred because of the demand which
+he made, when he was fiscal, against Bishop Palu, [135] who landed in
+these islands, with whom the Dominicans had secret dealings. Calderon
+replied to the archbishop, setting forth the reasons which induced him
+to act as he did with Palu; and for the time the archbishop desisted
+from his intentions.
+
+26. The prebends endured this persecution with incredible
+patience. Again the governor wrote a letter, [endeavoring] to mediate
+in the question of granting a dispensation [to the cabildo] for their
+irregular government, and engaged the bishop of Sinopolis as his
+agent. Ybanez went to the dean to tell him that all would be settled
+according to his satisfaction, but this was nothing but a falsehood
+and invention; for the dispensation [136] was conferred with the
+utmost ignominy for the cabildo and prebends, for the greater glory
+and triumph of the Dominicans, the managers of this scene-shifting.
+
+27. They obliged the prebends to make certain declarations, which
+were fraudulent and misleading, so that it was difficult not to
+blunder in the replies, which were directed by Father Verart, the
+mainspring of all these plots. They made the prebends take an oath;
+the latter consented to this, and submitted to everything, in order
+to extricate themselves from so much annoyance and to be free from
+enemies so powerful and so persistent.
+
+28. The archbishop commanded the prebends to make a statement
+of detestation [of their errors], in which were contained things
+prejudicial and inimical to the royal jurisdiction and prerogatives;
+and others, complimenting the archbishop and his friars and various
+private persons. On the same day a conference had been held in which
+it was asked whether the said prebends were worthy of being dispensed;
+it was decided that they were, because those who were following the
+current with the archbishop were very influential, but those who were
+more judicious and learned thought that there was no reason why the
+said dispensation was necessary. [137]
+
+29. On the following day the archbishop again declared the members of
+the cabildo to be excommunicated, alleging that although the bishop
+of Troya had absolved them, he had done so only ad reincidentiam,
+for such time as the bishop should choose. In the said act he also
+commanded that in the afternoon of the same day they should go to
+the cathedral to receive absolution and dispensation; and on the next
+day they must all go to the church of Santo Domingo, to make amends
+to the friars for imagined injuries.
+
+30. The function of the absolution and dispensation was celebrated with
+the greatest publicity, and in a very marked, offensive, and injurious
+manner. An enormous number of the lower class of people were called in,
+from the neighboring villages--and especially from Binondoc, which is
+a village in charge of the Dominicans; for that purpose, the sermons
+which would occur that afternoon in some churches were suppressed,
+so that all the people could go to see a performance that would so
+exalt the Dominican fathers.
+
+31. The prebends went to the church, ignorant of the measures taken
+for exposing them to ignominy. They found two tribunals erected,
+one at the church door, and the other inside, at the great altar; and
+there was an enormous concourse of people. Of the religious orders,
+the Dominicans were there in great numbers; from the colleges, only
+the members of Santo Thomas [Tomistas]. The archbishop occupied his
+judgment-seat at the door of the church, and at either side were
+his beloved Juan Gonzalez and Aduna. He called the prebends and
+made them kneel before him in order to be absolved, as if they were
+heretics. He handled a ferule while the Miserere lasted, although
+he did not, on account of the entreaties of those who were present,
+strike the capitulars with it. Then he went inside the church,
+and after performing other ceremonies, took his seat on the second
+platform, where he made an address, in which he gave many and sharp
+stabs to those who favored the cause of the cabildo; and after that
+the performance came to an end, with much gossiping among the people,
+who regarded these actions as revengeful.
+
+32. The archbishop prepared a feast in order to regale the prebends,
+quite contrary to his usual manner and harsh temper; the prebends
+attended it unwillingly, seeing that they had been treated like boys,
+and that this banquet was only a device to shut their mouths. He made
+them elect another secretary for that same cabildo's corporation,
+and afterward inflicted punishment on him who was secretary while they
+governed; this was a poor cleric, whom he declared excommunicated and
+suspended, [138] and seized his little property, for having acted
+officially in the proceedings brought against Don Juan Gonzalez by
+the dean as provisor.
+
+33. Troya returned from Cagayan, where he had gone, on the
+pretext of administering confirmations, during the time of these
+transactions. There he deprived of their curacies, and loaded with
+censures, Licentiate Diego de las Navas and Bachelor Diego de Espinosa
+Maranon; and having sent them to Manila, he placed friars in their
+stead. Afterward he imposed excommunications on the alcaldes-mayor and
+collectors of tribute who might buy and sell goods with the Indians
+of those provinces.
+
+34. Don Juan de Vargas, after his name had been on the list of
+excommunicates two months, and he had been interdicted for four months
+from entrance into the churches, solicited absolution, by a petition
+to the archbishop; the latter sent it to Troya, so that he might
+poison it. Troya pushed Don Juan farther toward ruin, and--paying
+no attention to the reasons which the said master-of-camp Vargas
+brought forward as having influenced him to banish the archbishop,
+in behalf of the prerogatives of the king our sovereign--he made
+answer furiously, that Don Juan must be absolved with publicity; and,
+although the governor advised him, the bishop paid no heed to this.
+
+35. At Lent in 1685, the archbishop suspended three fathers of the
+Society, to whom the cabildo while it governed had given permission
+to preach and hear confessions; he did this not only because of the
+aversion which he had taken for the cabildo, but on account of the
+enmity which he had always felt toward the Society. The governor
+compelled two foreign ships to pay very exorbitant imposts, at which
+they were greatly dissatisfied.
+
+36. Don Juan de Vargas was not ready for absolution. The archbishop
+called together the theologians, to tell him whether the absolution
+should be given privately; this was decided in the affirmative by the
+majority of votes, but the Dominicans opposed it. The archbishop,
+in order to defeat the resolution, decreed that Vargas must first
+perform the following penance: During an entire month, he must be
+present in the cathedral, from morning until high mass, clothed in
+sackcloth and in the garb of a penitent, with a halter round his neck;
+and for another month he must, in the same manner, attend the church
+of Santo Domingo; another, the hospital of San Gabriel; and another,
+the church of Binondoc. Then, the said penance being accomplished, he
+would be absolved by Domingo Diaz, a mestizo of infamous character. The
+said Don Juan de Vargas appealed, but the appeal was not allowed him,
+and he remains in the same condition up to the present time.
+
+
+
+Paragraphs of a letter written from Manila, June 15, 1685, by Auditor
+Don Pedro Sebastian de Bolivar y Mena to his agent at Madrid, Don
+Diego Ortiz de Valdes.
+
+In this ship came as governor of these islands Don Gabriel de
+Curuzalegui y Arriola, a knight of excellent abilities, very
+disinterested, and intent on the service of his Majesty--whose royal
+revenues from the department of customs, which were so impaired,
+have been enormously increased, of which he will, I doubt not,
+send statements to the Council. The trouble is, that this place is
+so corrupt that, even though a very good man comes here, with the
+best intentions, people make him fail in his duty. Even if I had not
+had a letter from you for the purpose, he would show indignation
+against me. For, having spoken to the governor at various times,
+and asked if you had hinted anything about me, either personally
+or through Don Tomas, he has replied that such was not the case;
+but this did not happen to Don Diego de Viga, for he carried the
+recommendations of Don Tomas, and therefore has a place in [the
+governor's] affection--although he shows all kindness to me also, and
+I endeavor to serve him as far as I can reasonably. As soon as this
+knight arrived, he made strenuous efforts to secure the restoration
+of the archbishop to his see--for which he made a proposition, or
+offered his opinion, to the royal court, finding occasion for this in
+one which the secular cabildo had offered on the same subject. And,
+although, in the private conferences which he held with each one of us
+upon this matter, it was represented to him that such a solution [of
+the difficulty] was impossible--since account of it had been rendered
+to his Majesty, and the acts therein referred to him; and also since
+the circumstances and facts which had given cause for the archbishop's
+banishment still existed; and that no restitution had been or would
+be made to the royal jurisdiction for the injury that he had done
+it, nor had he offered any betterment in the future--he nevertheless
+insisted that it must be done. And as here there is no [opportunity
+for any] will, save that of a governor, since he is absolute, we all
+had to acquiesce, under compulsion and pressure, in the restitution of
+the archbishop--and not only that, but also in accepting the bishop
+of Troya as governor ad interim until his illustrious Lordship came
+back. As soon as the latter arrived, he began to unsheathe the sword,
+against all the human race; for he declared that all three of us
+auditors had incurred the excommunications imposed by the bull of
+Cena [Domini; i.e., the Lord's Supper] and by the canon, commanding
+that we should not be admitted into the churches. This we reported
+to the governor, and reminded him of the inconveniences which, as we
+had represented to him, would follow from such restitution; and he,
+while acknowledging this, talked of availing himself of extrajudicial
+measures to hinder those that were judicial; consequently we were
+interdicted from the church for several days. At the end of that
+time, he sent to summon me, on an occasion when I was alone in the
+Audiencia, and told me that he had the matter settled; that the act [of
+excommunication] should be recalled--with only [the stipulation] that
+the archbishop should go to the palace at a time when we all were there
+together with his Lordship; and that, the archbishop entering with
+him, we should kiss his hand, and everything would remain settled. I
+informed my associates of this, and all agreed to it, provided that
+the word "absolution" should not be used, because if it were, all
+of us would leave the room; moreover, we supposed that Don Juan de
+Vargas would be included in this act, for, as he had concurred with
+us, as our president, it would be very proper that he should do the
+same as we. I gave this reply to the governor, and he told me that
+as for what concerned Don Juan de Vargas, he had already arranged
+it, and that for this he was responsible. In accordance with this
+[agreement], we assembled at the palace. The archbishop came, and we
+went forward to receive him, making the obeisance due to the prelate;
+with that, the prohibition was recalled, and we remained free to enter
+the churches. But it was continued with Don Juan; and to this day his
+name remains on the list of excommunicated persons. It is intended,
+as I understand, that his absolution shall be made in public, with
+all the ancient ceremonial forms.
+
+He published an act declaring that all persons who had directed
+the cabildo during his absence were under censure as irregular; and
+annulling the marriages celebrated, the licenses given to confessors,
+and the confessions that had been made to them, and whatever else had
+been done during the time of his banishment. The prebends were regarded
+as irregular for more than three months; at the end of that time he
+erected a stage at the main doors of the holy cathedral church, and
+thereon publicly absolved them--having previously published an edict
+that at the said function should assemble all the Indians, Sangleys,
+mestizos, and negroes of the neighboring villages, which occasioned
+astonishing disturbances.
+
+All affairs thus remain as they were, and these vassals are without any
+recourse, since they dare not interpose that plea before the Audiencia,
+as it is so powerless to exercise its functions; consequently, to
+state the case in few words, the archbishop does whatever suits his
+whim, without there being any one to restrain him.
+
+These proceedings keep me in the utmost anxiety, as I fear that so
+unreasonable an act as this restitution will be very ill received in
+the Council, which will lose respect for the authorities here, as the
+matter was pending in that body. Accordingly, and on account of what
+may be carried to Espana, I give you this information, so that you
+may, if opportunity offers, make it known, as I dare not write to the
+Council about it, for my letters may not be sent forward--as happened
+to Don Juan de Vargas, while of the letters that were written against
+him copies were sent to the Council. If this should occur [now], it
+would result in ruining us all. Notwithstanding these difficulties,
+I am on very good terms with the archbishop, so much so that in any
+event, whatever I may do, they will stand up in my favor; and they
+have even gone so far as to tell me that they are writing this year
+to his Majesty, assuring him of my excellent mode of procedure, and
+how incorrect was the information to the contrary. Your Grace will
+inquire at the secretary's office, and let me know whether this is
+really so; for one cannot trust in friars, and, in order that they
+may not imagine that I distrust them, I have not asked them for the
+letter, in order to send [a copy of it to you].
+
+The viceroy of Nueva Espana having appointed, in accordance with the
+permission given him by the Council, Don Juan de Zalaeta, the castellan
+of Acapulco, as judge of residencia for Don Juan de Vargas, he came
+here and presented all his credentials in the royal court--where,
+without any contention, it was ordered that they be put into force
+and carried out. Among the despatches came a royal decree forbidding
+this royal Audiencia from taking cognizance of anything belonging to
+the said residencia; but, this being granted, twelve days after its
+publication the said judge was challenged by the city on account of the
+entire case. As he had not been declared to be judge for that, but only
+an associate, the city hastened to the Audiencia in order that this
+court might declare the said judge to be thus challenged. Among other
+reasons that the city alleged for this proceeding was the statement
+that in the port of Acapulco, the viceroy having commissioned the said
+judge to seize the bales and merchandise which were going in the ships
+on account of the said Don Juan de Vargas and his servants and friends,
+the judge had not carried out the said seizure, on account of fifty
+thousand pesos which they had given him. Although it is certain that
+the reasons adduced were very forcible, the Audiencia, recognizing
+the force of the inhibitory decree, declared that they could not
+intermeddle by giving a decision on the said challenge; and that
+the governor should appoint associates [adjuntos] for him, in order
+that they might continue the said residencia with the said judge;
+and that the original documents connected with the said challenge
+should be sent to the Council. Although the residencia was prosecuted,
+the charges [against Vargas] have not yet been published. It seems to
+me that it is being settled very conformably to justice, although the
+proceedings cannot fail to show many defects on account of the judge's
+inexperience; for he is not a learned man, and here the lawyers are
+very few, and the conduct of [such] a case is exceedingly difficult.
+
+As soon as the city brought forward in the court the challenge against
+the judge, Don Juan de Vargas challenged all three of us auditors; and
+in the course of the proceedings I introduced a document acknowledging
+myself as challenged; [I did this] not only on account of what Don
+Juan de Vargas had done for me, but because it was a brother-in-law
+of mine who was under residencia, and his advocate also bore that
+relation to me. They must have had good reasons for not regarding me as
+challenged, and so I had to vote. I give you information of all this,
+in order that if any reparation be proposed there, it may be in this;
+for I judge that the points and articles of this residencia will
+cause the utmost embarrassment in the Council, and that it will be
+necessary to command that it be taken again. I give thanks to our Lord
+that it has not reached me; for it would cause me the utmost injury
+and perplexity--partly on account of his wrong acts, partly because
+those who had written unpleasant letters to the Council now turn tail,
+and explain nothing. This, it may be, is attributed to the judge, who
+is not to blame--for here there are only false witnesses, now on one
+side and now on the other; and you will confirm this information by
+what goes there, which you will not fail to know. For it seems to me
+that in all the lands discovered [by Spaniards] there is no country
+like this, or where its inhabitants are so inconstant. Accordingly,
+I assert that here neither friendship nor enmity is permanent;
+for if now, for example, some persons are my enemies, and on that
+account my actions are pointed out in the Council, when [the news
+of] my vindication--through this or that accident--comes from there
+we become reconciled, and eat, as they say, from one plate; and the
+same on the other side. It is useless, therefore, to take notice of
+anything in this little edition of hell [abreviado infierno].
+
+I have no other request or greater desire than to leave this place; and
+although (for since I arrived in these islands I have written to you
+at every opportunity) I have sufficiently wearied you regarding this,
+I cannot cease continuing [my efforts to go away]--without urging any
+fixed and assigned place, or where or how it shall be accomplished. For
+every day, Don Diego, I find myself more disconsolate, and I would by
+this time be desperate if I could not trust in the good opinion that
+I have of you; and therefore, hoping for your protection and stationed
+at your feet, I entreat you with the utmost earnestness [for a change
+in my position], without heeding whether or not it be a promotion. For
+me the best promotion will be to go away, wherever it may be; and if
+it cannot be accomplished in this way, [please] endeavor to secure
+for me permission, for such time as may seem proper to the Council,
+to pass over to Nueva Espana, in accordance with what I wrote last
+year, as there was no room for either of these expedients to secure
+my departure. I send a special power of attorney for you to make
+in my name surrender and renunciation of this post, for the causes
+and reasons which I will allege in the Council, either personally
+or by my attorney; I do not do so now, on account of the damage and
+risk which thus may be occasioned to me because I do not desire a
+post in which there is so much corruption as there is in this. And
+more, I would almost rather go to get a living by some petition or
+commission than to be auditor of Filipinas; and this, Don Diego,
+is the truth. Here there is no liberty for anything; there is no
+authority, no respect, and, above all, not an atom of profit. Then,
+what is such a post good for? It is only fit for ruining honor and
+reputation, and for this it is notorious. In case I shall get away
+from here by any of the aforesaid ways, you will ask that a judge of
+residencia may be appointed for me, so that he may take it before I
+shall go; for I do not wish to leave behind these sorrapas. You will
+previously challenge Don Diego de Viga and Don Esteban de la Fuente
+y Alanis; for these two gentlemen, each in his own way, are very
+malicious, and have very little affection for colleagues. I know
+them well, by experience of what they have done to other persons;
+and I do not wish that they do the same to me. It is also necessary
+to obtain for me a royal decree, so that I may not be hindered by
+the governor or any one else, that all the persons in my household,
+and those who came with me to these islands, may return in my company;
+and that I may be assigned a small room for storage of my provisions
+for the voyage. For here it is not the same as in the north, [139]
+where there are general accommodations for the passengers; but each
+one furnishes his own provisions; and, unless a place is assigned
+in which these may go, the transportation charges cost more than one
+thousand pesos; but, as those who ship bales pay for them at the rate
+of twelve and fifteen pesos, they have many advantages [over the rest].
+
+
+Don Pedro Sebastian de Volibar y Mena
+
+
+
+Extract from a letter written by Father Luis Pimentel to Father Manuel
+Rodriguez, procurator-general of Indias, from Manila, February 8, 1686.
+
+Don Juan de Vargas was excommunicated and placed on the public list
+by Archbishop Pardo; he thereupon came before the Audiencia. That
+court demanded that the archbishop show them his acts, which he did
+not do. A royal decree was sent to him; he replied that he could not
+send the act that he had issued against Don Juan de Vargas, since he
+had to send it to a superior tribunal--that is, to the tribunal of the
+Inquisition. The auditors sent him a second decree; he replied that he
+was encumbered with affairs of more importance than those of Don Juan
+de Vargas, and could not make [formal] answer. They sent a third one,
+commanding him to send such answer; he replied that the doings of Don
+Juan de Vargas were public and manifest, so that it was not necessary
+to enact anything against him, and accordingly he had no documents to
+send them. The secretary of the Audiencia notified him of the fourth
+decree, and had orders to read it to the archbishop, but not to give
+it to him, because the three former decrees had remained in his hands
+without his making any answer. The secretary was told, however, that if
+the archbishop should demand a certified copy, he should give him one
+and bring back the royal decree; but the archbishop declared that if
+the decree were not surrendered to him he would not answer it. As he
+did not render obedience to the four decrees, his Majesty commanded,
+by his royal decrees, that the archbishop should be declared banished
+from the kingdoms. The governor went to talk with him, to start him,
+as they say on the road; and it is said that he found him obstinate.
+
+Now follows the fiction that they made arrangements, in order that
+the governor might not consider himself obliged to undo what had been
+done, [140] by recalling the sentence of banishment, and bringing
+the archbishop to Manila. They ordered that all the estates of this
+community should go to entreat the governor that the archbishop
+should not be exiled; and the same persons went on this errand who
+[afterward] bemired themselves in causing the archbishop to return to
+Manila. These men went about talking and declaiming to everyone in the
+community about the great difficulties, both spiritual and temporal,
+which must follow from [the banishment]; but in reality all these were
+fantastical, since there would be no further difficulties than those
+which the governor chose--as there were none when the archbishop was
+banished the previous time; [141] for one would hardly believe how
+great is the hatred that most persons feel toward the archbishop and
+his officials, and to the Dominican friars. The Order of St. Francis
+was remiss in making this request, but an auditor brought them to
+terms, as well as the members of the cabildos, both ecclesiastical
+and secular. The most difficult thing was to subdue the Jesuits. A
+bishop who was a great friend of ours charged himself with this task,
+and easily persuaded the vice-provincial and the consultors; but I
+always have been of opinion that we ought to pursue an even course--for
+I immediately saw the trick, and that he was setting a trap for us,
+as actually happened. Finally the vice-provincial and another father
+went, because I excused myself from going in company with the other
+orders. With them went Don Fray Juan Duran, a religious of the Order
+of Mercy and bishop of Sinopolis; it was he who in the name of all the
+orders made the address, setting forth the serious difficulties that
+must ensue in spiritual and temporal affairs. This petition being
+ended, the snare began; the governor told them to draw up a paper
+in which they were to set forth the causes that led them to make the
+request, and that all the orders should sign it--which converted the
+petition into advice, and he did the same with the other estates,
+even with the military leaders.
+
+The [preparation of the] paper which the orders were to sign was
+entrusted to one of the bemired ones, the provincial of the Augustinian
+Recollects; but what he wrote was so unsatisfactory that even the
+bishop of Sinopolis--who was active in carrying on this affair for the
+governor, on account of being his intimate friend--did not like it;
+and the bishop himself therefore drew up the paper, which was signed
+by all the orders except the Society. Ours preferred to make its own
+answer, separately; we did so, and I send [a copy of it] with this.
+
+
+
+
+News since the year 1688
+
+1. It is asked that the contents of this document may be read
+attentively; the writer asserts that it is not his intention that
+corporal injury shall come to the guilty, but only that the truth
+may be known and these many evils be set forth.
+
+2. Early in January of the said year, very secret conferences were
+held in the palace, in which Bobadilla, Atienza, and Cervantes took
+part--all opposed to the auditors, to Zalaeta and Lezama, and to Don
+Juan de Vargas. They began to favor the designs of the archbishop, and
+the governor to act despotically, according to the dictation of Verart.
+
+3. The result of the said conferences was the imprisonment of
+Zalaeta and Lezama, on the twenty-second of January. Their property
+was sequestered, and with great cruelty their papers were seized;
+and they were very closely confined in the fort. He [142] asked for
+a confessor from the Society, but the governor would not grant this,
+only consenting that he might confess to one of three fathers whom he
+designated; these were Juan Gonzalez, Don Esteban Olmedo--adherents
+of himself and the Dominicans--and Doctor Atienza, brother of the
+Atienza already named.
+
+4. Toledo denounced Don Juan Zalaeta, saying that he gave him a
+pasquinade so that he could publish it, which was of the following
+tenor: The governor was seated on a chair, with his favorites Endaya
+and Verart at his side; at his feet lay the king, his head cut off,
+and his hands disjointed. This picture explains the state of affairs,
+which is expressed by the verses that appear below. [143]
+
+5. The cause of Lezama's imprisonment was a paper which they attributed
+to him, although it was not known with certainty that he had written
+it; and both tribunals proceeded against him--the government with
+imprisonment and sequestration, the archbishop with censures; the
+two powers agreed very well.
+
+6. Guards were placed in the house of Lezama, from which resulted some
+extravagant remarks by Dona Josefa, the wife of Bolivar; and these set
+in motion what will be hereafter related. The wife of Lezama presented
+a document to the governor, asking for what reason her husband had
+been imprisoned; he sent the paper to an alcalde-in-ordinary. The said
+wife had recourse to the Audiencia, who commanded the said alcalde
+to deliver up the documents under penalty of five hundred pesos, but
+he resorted to the governor, who forbade him to obey, and imposed a
+penalty of two thousand pesos if he should surrender the documents.
+
+7. On the same day the governor summoned the auditors to a session and
+conference, and with language of anger and rage informed them that
+the alcalde was proceeding by his orders in the said imprisonments,
+and ever, that they were involved in the same charges. At this they
+were struck with great fear, with good reason dreading the governor's
+outrageous manner of proceeding; and to this fear that some calamity
+would happen to them also were added the reports that were current
+of the dungeons that were being prepared, of various persons whom he
+was arresting and examining, etc.
+
+8. The auditors, now terrorized, secretly retired one night to the
+college of the Society of Jesus, and carried with them the fiscal,
+in order to consult as to the measures of which they should avail
+themselves to secure their persons from the tyranny of the governor,
+and whether they should remain in the said college in order to
+administer justice from that place, etc. They could not reach a
+decision in the matter, and with the same secrecy they returned to
+their houses; and afterward the fiscal sold them.
+
+9. The reasons for the governor's hatred against Don Diego de
+Viga were: his having proposed that the ship which served for the
+armada should make a voyage in the year 1686, which was contrary to
+the governor's purposes; and his proposal in the Audiencia that a
+consultation should be held with the governor in regard to a packet
+of letters from the king which were said to have arrived, in which
+there were decisions of the utmost importance--which letters, it is
+supposed, the governor tried to hold back and conceal.
+
+10. He entertained ill-will against Bolivar for having replied
+with independence and decision to an act of which he was notified
+on the part of the bishop, in which he threatened the auditor with
+fearful excommunications and pecuniary fine, because the said auditor
+protected the interests of the royal patronage in the suit which the
+Augustinians brought against the Society in regard to the village
+of Jesus de la Pena, and challenged the jurisdiction of the said
+archbishop in this case.
+
+11. The governor [144] set spies on the steps and actions of the
+auditors, and seized a bit of paper, without signature, which
+Bolivar was sending to Viga, in which he informed the latter that
+they could not trust the fiscal, who had that very day taken dinner
+with the governor; and that he presumed the fiscal had betrayed them,
+disclosing their consultation above mentioned.
+
+12. The governor conjured from this bit of paper many mysteries;
+he arrested the page who carried it, and commanded that the fiscal
+be summoned. He planned the exile of the auditors, with the seizure
+of their property and papers--in all of which meddled Cervantes,
+who was an enemy of the royal Audiencia, and known as such; and now
+was elevated to be the favorite of the governor by the favor of the
+Dominicans, in order to be judge in the most important lawsuits of
+this commonwealth.
+
+13. On February 7 of the said year, the day following the above
+incident, they seized Don Diego de Viga, and conveyed him to
+Mariveles, a village in charge of the Dominicans, where he stayed in
+a mean hut. From that place he went to Lucban, a village belonging
+to the same friars, where he remained in close confinement and
+lacking the necessary comforts; they allowed him not even an
+Indian servant who had remained with him. All this severity was
+practiced on him, notwithstanding that (as was notorious) the said
+auditor was so burdened with sickness and infirmities that in the
+judgment of intelligent persons he could not hold out three months in
+Lucban. The commandant shamefully treated a brother of the Society,
+who accidentally passed through that place, because he gave the said
+auditor a little linen and some paper, which the prisoner entreated
+for the love of God--which it is said, was taken from him and sent
+to the governor; and that sacrilegious man even had the brother sent
+there a prisoner and in fetters.
+
+14. On the same day and the following one, they searched for Bolivar in
+various houses; for, when he learned what was being plotted against
+them, he had concealed himself. They surrounded his house, with
+a large force of soldiers; and because Dona Josefa and her sister
+spoke some saucy words, in regard to certain questions that were
+asked them, they were banished with much severity, and conveyed to
+the village of Abucay, a village in charge of the Dominicans. [145]
+Dona Josefa was sent first, and afterward her sister Dona Ynes, on
+account of the latter being very ill when they carried away her sister.
+
+15. The governor learned that Don Pedro Bolivar was in the college
+of the Society of Jesus, and availed himself of his good friend
+the archbishop to remove the auditor from sanctuary. The archbishop
+readily assented to whatever he demanded; indeed, he has left no stone
+unturned to injure the Society of Jesus. They surrounded the college
+of the Society with a great number of soldiers, within and without,
+who caused the religious incredible vexations and troubles during the
+nine days while this blockade lasted. The [archbishop's] provisor was
+on hand to incite the soldiers and make mischief; and he notified the
+rector of an act by the archbishop requiring him to surrender Bolivar.
+
+16. The city and all the religious orders, except that of St. Dominic,
+showed great resentment at this performance and felt exceedingly
+scandalized. The governor, as obstinate as Pharaoh, said that he would
+not remove the blockade from the Society's house until Bolivar should
+make his appearance, if it lasted a year; and that he intended to
+destroy the auditor. The latter, seeing the constraint and uneasiness
+of the religious, and the obstinacy of the governor and the archbishop,
+gave himself up of his own accord; and they took him away from
+sanctuary in great haste, and carried him to the municipal building;
+and afterward, near midnight, he was sent by boat to Mariveles,
+with the same harshness which they had showed to Auditor Viga.
+
+17. The convenient pretext and imaginary reasons which they gave
+for these seizures were that those auditors intended to depose the
+governor, and hand over his office to General Zalaeta. It was proved
+that this plan would not suit the actual condition of affairs, even
+in the judgment of a man of mediocre ability, much less in that of
+the auditors; and even if such a thing were intended, they would
+find it impossible to secure the means for its execution, since all
+the military leaders were of the governor's faction and opposed to
+the auditors.
+
+18. Crafty actions, intrigues, seizures, and severities were employed
+with persons of various stations, in order to give some semblance of
+proof to the above fantastic idea; and they terrorized many persons
+to make them relate, if possible, what suited their purpose, and no
+more. Some they tortured; others were left without food for two or
+three days, and one they deprived of drink for seventeen days. Most of
+the persons thus examined had little courage, and were sons of fear,
+so they found it easy to tell lies; and if they were under compulsion
+they would say that Judas and Mahoma were in heaven.
+
+19. The governor soon found himself embarrassed by the lack of an
+Audiencia; he therefore formed one in his own way, which was thoroughly
+accommodated to his opinions. It was composed thus: a fiscal so
+terrified and possessed by fear that, if he were commanded to flog
+an image of Christ, apparently he would not hesitate to do so; one
+Cervantes, as coadjutor to the fiscal, a young fellow of malicious
+disposition and perverse inclinations, who not many years before
+had been condemned to death; one Angulo, in everything a man after
+Cervantes's own heart--young and of little understanding; and of so
+little ability that neither when he was a receptor of the Audiencia,
+nor now when filling the office of attorney-general [promotor-fiscal],
+did he know what to do, etc.
+
+20. Among the papers of Zalaeta was found one which was imputed to the
+cantor Herrera, in which he spoke ill of Endaya; and on this account
+the archbishop demanded aid from the governor, seized Herrera, [146]
+and placed him in the fort--treating him with ignominy unusual for
+[a member of] the cabildo, placing him under the guard of secular
+officials, and treating him like a highwayman. Yet the said archbishop
+had previously favored him, and regarded lightly other offenses of
+his--for no other reason than because Herrera had, to please the
+archbishop and his friars, drawn up documents expressing in positive
+terms, detestation of appeals to the royal Audiencia.
+
+21. With these scandals and harsh measures, the city experienced
+profound affliction; the minds of the people were appalled, and
+they were so shut in by fears and terrors that no one considered
+himself safe even in his own house. No one opened his lips, seeing
+the two powers of the commonwealth thus jumbled together, and that
+in the greatest calamities there was no recourse except to God. The
+inhabitants could not communicate with one another, without criticism;
+nor was it even lawful to breathe, since rigorous scrutiny was made
+of the most trifling acts.
+
+22. Great were the calamities which at this time came unexpectedly
+upon this commonwealth--epidemics, famines, vessels returning to
+port, [attacks by] enemies, losses of vessels. The governor the more
+pretended that his conduct was influenced by an imaginary conspiracy;
+for on the night of Holy Thursday, when he went to visit the stations
+[of the cross], a multitude of soldiers went with him as escort,
+besides his usual guard, and he was accompanied by the personages
+who were in league with him.
+
+23. Royal decrees were despatched against the preachers who zealously
+proclaimed from the pulpits the arbitrary and malicious character
+of the recent acts, and the Dominicans alone had the privilege to
+utter whatever absurdities they pleased in the pulpits. There is no
+counterpart to the satire against the Society which a [father from]
+Santo Tomas preached one day.
+
+24. Recourse to the royal Audiencia was entirely barred, as was seen
+in the case of Don Juan de Vargas, who thus far had been posted on
+the list of excommunicates, and all persons who held intercourse
+with him threatened with punishment. Tardiness and delay followed
+him until the fourth decree [was issued] in regard to his absolution,
+and it had no result--as little carried out as was the king's decree
+which he issued in regard to the banishment of the archbishop.
+
+25. In Cagayan Fray Raimundo de Rosa killed Fray Juan Zambrano, his
+vicar and superior; but the archbishop has not made any demonstration
+[of displeasure], although he has so often done so in the more venial
+offenses of the clerics. The Order of St. Dominic has honored the
+Dominicans who were most rebellious against the king with the best
+offices in the provincial chapter; and those of their following, like
+Aduna, Gonzalez, Carballo, Cervantes, and others, are now in high
+favor, although they are hostile to the prerogatives of his Majesty.
+
+26. No authentic statement of the evil deeds of these years can be
+sent to the court; for the scriveners are intimidated and will not give
+official statements of anything of what occurs, except what may be in
+favor of the governor and the archbishop. Item, [this] is written in
+much distrust and fear, on account of the numerous spies who go about
+prying into and noting everything that is done. One notary is in prison
+on account of a statement that he drew up; and another is in exile.
+
+27. The governor causes many scandals in the matter of chastity,
+not sparing any woman, whatever may be her rank or condition; and he
+keeps some worthless women who serve as procuresses for conveying to
+him those whose society will give him most pleasure. In this scandal
+the zeal of neither the archbishop nor his friars is active.
+
+28. The governor will hinder the voyage of the ship to Nueva Espana,
+on account of the fabulous ships which, it is reported, have been
+seen, according to the statement of an Indian, although there is no
+confirmation of such news. The great amount that was spent in the
+despatch of the armada, as the capitana of which the ship "Santo Nino"
+sailed, without having the desired result; the malicious purpose with
+which the said despatch was conducted, on account of his having had
+information by way of Yndia which caused this government to hasten.
+
+29. As the archbishop would not absolve Don Juan de Vargas, the
+Audiencia again decided to banish him; but the governor kept the
+royal decree signed and sealed, without being willing that it be put
+into execution. Instead, he joined with the bishop of Sinopolis to
+convoke the religious orders, planning that they demand that he be
+not banished. An inquiry was made among his partisans, who swore that
+they knew nothing of it, and had not imagined it.
+
+30. The archbishop prevented the confirmation of three prebends which
+his Majesty had presented--to Don Francisco Gutierrez Briceno,
+Bachelor Domingo de Valencia, and Doctor Pedro de Silva; the
+first-named for cantor, the second for schoolmaster, the third for
+treasurer. He refused to give them canonical installation, because
+they are not among his admirers; and the last two are graduates from
+the university of the Society of Jesus.
+
+31. The Augustinians, in alliance with the archbishop and his friars,
+brought suit against the Society in regard to the administration
+of Jesus de la Pena, or Mariquina. The numerous disputes [dares et
+tomares] which have occurred in this lawsuit, and the great eagerness
+with which the archbishop has tried to favor the Augustinians;
+and finally, against all the right that the Society had to such
+ministry--by royal decree, by permission from Senor Arce, and by permit
+of the vice-patron, etc.--he has despoiled them of it with violence,
+and by the aid which the governor allowed him for tearing down and
+demolishing the church of the said fathers; and he has adjudged it
+to the Augustinians, because the hatred and aversion which he has to
+the said order [of the Jesuits] is implacable.
+
+32. The archbishop mortified the religious of St. Francis; on account
+of regarding them as favorable to the royal patronage, he forbade them
+[to celebrate] the feast of the tears of that saint, and he has not
+granted them many permissions which they asked from him. He deprived
+them of the celebration of the feast of the Conception in the jail; and
+finally, on the day of St. Stephen the protomartyr, he gave them his
+congratulations on that feast by causing to be read an edict against
+them, in which he suspended their licenses to hear confessions and
+preach. All this caused great uneasiness in the minds of the people,
+and gave just cause for the murmur against the said archbishop that
+he had, by the measures here related, undertaken to revenge himself
+on all those persons who, as he fancied, had taken part in his exile,
+or had in any way approved it.
+
+33. They attempt to absolve Auditor Calderon in the hour of death in
+what he replied, and what the Dominicans did, and how the governor
+pretended not to notice it. It seems as if the governor had come to
+the islands for nothing else than to encourage the Dominicans in their
+rebellious acts, to trample on the laws, to abolish recourse to the
+royal Audiencia, to sow dissension, to be a tyrant, to disturb the
+peace, and to enable the archbishop to secure whatever he wishes, even
+though he imposes so grievous a captivity on the commonwealth. [147]
+
+
+
+Felipe Pardo as archbishop
+
+[The Dominican side of this controversy is related by Salazar, one of
+the official historians of that order, in his Hist. Sant. Rosario,
+pp. 490-513 (chapters xviii-xxi); as this account is long, it is
+presented here partly in full translation, partly in synopsis.]
+
+On the fourth day of August in the year 1677, dedicated to our
+glorious patriarch St. Dominic, a royal decree was received in
+Manila in which our Catholic monarch Don Carlos II appointed for
+archbishop of Manila father Fray Felipe Pardo--who that year had
+completed his second provincialate and now was filling the post of
+commissary of the Holy Office. In the latter office he had given,
+before this second provincialate, such proofs of good judgment that
+report of his abilities had reached Madrid; and these alone, without
+any other backing, had procured for him so high a dignity. The
+choice of him [as bishop] was received in this community with
+universal acclamation and applause, on account of the esteem that
+was merited by his abilities, accredited by the experience that all
+had of his success and discretion in government--not only in the two
+provincialates which he had obtained, but also, as I have indicated, in
+the commissariat of the Inquisition; all therefore confidently expected
+in him a prelate discreet and accomplished in all respects. Our
+father Fray Felipe Pardo alone, distrustful of his suitability for
+that office--either on account of his sixty-seven years of age, or
+in view of the difficulty of the task--was greatly perplexed about
+accepting it. Indeed, it was necessary at the end of two months, to
+make requisition on him, in accordance with the rules established by
+the councils regarding immediate acceptance by those thus appointed,
+under penalty of the appointment being annulled, and the see being
+again declared vacant. [He finally accepts (November 11 of that year)
+the dignity of archbishop, and by special decree of the king enters
+on his duties before being consecrated (which occurs on October 28,
+1681), "the first archbishop who has governed this archbishopric
+without being consecrated, and the first who has been consecrated in
+these islands." Having spent thirty years in that country, he has
+much knowledge of it and of its moral and social conditions, and
+much experience in ecclesiastical government. "He was very learned
+in theology, whether speculative or practical, moral or scholastic;
+and very expert in the despatch of business." He is aided in his
+duties by Fray Raymundo Berart, very learned in canon and civil law,
+who has left great opportunities of advancement in Espana "to come to
+this poor province, to serve in the ministry of souls--as he actually
+learned the Tagal language, and spent some time in ministering to
+the Indians in the district of Batan."]
+
+The church of this archbishopric was in great need of reform, being
+full of pernicious abuses, which had been introduced by vicious
+practices, shielded by permitted usage; so that now these alleged
+right of possession, and that which was public and practiced by many
+was regarded as lawful and allowable. False oaths were regarded, not
+heeding this despite to the holy name of God, as a matter of kindness,
+in exchange for not injuring another person by the denunciation of
+his sins; and the oath which the judges take not to engage in trade
+was regularly broken, without there being any one who had scruples
+in doing so. The friendships and intimacies between the two sexes
+were so prevalent that the excessive familiarity which was causing
+so many scandals was already no occasion for them [i.e., in public
+opinion]. Executorships were hereditary, despoiling minors of their
+property, and never rendering accounts [of those trusts]. Trading had
+found its way among the ecclesiastics, notwithstanding the ordinance
+[constitucion] of Clement IX recently published in these islands; and
+at like pace all the vices gained sway, without the least scruple or
+reparation, since established practice and custom had now rendered
+those vices tolerated. [To remedy these evils, the archbishop
+vigorously devotes his energies, notwithstanding his age.]
+
+The first action with which his illustrious Lordship began to carry
+out this plan in the government of his archbishopric was, to reconcile
+his cabildo with the royal Audiencia in a certain controversy between
+them. This was, whether they should give the gospel to be kissed,
+not only by the auditor who then provisionally held the government
+of these islands (he was Don Francisco Mansilla), but also by his
+associate, Doctor Don Diego Calderon. As soon as the archbishop began
+to rule, he settled this dispute with great sagacity, and much to the
+satisfaction of both sides. Afterward another strife arose between
+the ecclesiastical estate and the royal officials, because, at the
+time of paying the former their stipends, these were curtailed on
+account of the exemption from the mesada which had been conceded
+by his Holiness to our Catholic king; and, the amount of what the
+ecclesiastics ought to contribute on account of this privilege not
+being liquidated, the official royal judges had acted illegally in
+the collection of the said mesada, making themselves judges in their
+own cause by explaining the bull of his Holiness without consenting
+to show it to the interested parties, although the latter had several
+times demanded this. But our archbishop, recognizing that what the
+royal officials were collecting was excessive, and that it belonged
+to his office and dignity to explain the doubts that might arise in
+the text of the apostolic bulls, compelled the royal official judges,
+by dint of monitory decrees and censures, to display that privilege;
+and when it was seen, it was found that they had collected more than
+they should for several years past. All this he made them restore,
+with considerable advantage to the ecclesiastics, who were extremely
+grateful for the zealous activity of his illustrious Lordship.
+
+In almost all the Indias were being celebrated the masses which
+they call "masses for Christmas," [148] mingling with them certain
+abuses which contaminated these masses with practices that were
+superstitious, and contrary to the holy rites of the church. These
+were tolerated under the cloak of devotion, and, although to some
+they appeared mischievous, they did not dare to rebuke these rites
+in public lest they excite against themselves the pious feelings of
+the common people, and as this matter was one of those which belong
+to the zeal and foresight of the ecclesiastical superiors. Finally
+the holy Congregation of Rites, in consequence of the representations
+made by zealous persons, on January 16 in the year 1677 declared the
+said "masses for Christmas" to be not only opposed to the rubrics,
+but also cause for scandals, and of superstitious nature, on account
+of certain ballads that were interwoven with them, and other like
+abuses. This decree of the Congregation arrived in these islands
+in the year eighty; acting in conformity thereto, the archbishop
+prohibited the said masses in his archbishopric. They were no longer
+celebrated while his illustrious Lordship lived, although afterward
+they were again established, but with some abatement--I know not
+whether it was so everywhere--of the abuses which formerly were
+customary. He also prohibited under severe penalties the practice
+of bringing sick persons to the church to receive holy communion
+by way of viaticum--a custom introduced into these islands from
+the infancy of their Christian faith. It had never been entirely
+uprooted, although ordinances against it had been issued by various
+zealous prelates in their decrees, and by our Catholic monarchs in
+their royal cedulas--commanding that the holy viaticum should be
+carried to the houses of the sick, even though they were poor and
+of low estate, as are the natives of these islands. And because the
+previous ordinances of the king our sovereign on this subject had not
+had the desired effect, his Majesty again repeated his commands in a
+royal decree of July 28, 1681, in which he charged our archbishop to
+banish this abuse, the custom of carrying the sick to the church to
+receive the holy viaticum, on account of the difficulties which might
+follow from it. In accordance with this, our archbishop promulgated
+an edict throughout his diocese, dated September 5, 1682, commanding
+that all the parish priests should carry the viaticum to the sick,
+without permitting them to be brought to the church; and although
+he received from the parish priests entreaties and arguments on
+this point, his illustrious Lordship did not listen to them, but
+courageously proceeded in his holy undertaking.
+
+Besides those exceedingly just measures, at the instance of the royal
+Audiencia of these islands his illustrious Lordship promulgated an
+edict--which was affixed to the doors of the churches, with penalty
+of major excommunication--that all executors of wills must within two
+months present before his tribunal the said wills, which had not been
+inspected for fourteen years past; and so numerous were those that
+were presented--not to mention others dating back to forgotten times,
+which were not yet accomplished--that they gave him work sufficient
+for several years. He issued other edicts and monitory decrees in
+regard to the denunciation of various crimes, and so many of these
+were continually disclosed that soon the ecclesiastical tribunal was
+tilled with cases, and the numerous officials in its employ could not
+make room for the legal proceedings therein. Very scandalous lives
+were revealed, and criminal suits were begun; but these could not be
+prosecuted on account of appeals and subterfuges which caused delay.
+
+He who attempts to correct abuses and scandals finds it necessary
+to equip himself with courage to meet the hostilities which he will
+encounter; for abuses which have already become inveterate, and
+scandals favored by indulgence, cannot be overcome without strenuous
+efforts and repeated conflicts. Such was the case of a certain prebend
+whom the predecessor of his illustrious Lordship had tried to correct,
+but had never been able to do so on account of the support that the
+delinquent received from a certain potent personage; accordingly the
+archbishop's zeal contented itself with giving information of the
+whole matter to the king our sovereign--who issued on this matter a
+royal decree commanding the said archbishop to correct the scandalous
+acts of that prebend, without fear or regard for any power. As
+this royal decree arrived at Manila when the said archbishop was
+already dead, the king our sovereign despatched another decree to our
+archbishop-elect, Don Fray Felipe Pardo, very earnestly recommending
+to him the correction of the transgressions of the said prebend. [149]
+Notwithstanding the activity of our archbishop, he could not end the
+proceedings in this case for eight years, on account of the evasions
+of the culprit, and the protection that he found in the officials of
+the royal Audiencia, who at every step forbade our archbishop to take
+any further steps in the prosecution of the suits, thus preventing
+his holy zeal from successfully checking abuses and scandals.
+
+This was made more plainly evident in the suit regarding another
+ecclesiastic, the cura of Bigan, against whom the provisor appointed
+by his illustrious Lordship (since the government of that bishopric
+pertained to him) began to institute proceedings in a criminal suit,
+in consequence of various denunciations and accusations. As the
+culprit was on intimate terms with one of the auditors, the latter
+managed the affair so dexterously that he caused the issue of a
+royal decree in which the royal Audiencia commanded the archbishop
+to remove thence [i.e., from Vigan] the said provisor and oblige
+him to reside in the city of Lalo all to the end that he should not
+proceed in the suit. This measure was ineffectual, on account of
+the reply and representations made by the archbishop; the provisor
+therefore proceeded in his suit. The delinquent, finding himself
+in a tight place, fled from Bigan and came to Manila; and, when he
+was arrested by the archbishop for this flight, he demanded to be
+released on bail--which his illustrious Lordship granted, by an act
+in which he designated the city as the prisoner's bounds until his
+suit should be ended. The culprit consented to this, thanking his
+illustrious Lordship for this concession, and therewith submitting to
+his tribunal. Affairs being in this condition, there came [in 1680],
+with proprietary appointment as bishop-elect of Nueva Segovia,
+a prebend of this holy church, who was an intimate friend of the
+culprit; the latter, availing himself of this opportunity, undertook
+to shake off the yoke of his illustrious Lordship's authority with an
+appeal to the new bishop-elect--who, desiring to shelter the other,
+demanded from the archbishop the acts [which he had issued]. As his
+illustrious Lordship did not choose to furnish these--as this suit
+was firmly established, by the consent of the delinquent himself,
+in his metropolitan tribunal--the new bishop had recourse to the
+royal Audiencia, asking them to command the archbishop to deliver the
+acts. In virtue of the representation made by the new bishop, a royal
+decree was despatched to Senor Pardo, in which he was commanded to
+deliver the said acts to the bishop of Nueva Segovia; his illustrious
+Lordship answered this by saying that the suit proceedings therein
+were already established in his own tribunal by the delinquent
+having accepted certain acts, and the law, therefore, afforded no
+occasion for removing this suit and the proceedings therein from
+the tribunal of the metropolitan, and restoring it to the culprit's
+ordinary judge. His illustrious Lordship well knew that all these
+were frivolous measures of delay, so that the case might not reach the
+point of sentence, and the scandals should be left without restraint,
+accordingly, although the second and the third royal decrees on this
+matter were served upon him, he never consented to yield his rights,
+or to acquiesce in the illegal commands laid upon him. For this cause
+the officials of the royal Audiencia issued a fourth royal ordinance
+and decree, condemning our archbishop to exile; this sentence was not
+executed at the time, but with occasion of the new emergencies which
+afterward arose, it was enforced with severity in the following year.
+
+Now that the archbishop was on bad terms with the royal Audiencia,
+it was easy for the subordinates of his illustrious Lordship to
+have recourse to this supreme tribunal in order to challenge the
+jurisdiction or appeal from the proceedings of the ecclesiastical
+judge; and therefore royal decrees were continually emanating,
+forbidding our archbishop to prosecute suits and proceedings, and
+commanding him to deliver up the documents regarding them--by which the
+course of the suits was hindered or delayed. His illustrious Lordship
+answered these requisitions with so much clearness and proof that the
+officials who issued them often considered themselves vanquished, and
+did not follow up their efforts; and although they resented what they
+called rebellion and audacity, they found his opposition so justified
+by law that they did not dare to condemn him for disobedience,
+no matter how much they chose to give his conduct this title to
+outsiders--for these tribunals are not accustomed to hear "no" to
+what they ordain in the name of the king our sovereign. And knowing
+that the greater force of the replies and representations of the
+archbishop depended on the assistance of the consultor, father Fray
+Raymundo Berart, they strove to separate the latter from his side,
+in order that his illustrious Lordship, destitute of this aid, might
+be reduced with more blind submission to the decrees and despatches
+of the royal Audiencia; and therefore that court issued a mandate
+demanding and requiring our archbishop to remove from his side Father
+Berart, and another to the same effect, addressed to our provincial,
+to assign that father to a ministry among the Indians. Suitable reply
+was made to both these decrees, without causing any change, for the
+time, in the aspect of affairs--until, a new occasion and emergency
+arising, they again insisted upon this point.
+
+At the first foundation of Manila, only two parishes were formed for
+the Spaniards--one for those who lived within the walls, and another
+for those who lived outside the city, this latter being located in a
+place where at that time most of them were wont to live. Afterward that
+site appeared to them unsuitable for the conveniences of human life,
+and so they went to live in another part of the city, and even on
+the other side of the river which washes it. Consequently, they lived
+very far from their parish church, and suffered great inconvenience in
+attending it, because it was necessary for the administration of the
+sacraments that the parish priest should cross the entire city, or make
+the circuit of its walls, and finally he had to cross the river. As
+this often had to be done at night, and at other times with the risk
+of being drowned through the fury of the winds and waves, it was soon
+evident how great difficulty there must be in giving prompt aid to
+the sick--especially as the distance of the parish church was so great
+that many parishioners lived half a legua from it. On this account the
+burials also were solemnized with extreme inconvenience, and without
+the processional order which is the custom of the church. Besides
+this, it caused great confusion that the Spaniard who was owner of
+the house should belong to the said parish, and the servants, whether
+Indians or negroes, to that of the territory in which they happened
+to be. The Spaniards also were ashamed of having a parish church so
+poor and in so wretched a condition, for it was only a shelter of
+bamboos covered with nipa. For these reasons the parishioners had at
+various times asked that they might be joined to the parishes in which
+they lived; and now, on the occasion of a controversy which arose
+between the said cura and another parish priest over the question,
+to which of them belonged [the interment of] a deceased person,
+the Spaniards publicly appeared before the ordinary, asking that he
+would assign the parish churches according to the territories, in
+accordance with the custom throughout the church. When this request
+was considered by his illustrious Lordship, he gave information of it,
+and a copy of the petition, to the vice-patron, to whom this matter
+pertained by law. The governor showed this to the fiscal of his
+Majesty, who approved the desired change; and with this decision the
+governor decreed that the parishes should be divided according to the
+territories. He gave commission for this to his illustrious Lordship,
+who divided and allotted the parishes in the suburbs of Manila, with
+the system and order which are observed to this day declaring that to
+each parish church belonged all the persons who dwelt in its territory,
+whether Spaniards, Indians, or negroes.
+
+Notwithstanding that this arrangement was in every way so judicious,
+and had been made by the order of the vice-patron, with the approval
+and advice of the auditor fiscal, the former cura of the Spaniards
+considered it an injury and injustice, casting the blame for it all on
+his illustrious Lordship; and, making common cause with the clergy,
+he continued to disturb and disquiet their minds, until finally
+the cabildo arrogated to itself authority, interposing a letter to
+his illustrious Lordship that was very offensive to his dignity,
+complaining of the severity of his government, in terms that libeled
+his uprightness, and other expressions that were very unbecoming and
+inappropriate to the dignity of a cabildo. Accordingly, for the sake
+of their reputation, his illustrious Lordship was not willing to make
+the document public, and he only showed it privately to the governor
+of these islands--who was deeply irritated at what they had done,
+and promised all his protection to the archbishop for correcting
+his prebends. The archbishop did not choose to avail himself of
+this aid, because he intended to bring them back to sober judgment
+by means of kindness and gentle treatment. He therefore replied to
+his cabildo with another pastoral letter, couched in affectionate
+terms, and full of learning and paternal affection in which he gently
+admonished them to recognize and correct their error. Again they
+wrote to his illustrious Lordship, in more submissive tone, although
+it was apparently only to pay him compliments; for almost on the same
+day they appeared before the royal Audiencia with another document,
+making complaint against their prelate of injuries, and saying that
+although they had represented these to his illustrious Lordship,
+he had not answered them to the point. The effect of this petition
+was, that the royal Audiencia issued new commands, not only to the
+archbishop but to the father provincial of this province, that father
+Fray Raymundo Berart (of whom the cabildo bitterly complained) must
+leave his association with his illustrious Lordship, and depart to the
+ministries among the Indians; this was carried out (at the instance of
+the father himself), in order to wreak the wrath of those who were in
+power. On this occasion the royal Audiencia also ordered that a secret
+investigation be made of the lives and conduct of our religious,
+commencing with the archbishop; and, although a beginning was made
+in the fabrication of this information, the plan soon fell through on
+account of another and public report which was made, by command of the
+archbishop, in favor of the religious--in which their reputation was
+so well vindicated by testimony that those who undertook to blacken
+it through the secret inquiry were left confounded and abashed.
+
+All these occurrences that we have mentioned were preludes and omens
+of some outbreak; for the minds of the people were disquieted, and
+jealousy of the archbishop was plainly evident on the part, not only
+of the clergy, but of the secular government. They were eager for some
+fresh opportunity to arise for them to take extreme measures at once
+against the archbishop, or at least against the religious of this
+province. This soon occurred, in a sermon that was preached in the
+cathedral by a certain religious, [150] in which he explained moral
+principles that were pertinent to the disorders then prevailing. The
+auditors, who were present, began to resent this; and one of them
+urged the governor to send a message to his illustrious Lordship,
+asking him to order the preacher to leave the pulpit. The governor
+did so, in fact: but he himself assumed authority to do this, before
+his illustrious Lordship's answer came, and ordered the preacher to
+stop his sermon, and proceed with mass--an act extremely injurious
+to the dignity of the archbishop, that in his own church, and before
+his eyes, the governor (a secular official, too) should interfere
+to give commands to the ministers of the church. But his illustrious
+Lordship was obliged to overlook this, in order not to cause greater
+disturbances or expose his episcopal dignity to the insults of those
+who had already, it appears, pronounced judgments in defiance of the
+courts of the church, and were only awaiting an opportunity to assail
+his jurisdiction and dignity. His illustrious Lordship did not choose
+to afford this to them, at that time, although zeal stimulated him to
+defend the honor of the mitre; for affairs were now in such condition
+that he would [by doing so] cause more injury than benefit.
+
+Notwithstanding the tolerance and patience of the archbishop, on the
+second day after the sermon sentence was passed in the royal Audiencia,
+in accordance with the representations made by the ecclesiastical
+cabildo, against the preacher, condemning him to imprisonment and to
+banishment from these islands. This was carried out on the following
+day; Villalba was arrested in his convent of Binondoc and conveyed
+through the public streets, being finally placed on board a vessel,
+in which he was sent to a remote island until the time should come
+for embarking him for Nueva Espana. This was accomplished in due time,
+with great injury and hardship to that religious, and not less grief
+to the archbishop at seeing such dreadful disorders, and even his
+zeal powerless to remedy them; for these disturbances had now reached
+such a point, and his subordinates had now become so hard-hearted and
+rebellious, that they had already lost their dread of [committing]
+sacrilegious acts, and did not fear to lay violent hands on the
+persons of ecclesiastics and religious. Accordingly, foreseeing from
+these acts of violence that which might result to his own person if
+some new occasion should arise, his prudence caused him to prepare
+beforehand for what might occur in such an emergency, by an act which
+he drew up with the utmost secrecy, dated on the twenty-second of the
+same month of January in the year 1682. By this act he appointed, for
+any such occasion, as governor of the archbishopric the illustrious
+Don Fray Gines Barrientos, bishop of Troya and his own assistant; and
+made other arrangements--which were mild and reasonable, and worthy of
+his apostolic zeal, piety, and gentleness--that would tend to quiet
+the disturbances which would arise from any such act of violence,
+and to favor absolution from the censures which would necessarily be
+incurred by persons who should commit such acts of irreverence. All
+this was laid away and kept with great secrecy until the following
+year, in which occurred the imprisonment of the archbishop.
+
+These melancholy events did not daunt the fervent courage of his
+illustrious Lordship; rather, with apostolic valor and zeal he
+proceeded in the correction of evil deeds, notwithstanding that he
+had reliable information that his case was already concluded in the
+royal Audiencia and sentence of banishment pronounced against him. He
+was continually menaced with the execution of this sentence, at every
+new difficulty which might arise--in this being like the great pastor
+Jesus Christ, who, the nearer He foresaw His arrest, so much the
+more freely rebuked vices. It is true that our archbishop in order to
+give place to wrath and avoid hostilities, judiciously dissimulated
+in some points which concerned his person or his privileges--for many
+were the incivilities shown to him at every turn by the members of his
+cabildo, who disregarded the customary forms of politeness toward him;
+and again, at critical moments in the controversies which arose between
+the governor and the archbishop, the latter tried to yield what was his
+right, or to overlook the lack of courtesy. But when offenses against
+God, or attacks on his church or his episcopal dignity, came in his
+way, his apostolic zeal did not allow him to overlook these--the
+more, as he was needed by the aggrieved party on account of points
+of justice intervening at the time. And of such character were the
+events which occurred in the course of this year, and were the final
+incentive to the acts of violence committed against his illustrious
+Lordship--his zealous attempt to restrain certain ecclesiastics from
+carrying on trade and traffic, to which they were greatly addicted and
+devoted, in contravention of the pontifical decrees, especially of
+a recent ordinance by Clement IX which prohibited the said commerce
+to ecclesiastics; and likewise his having endeavored to compel an
+executor to render an account of the estate which he had in his charge.
+
+These were the chief motives for the arrest and banishment of our
+archbishop; for, the same persons [i.e., the Jesuits] being concerned
+in both of those incidents, they again disturbed people's minds, and
+stirred them up anew against his illustrious Lordship. Past disputes
+seemed lulled, and affairs had been smoothed over and adjusted,
+although anger against the firmness and activity of his illustrious
+Lordship remained alive; and now the unusual character of these
+incidents revived again the old complaints--those who were parties in
+this affair uniting with those who were angry at what had previously
+occurred. All joined in clamors against the archbishop, treating him
+as turbulent, seditious, prejudiced, contumacious, and the like; and
+from various speeches and conversations this opinion steadily grew--all
+regarding as already certain and evident what originated only in their
+mistaken prejudices, and with this basis easily reaching a conclusion
+(as occurred with the majesty of Christ)--that it was necessary to
+remove his illustrious Lordship from their midst, in order to quiet
+the anxieties and disturbances which had grieved all the estates of
+the commonwealth. So in the execution of this their undertaking they
+did not observe the method and plan which is prescribed in the laws
+for cases of so great importance--for there was now no disobedience
+or contumacy to a second or third royal decree, or interference with
+the royal patronage, or other like causes or motives which could
+justify so audacious an act. And solely at hearing the reply of his
+illustrious Lordship to two royal decrees, which at the very same time
+were communicated to him in regard to different matters--each one of
+these being the first one which was issued, in both cases--all the
+officials of the royal Audiencia were so irritated that immediately
+they proceeded to decree that the sentence of banishment and [loss of]
+secular revenues, [temporalidades] which had been pronounced against
+his illustrious Lordship in the preceding year, must be executed.
+
+But the controversy of that year was now ended, and the parties
+now reconciled, and therefore the cause of this action was not past
+but present disputes. These were: that his illustrious Lordship had
+refused to absolve a contumacious executor whose name he had posted
+as excommunicate; and that he had replied to the royal decrees with
+apostolic freedom and liberty--in both these acts displaying his
+constancy, and zeal for maintaining his jurisdiction unimpaired. [On
+March 29, 1683, the Audiencia decree that the sentence of banishment
+be carried out, but it is suspended for two days, that the necessary
+preparations may be made secretly, in order to avoid disturbances
+like those connected with Archbishop Guerrero's banishment. Pardo
+is arrested at midnight, by a large body of officials and soldiers,
+and immediately deported to Pangasinan, [151] "where the alcalde of
+that province had strict orders to detain his illustrious Lordship
+there, without allowing him to leave the provincial capital, or to
+perform any act of jurisdiction [152] or authority pertaining to his
+episcopal dignity, or to correspond by letter with Manila." On the
+same day, various persons are arrested as officials or near friends of
+the archbishop. The provisor takes refuge in the Dominican convent,
+which is at once surrounded by soldiers, an auditor threatening to
+demolish it with artillery; at this, the provisor surrenders himself
+to the assailants, but "with certain precautions and securities," and
+is kept under guard in his own house. Guards are also placed "at the
+bell-towers of certain churches, so that the bells might not be rung
+for an interdict. All the household furniture and personal property
+[espolio] of the archbishop was confiscated, and placed in the royal
+magazines--scrutiny being first made of the most private papers of
+his illustrious Lordship, without finding in them anything by which
+his enemies could calumniate him."]
+
+The bishop of Troya, Don Fray Gines Barrientos, who had been appointed
+governor of the archbishopric by his illustrious Lordship for this
+emergency, when he learned of the arrest of the archbishop immediately
+presented to the cabildo the document appointing him; but that body
+appealed to the royal Audiencia, and, with either their expressed
+or their tacit approval, took possession of the government of the
+archbishopric. They declared that the banishment of the archbishop must
+be construed as the vacation of his see, although their action might
+better be called a spiritual adultery--for, while the spouse of this
+church was still living, the cabildo intruded their presence in order
+to abuse her; and, although in reality they were but sons and subjects,
+they had the audacity to occupy their father's marriage-bed. At the
+head of this action was the dean, who with dexterity and artifice
+lured on the rest to consent to this monstrous deed; and because
+one, a racionero, would not consent, they thrust him out of the
+chapter-room. Government by the cabildo having been declared, it
+was an easy thing for this same dean to cause them to appoint him
+as provisor; and in virtue of this fantastical jurisdiction he went
+on undoing what had been done, and making blunders--liberating all
+those who had been imprisoned by the [ecclesiastical] tribunal,
+[153] giving permission to all the clerics to hear confessions,
+absolving ad cautelam the excommunicated (especially the executor
+[i.e., Ortega] who had been publicly posted), and promulgating an
+Octavian peace, like that of which the prophet says, Dicunt, "pax,
+pax," et non erat pax. [154]
+
+Among this confusion of affairs, the perplexity that existed in the
+consciences of men was very noticeable: for some, endeavoring to
+flatter those who were in power, gave their approval to all that
+these had done, saying that they had not incurred any censure,
+and that the jurisdiction of the cabildo was valid; but others,
+with more pious judgment, regarded the said jurisdiction as either
+fanciful or monstrous, and therefore felt scruples regarding all
+their transactions--and not least in regard to intercourse with
+those persons who had taken part in the arrest of the archbishop
+and other ecclesiastics. This was the feeling of our religious, and
+therefore they endeavored to refrain from intercourse with [those]
+secular persons, that they might not incur danger from having
+communication with excommunicated persons. [155] This withdrawal
+being resented by the parties concerned, they began to calumniate us
+as inciters of sedition, saying that with our scruples we disturbed
+the peace which the cabildo and their dean had striven to introduce
+in this community. In consequence of this, the father provincial was
+notified, in the following year, of a decree by the royal Audiencia
+in which he was charged and commanded to banish three religious,
+the most prominent in his province, to the kingdom of Nueva Espana;
+and to send to the province of Cagayan two others, who were lecturers
+in theology--all because the Audiencia had concluded that the said
+religious, as being the most learned and serious, would persuade the
+rest to their own opinion. The father provincial replied to this that
+the said religious were not at all to blame, since he had ordered
+them to withdraw from intercourse with those who were excommunicated;
+[156] then they pronounced against him also sentence of banishment,
+which was executed with great severity on the father provincial
+and his associate, accompanied by the acts of violence which are
+mentioned in the first book. [157] ... The archbishop was very
+contented in that place of his banishment, but so poor and needy
+in temporal revenues that for his ordinary support he was confined
+to what was given him for food by the religious who was minister in
+that village; he therefore resided in the convent, like any private
+brother in the order, and practiced the duties of [a member of] the
+community as if he were a subordinate of the vicar of that house. But
+outside of food and clothing he had nothing even for almsgiving; and
+therefore in the letter that I have mentioned--written to a lay friend,
+a citizen of this city of Manila--his illustrious Lordship asks that,
+for the love of God, his friend will send him some rosaries, medals,
+and like articles, so that he can make some return for the little
+presents which the Indians give him. And by way of acknowledgment for
+the hospitality which they had showed him in the convent of Lingayen,
+he left in it his sole possession, a piece of the wood of the holy
+cross--which he valued highly because it had been sent to him by the
+supreme pontiff when the latter issued the bulls for his appointment
+to this see. In this exile our archbishop remained during a period
+of about twenty months, until at last a new opportunity arose, by
+which he was restored to his see by the royal Audiencia.
+
+In the year 1684 a new governor came to these islands, and as soon
+as he entered upon his office he began, as an unprejudiced party,
+to recognize the blind way in which action had been taken in these
+proceedings, and the injuries and bad consequences which might
+be feared if affairs continued in this state, especially as the
+ecclesiastical jurisdiction of the cabildo was losing repute [estando
+en opiniones]. For the remedy of so many evils, he made arrangements
+with the ministers of the royal Audiencia that the archbishop should
+be restored to his see; and this was actually carried out, by decree
+of that royal tribunal, in which the ministers of the royal Audiencia
+admit that the ecclesiastical jurisdiction had been snatched from
+the archbishop--as if this could be thus taken away, and especially
+by lay and secular officials!
+
+Notwithstanding that the decree for the restitution of the archbishop
+had gone out from the royal Audiencia, it took much persuasion to
+make him acquiesce in returning to his see. One reason was, that he
+was not willing to return until his Holiness and the Council should
+decide his cause; the other, that he saw the affairs of his church in
+such a condition that it was almost impossible to set them right. But
+finally, at the entreaties of good men, and as persons very influential
+in this colony had gone to bring back his illustrious Lordship, he
+made the decision to return to Manila, where he was received with
+universal rejoicing and applause.... The holy pastor went about,
+looking up his flock, and when he saw it so injured and despoiled by
+the abuses, errors, and evil consequences which had been occasioned
+by the usurping jurisdiction of the cabildo--and, above all, by the
+censures in which so many were involved, affecting the liberty of
+their consciences, with disregard for our holy mother the Church--he
+undertook to procure the reconciliation of the accused persons,
+inducing them first to acknowledge their errors. First of all,
+through the intercession of the new governor absolution was given
+in private to the auditors (who had been active in his arrest and
+in those of other ecclesiastical persons), they humbling themselves
+to ask for absolution with certain demonstrations of reverence. The
+members of his cabildo he absolved in public, with all the customary
+preparations and ceremonies; and the same thing was done with other
+persons, laymen, who had been concerned in the said arrests--especially
+with the preceding governor [i.e., Vargas] the principal author of
+these acts of violence, who, being now a private person, was not on
+the same footing as the auditors, who were royal ministers and were
+actually governing this commonwealth. There was much to overcome in
+this point, in order that the said governor should humble himself;
+for he attempted by various means and pretexts to exempt himself from
+the jurisdiction of the archbishop--until, finding all paths barred,
+he was obliged to subject himself to that prelate's correction, and
+to make the necessary declarations in acknowledgement and detestation
+of his errors. But at the time of imposing on him public penance he
+showed that his repentance was feigned; for he never was willing to
+accept that penance, or to submit to the commands of his illustrious
+Lordship. On this account he had much to suffer--although the pain
+that he had inflicted on the holy archbishop was incomparably greater
+than this--seeing how rebellious was his heart, and how little regard
+he paid to the censures.
+
+The decision in the archbishop's cause from the courts of Roma and
+Madrid could not arrive here as soon as it was desired; for those of
+the party opposed to his illustrious Lordship had managed so well
+that they seized all the mails in which anything was going that
+was favorable to the archbishop, and they only sent to those courts
+whatever would contribute to his injury. Accordingly, the good name of
+that holy prelate suffered greatly, and he was regarded as restless,
+seditious, and disobedient to the royal ministers. But as there was no
+allegation made on the side of his illustrious Lordship, and as the
+sentence that would be just could not be pronounced without hearing
+both sides, the Council were unwilling to settle so important a matter
+until all the documents that were in favor of the archbishop should
+arrive there. And in view of the allegations made on each side,
+although (it is said) the royal Council had uttered the sentence
+against his illustrious Lordship, the king our sovereign obliged them
+to revoke it, because at Roma the sentence was of contrary tenor, and
+his Holiness earnestly charged him to protect the cause of the Church,
+and to reflect very carefully on all the events which had occurred
+in this case. In consequence of these admonitions from his Holiness,
+it is said, our most Catholic king Carlos II summoned the president
+of the Council of the Indias, and gave him a severe and sharp rebuke
+for having declared sentence against the archbishop--saying, among
+other things: "How you have deceived me!" at which the said president
+was so grieved that (according to report) he died on the third day
+after. Thereupon these matters were again considered in the Council,
+with more deliberation; and revoking the previous sentence, declared
+that all the irregular measures enacted by this royal Audiencia
+were arbitrary and illegal; they also removed from office all the
+auditors, for having been concerned in this proceeding [i.e., against
+the archbishop]. In the same manner, the supreme pontiff declared
+that all those who had taken any part in the arrest and banishment
+of his illustrious Lordship, and of the other ecclesiastics were
+publicly excommunicated; and he made the archbishop his deputy
+judge, in order to absolve them and reconcile them to the Church,
+after they should render such satisfaction as, in the judgment of
+his illustrious Lordship, was necessary. And to our archbishop he
+despatched an apostolic letter, praising his fortitude in defending
+the ecclesiastical immunity, exhorting him to continue with the
+same courage in any future difficulties that he might encounter;
+and to follow his own good example, acting with the same constancy
+that he had previously displayed. [Here follows the Latin text of the
+brief; before it arrives, Pardo has a fresh opportunity to follow its
+injunctions.] Notwithstanding that all the affairs of this commonwealth
+were for the time in peace, a new difficulty and occasion arose for the
+archbishop to display his constancy in defense of the ecclesiastical
+immunity; and, without fearing the threats of a new banishment, he
+showed himself steadfast and brave in defending the privileges of
+his jurisdiction--so much so, that the royal Audiencia again passed
+sentence, of banishment anew, against his illustrious Lordship. They
+would have carried this into execution, if it had not been for the
+intercession of both cabildos (the ecclesiastical and the secular)
+and the holy religious orders who all fell at the governor's feet,
+entreating him not to take such a step, which would cause so great
+injury to this commonwealth; with this the rigorous intention of his
+Lordship was moderated, and this new blow was not inflicted.
+
+Not for this did the valor of his illustrious Lordship grow weak:
+rather, in new emergencies (and many of these arose) he bore himself
+with invincible courage; nor could his constancy be overcome,
+either by regard for meritorious persons, or by dangers, perils, or
+threats. For he had a heart and courage of steel (as may be gathered
+from his letters written to the governor regarding various affairs)
+for defending the rights of the Church--in these letters showing
+fortitude like that of a St. Ambrose, of a St. John Chrysostom, and of
+other like holy prelates. The holy archbishop was gentle as a lamb;
+and all those who knew him affirm that he was merciful and affable;
+but in matters touching the honor of God and the immunities and rights
+of His Church he was transformed into a spirited lion, nor did he
+ever swerve from his course or accept any [personal] advantage. And
+it seems that God approved his apostolic zeal and the justness of his
+cause, by coming to its defense with the exemplary punishments which
+He inflicted on the enemies of the holy archbishop; so that, before
+the final settlement of these disputes arrived from Roma and Madrid,
+He made evident to the world his innocence, and the injustice of those
+who persecuted him--taking just vengeance upon them by their miserable
+and violent deaths, and other like calamities. These are not repeated
+here, since they are already related at length in the eighteenth [158]
+chapter of the preceding book; and God, almost by a miracle, preserved
+the life of the holy archbishop so that he might before his death see
+his cause concluded in his favor. Thus, if before all the world--or, to
+speak more correctly, all hell--had conspired against him, at the last
+he was able to see in his own day the union, in his favor and defense,
+of the apostolic see on one hand, and the king our sovereign with his
+royal Council on the other; and, besides, the Supreme Judge of mortal
+men taking just vengeance on his enemies, by which the ministers of
+the secular government were warned not to insult again the dignity of
+the holy archbishop. And, although various collisions were not lacking,
+they did not reach violence and hostilities; for every one feared him,
+and regarded him as a holy man whom God assisted and favored.
+
+No other judgment is merited by the exemplary virtues of his
+illustrious Lordship; for even those most blind and obstinate in their
+prejudices were obliged to confess that the archbishop was a saintly
+man--as was said by the auditor who went to arrest him, as has been
+previously stated. The holy archbishop was much given to prayer and
+meditation, and inclined to silence; he was modest and sedate in
+his actions; and he was very watchful in whatever he did that all
+should be ordered by the divine law--continually keeping in mind the
+account that he must render to God of his ministry, a consideration
+which frequently shines out through his letters and other documents
+pertaining to the affairs of his high office. And this was the most
+potent stimulus which constrained him to act with so much firmness
+in the affairs pertaining to his ministry, as is noticeable in the
+letters which he wrote thereon to the governor, and are found in
+the authentic relation of his acts. In eating he was always very
+sparing, not only that he might observe religious abstinence, but
+because the delicate condition of his stomach could not endure the
+least excess. The holy archbishop lived in extreme poverty, behaving
+like the poorest religious in regard to his table, clothing, bed,
+and everything else. The province supplied his clothing, of rough,
+coarse frieze; and when a garment was torn he himself mended it with
+his own hands, as the members of his household have often seen. He
+employed the income of his see in doing good to the poor, in aiding
+the missions of his diocese, and in the adornment and repair of the
+churches. In the university of Santo Thomas he endowed a chair of
+canonical law, on account of the need in his church for training in
+this knowledge--to the end that the ecclesiastics of this archbishop
+might in future be better instructed in a subject so important for
+the management of the business in the ecclesiastical court; but this
+foundation was not enough to be effective, on account of unexpected
+accidents in the country. [159]
+
+At last God chose to reward his labors, and his zeal in defense
+of the Church; and thus, the previous storms calmed, God took him,
+triumphant over impiety and injustice, from this life to that which
+is eternal, with a holy and enviable death. This occurred on the last
+day of December in the year 1689, when he was seventy-eight years
+of age, most of these employed in the service of God our Lord. [160]
+He was given honorable burial at the steps of the clergy-house of our
+church of Santo Domingo at Manila: and at his funeral were present
+the royal Audiencia and the ecclesiastical and secular cabildos, all
+the religious orders, and the rest of this community, all bitterly
+sorrowing for the loss of such a pastor and prelate. Although his
+government at first ran counter to many who were discontented,
+as he seemed to them excessive in his rectitude, yet finally--his
+cause justified, and the truth declared by so many tribunals; and
+his blameless and holy life being seen [by all]--they hailed him
+unanimously as a holy prelate, and an example worthy of imitation. And
+even those who formerly regarded his rule as grievous now felt the
+lack of such a father, and were grieved that they had not treated him
+with more respect, their prejudice not having allowed them to know
+his virtue and holiness. The cabildo was left with the government
+of the cabildo, and transferred it to the bishop of Troya, Don Fray
+Gines Barrientos, a member of our own order--not only to show their
+affection for the deceased archbishop, but to make some amends for
+the resistance which in past times they had made to his rule, when,
+at the time of the banishment and exile of the archbishop, he had
+left the bishop with appointment as his governor. Thus the cabildo
+made acknowledgment of their past errors, for now were lacking in
+their number the two prebends who had been the principal authors of
+that resistance, and of all the incivilities shown to his illustrious
+Lordship; and these two seditious persons being removed, the rest
+professed filial reverence to the mitre and to his episcopal dignity.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+OFFICIAL VISITATION BY VALDIVIA
+
+    An account of the occurrences in Manila on the occasion of
+    the arrival of the [royal] visitor, Don Francisco Campos
+    de Valdivia.
+
+
+The said gentleman arrived in this city, [161] and on the same
+day he arrested the fiscal, Don Esteban de la Puente y Alanis,
+seizing his goods. He did the same with the notaries who had
+aided [the proceedings] against the church, and with the military
+leaders--beginning with Don Juan de Vargas, whom he left with guards
+in his own house. He made inquiries into many facts which had gone
+forth on the part of the archbishop, and many lies on the part of the
+Audiencia; many false statements in the acts, and many other things
+by which people in Manila have been undeceived regarding the just
+acts of the archbishop--who is lauded by that visitor as upright,
+just, and holy; and who told all who entered his house what was going
+on. He sent for the auditor Bolivar, the only one of the four who
+was yet alive, who had been for another reason banished to Cagayan;
+he was very repentant, according to report, and was absolved with
+his solemn declarations--which were published, by command of the
+archbishop, in all the pulpits of Manila--expressing detestation of
+all his actions against the church, in detail, up to his neglect to
+give aid for seizing the two hundred or more bales belonging to the
+Society. He came with the intention of dying, if it were necessary,
+in professing what he had detested; but in Ylocos he died suddenly and
+without the sacraments, while still near Pangasinan. Of his property
+and of that of Viga, little or nothing has appeared.
+
+The archbishop, seeing that all that he had done had pleased the
+Council at Madrid and that at Roma, proceeded to lay aside his
+scruples, by imposing and declaring an interdict against the church
+of the Society, because the body of Auditor Grimaldos [162] reposed
+therein; and it was kept closed from the eve of St. Ignatius's day
+for the space of two months, until the conclusion of the lawsuit
+which the widow of the said Grimaldos undertook to defend. They went
+to bring out the bones for sentence, and these were so intermingled
+with others--they say, it was done purposely or by artifice--that,
+in order not to deprive of asylum those of the just, the bones of
+Grimaldos were left in the church. It was blessed by the provisor
+with much solemnity, and the doors were opened with a peal of bells
+and the universal joy. Seeing this obstacle removed, on account of
+which that order were not entering that church, the Catholic visitor
+spoke in reconciliation of the two orders. At the first movement
+for peace, our order [i.e., the Dominican] declared that we desired
+it; and an agreement was reached, all the Society repairing to our
+convent on the octave of the naval feast. Our provincial preached,
+the archbishop and the Audiencia being present, and, I think, all
+Manila; for never was seen such a crowd of people. In a few days, I
+think in that same week, the feast of St. Ignatius was celebrated at
+the house of the Society; it had not been done [at the proper time],
+since on the eve of that day the church of the Society was placed
+under interdict. They had the same large attendance; Father Cani
+[163] preached, delivering a very spiritual and appropriate sermon.
+
+The archbishop, seeing that God was on his side, concluded to give
+a public atonement to the church. In the courtyard of our church
+was erected a stage, on which sat his illustrious Lordship and his
+cabildo; one day at twelve o'clock he laid an interdict throughout
+the city, and on the following day were present all the culprits who
+had concurred in violating the sacred persons and places--in a body,
+without swords. They were absolved, with scourges [varillas] and
+miserere, and afterward his illustrious Lordship restored them to
+the church. Then the next day a procession was formed, accompanied
+by our Lady of the Rosary. For the morrow there was a sermon, at
+which the governor and the city were present; and in the afternoon,
+for the procession, all the Audiencia, and the archbishop, etc.
+
+The visitor sent Don Juan de Vargas to Pangasinan, as excommunicated,
+since he had refused to submit to the sentence of his illustrious
+Lordship; he is still there, and will remain there. He is not going
+to Espana, as he has not paid the amount to which he was sentenced,
+which the visitor imposed upon him on account of the residencia, in
+either silver or jewels; nor has he provided securities for it. As
+for what concerns the residencia, the sum will be about one hundred
+thousand pesos; in this decision the judge has, in the opinion of all,
+proceeded most mercifully. The king's fiscal has been banished to the
+island of Mariveles until the ship sails. The dean, Don Miguel Ortiz
+de Cobarrubias, was involved in the libels that were current last
+year, and in other matters against the archbishop, in contravention
+of what he had decreed--as he said under oath when they absolved him;
+accordingly he was arrested, and came out of prison deprived of all
+ecclesiastical benefice. Our Fray Raimundo Bertist [i.e., Berart]
+also is going to Espana. The schoolmaster, Don Francisco Briceno, was
+also deprived of all benefice on account of his talk, and sentenced
+to perpetual seclusion in a convent, from which he will not emerge
+unless he takes the vows; they say that he is going into [the convent
+of] San Agustin. Very recently occurred the fall of another member
+of the usurping cabildo, who in my opinion was the worst of them;
+but he has escaped, through his crafty devices. This is Don Jose de
+Nava y Albiz, a racionero. They discovered that some sessions of the
+cabildo had been held without informing the new dean and canons, in
+opposition to his illustrious Lordship; also they found a libel against
+the archbishop and our religious order. The treasurer Valencia is also
+entangled in this matter. I do not know how the affair will end; they
+will find themselves in bad health if God preserves the archbishop.
+
+Of the four dignitaries who came with the visitor, the two auditors
+and the fiscal ranged themselves on the side of the governor, Don
+Juan de Vargas; and when excommunication was laid on those who should
+have intercourse with him, these persons went in and out, entirely
+disregarding this, and causing great scandal. On this account the
+visitor challenged them in a suit which the party of Vargas carried to
+the Audiencia; and for the same reason the archbishop kept challenging
+them in regard to ecclesiastical affairs. The fiscal married the
+widow of the auditor Grimaldos. The other of those auditors--who is
+the senior, and who is now governing--has much fear of God; and he is
+all the more discreet and experienced for having been judge in Burgos.
+
+Among other calamities which this community has suffered, not the
+least is the death of the governor, Don Gabriel de Curuzalegui, who
+died April 27; for the political government depends on so many heads
+that, as there is little concord among them and they are young men,
+much trouble is feared.
+
+In this year, toward the end of January, God sent us an epidemic of
+influenza, very malignant, from which many children and old persons
+died throughout the islands. The prominent persons who have died
+in this city are: Don Francisco Beza, archdeacon of the cathedral;
+Gallardo, who died suddenly in prison; Master Don Pablo de Aduna, Don
+Francisco de Ocampo, and others. The governor died poor, and with many
+debts--a proof of his upright conduct. All feel that these islands have
+not had [in that post] a man who was more disinterested, or who took
+better care of the royal exchequer and the credit of the church. God
+repaid him for this, since our king sent him several letters of thanks
+for what he had accomplished--especially for having brought back the
+archbishop to his see, and secured the removal of that monster, the
+usurping government of the cabildo. The supreme pontiff wrote letters
+to the archbishop, thanking him for what he had done and suffered,
+and encouraging him for what was before him--saying that he himself
+is imitating him, and using very affectionate terms.
+
+
+
+Relation of events in Filipinas arising from the coming of a visitor
+
+While all these islands were in the disconsolate and afflicted
+condition of which an account was given last year, at the beginning
+of July arrived the patache that was despatched from Nueva Espana to
+bring the usual aid. It had a quick voyage, and in this vessel came
+an entire Audiencia, and a visitor. [164] The latter, disembarking at
+Bagatao, set out for this city with the utmost speed, in a fragata
+belonging to the alcalde-mayor of Leyte; and left orders in the
+patache that no one should go ashore or write letters. He arrived at
+Manila very quickly, and, landing at Cavite--where he was received
+with a salvo of artillery--he went to the fort only. Having spent
+three-quarters of an hour with Don Fernando, without going anywhere
+else, he continued his journey to this city, where he arrived at two
+o'clock, and was received with a salvo. He entered the coach of the
+governor, and going from the fort of Santiago (by the postern gate of
+which he made his entry), he reached the palace. On the plaza a body
+of troops had been formed in order, who received him with a general
+salute of arquebus-shots. He spent about an hour with the governor,
+at the time making known to him only the commissions which he bore;
+meanwhile, the faces of various persons expressed their wonder,
+for it began to be rumored that whatever the archbishop and governor
+had done received the visitor's entire approval. This statement was
+very soon confirmed; for the said visitor, leaving the palace, asked
+for some soldiers, and, riding in the coach, went first to the house
+of the former governor, Don Juan de Vargas, but did not find him at
+home because he was outside the city, in his country house, by order
+of the governor. Leaving some guards there, and sending orders to
+Don Juan to come within the city, the visitor went to the house of
+Don Pedro de Bolivar; and when he asked for him and for his goods,
+he was told that Don Pedro was banished, and confined in the fort at
+Cagayan, and his goods had been confiscated and sold at public auction,
+by order of the governor. The visitor proceeded thence to the house
+of Don Diego de Calderon, and asking for him and for his goods, he
+was answered that Don Diego was dead, and they did not know of any
+goods. He left that place and went to the house of Don Diego de Viga,
+where he made the same inquiry and answer was made that he had died
+in exile and prison in Cagayan, and his goods also had been sold
+and confiscated by the governor. He finally proceeded to the house
+of the king's fiscal, Don Esteban de la Fuente Alanis, whom he found
+at home in great fear and perturbation. Immediately the visitor told
+him that he might regard the house as his prison, and withdrawing
+him to an apartment, he seized all Don Esteban's goods; by this time
+the afternoon was ended. On the following day, Don Juan de Vargas,
+having returned to the city, was promptly visited; and after a polite
+visit, he was told that he must remain a prisoner in his own house,
+without leaving it, under a penalty of one thousand ducados. On this
+day, it was published that all acts by the royal Council in favor
+of the archbishop, the governor, and the Dominicans were approved;
+that the auditors were suspended; that the ex-governor was fined two
+thousand pesos; that all were summoned to Nueva Espana--where they
+must await their sentence, in the place that had been selected,
+twenty leguas distant from Mejico; and, until a ship was ready,
+they were all banished from Manila to the same places where the
+archbishop and the other Dominican religious had been confined. They
+all were stupefied with fear, at hearing a decision so unexpected;
+and those of the [archbishop's] following and partners were full of
+satisfaction and triumph. Fear increased, and no one felt any security
+in so fierce a storm, thinking that the said visitor was in the place
+of the governor and the Dominicans. With this it was expected that
+affairs would be in worse confusion than before, and that the truth
+of events would be disguised and covered as those personages might
+choose, with the fraudulent statements made in the earlier accounts.
+
+The said visitor began his investigation, and for it demanded
+that the court notaries should immediately surrender to him the
+original documents of all the past disputes between the Audiencia and
+archbishop, appeals [on the ground] of fuerza, and other causes; of
+these he furnished a list. Then, in a few days, taking the declaration
+of the said fiscal of the king, the visitor brought charges against
+him, and commanded that he should go into banishment on the island
+of Mariveles, and from that place should answer the charges. In the
+intervening time while his cause was being prepared, a chaplain said
+mass in his house; and the archbishop despatched a letter threatening
+to place him on the public list of the excommunicated, unless he
+first drew up and signed the same expressions of detestation that
+Don Pedro de Bolivar had made, commanding that no priest should be
+allowed to say mass for him; and thus was repaid his good services to
+his illustrious Lordship during the entire term of the governor Don
+Gabriel. At the beginning, Don Esteban resisted; but seeing that he
+had no human recourse, and that, when he demanded counsel from the
+visitor, that person gave him to understand that he must do it, he
+had to yield under compulsion, and do what was commanded him. Another
+strong reason why he consented to do it was, that he might not go
+to his destination as an excommunicate; he went thither absolved,
+leaving the said act of detestation dated and signed, to the pleasure
+and satisfaction of the archbishop.
+
+So frequent were now the visits of the reverend Verart, and so close
+was his intimacy with the visitor, that he did not leave the latter's
+house by day or even by night--so that it was soon rumored that the
+said Father Verart was the one who acted and took the management in the
+inquiries, investigations, and charges which were made in regard to
+those who were included therein by the worthy visitor. This has been
+made more certain by time, not only by information and occurrences
+which have come to our knowledge, but by seeing how ignorant and
+unlearned the said visitor was; and if Verart did not draw up the
+allegations and other documents, many will doubt that the visitor
+could succeed in doing anything to advantage. We shall see how the
+whole affair will turn out, and how thoroughly investigated the truth
+as to affairs in these islands will go to the Council. The governor,
+the archbishop, the visitor, and the Dominicans [will figure] tied
+together by pairs, and Fray Raimundo Verart as the leader [corifeo]
+of the dance.
+
+When the patache reached the port, and the auditors this city,
+various mails from his Majesty were opened, and it was found that the
+remedy was worse than the disease itself; since the Dominicans and the
+archbishop, like headlong furies, began a fierce tempest of vengeance
+against all those who were not of their faction and at their disposal,
+without heeding or fearing any one who might restrain them in whatever
+they might attempt. Accordingly, they made the first attack, or rather
+continued the old persecution, against the fathers of the Society
+(using a pretext, in order to close our church for a long time),
+the archbishop declaring that it had been profaned, meaning that in
+it was interred [the body of] Don Cristobal Grimaldos--who, he said,
+had died an excommunicate by having incurred that penalty in the
+archbishop's banishment--although it was five years since he had died,
+and only now for the first time did his illustrious Lordship begin
+to have scruples, which he could not lay aside. In order to conceal
+better his revengeful spirit against the Society, he waited until the
+day of most publicity and greatest attendance [at our church], which
+was the day of our great patriarch St. Ignatius; choosing this day,
+he waited until the hour of nine, when the church was full of people,
+including all the religious communities of this city, and only the
+arrival of the royal Audiencia was awaited to begin high mass for
+the saint. For that time and hour, then, his illustrious Lordship
+reserved his scruples; and, sending two notaries, they published and
+posted on the church door his edict, declaring the church of the
+Society of Jesus to be polluted--declaring under penalty of major
+excommunication, latae sententiae, that no faithful Christian should
+attend divine worship in the said church. All the people, therefore,
+were obliged to go out, and the doors were locked for two months
+and two days, from July 31 to October 2; and, although Dona Manuela
+Barrientos, formerly the wife of the said Senor Grimaldos, came out
+in our defense--proving not only by the confessors who assisted him,
+but by the testimony of other witnesses, that he had died with all the
+sacraments and with great contrition--nothing of this was sufficient
+to prevent the archbishop from pronouncing notices that he had died
+impenitent and excommunicate. He therefore commanded that the bones
+should be exhumed, for which purpose the provisor, Juan Gonzalez,
+went one afternoon, October 2, with other officials and some negroes
+with spades, and opened the tomb; but, finding many bones, and among
+them three skulls, they had to leave these in their place, as they
+could not distinguish which were those of the auditor Grimaldos. On the
+following day the said provisor came to bless our church, and the gates
+were again opened, to the great joy and consolation of the people.
+
+At this time, when the archbishop was engaged in disinterring the
+bones of the said auditor Grimaldos, the visitor--who had been
+declared investigating judge for special suits and commissions
+only--was going about in another direction, making his secret
+inquiries about past affairs. In everything he proceeded greatly in
+favor of the archbishop, governor, and Dominicans, but with general
+complaints from all the witnesses, who said that the examiner had
+come not to ascertain the truth, but to confirm the fraudulent and
+malicious reports of the archbishop and the friars--for, as soon as
+they said anything against the latter, they were immediately checked,
+and what was set down in the document was moderated; but if it was
+anything in favor of them, the examiner heard it at much length,
+and employed his rhetoric to dilate upon it very extensively. He very
+soon gave orders that Captain Lerma (who took the place of Armenta,
+the secretary of the Audiencia, who was banished to Pangasinan) and
+Sargento-mayor Juan Sanchez (who was secretary of that court in the
+time of the controversies between the Audiencia and the archbishop)
+should enter the fort as prisoners. Every day his friendship and
+intercourse with the governor grew more and more intimate, so much
+so that not a night passed when he did not inform the governor of all
+that he had accomplished that day, praising himself for having gained
+control of everything [de hechar todo a su barda]. This was seen by
+what occurred in the country; and he took away life from whomever he
+chose, as easily as if he had been a governor. It being necessary for
+his investigation that Auditor Bolivar should come to this city, the
+examiner demanded that he be brought from Cagayan, where he was at the
+time; and the latter while coming, in good health, upon entering the
+province of Pangasinan from that of Ylocos fell dead, from [drinking]
+one cup of chocolate, without obtaining the sacraments. This rumor of
+poisoning was so widely spread in all this region that the governor,
+notwithstanding all his efforts, could not stop the mouths of all;
+accordingly the worthy examiner was full of fear and dread lest
+they should do as much more to him, and did all that the governor,
+archbishop, and Dominicans desired--if before with some concealment,
+from that day with entire publicity--calling the archbishop a saintly
+old man.
+
+The residencia of the ex-governor was published, and in the course
+of it and of other investigations (all which were proceeding at the
+same time) the goods of most of the prominent citizens of Manila were
+seized and detained--some having incurred blame in certain charges
+of the residencia, and others because they had been commanded by the
+[former] royal Audiencia and its governor and captain-general, under
+grave penalties in the decrees, to find and seize the Dominican
+religious. Consequently the people were in great perplexity, not
+knowing what was to be done; for it went ill with them if they obeyed
+the king, and still worse if they did not obey. They showed the
+[former] orders and decrees, but nothing availed them; consequently
+all went out after several days of imprisonment (in which time died
+Sargento-mayor Don Juan Gallardo), mulcted in amounts of three hundred,
+four hundred, and even five hundred pesos [each].
+
+At the beginning of the month of October, the examiner took greatly
+to heart the establishment of peace between the Dominican fathers
+and those of the Society, in which negotiation the governor and the
+archbishop were active, since now the latter found no longer the means
+for annoying us. The affair was very diligently conducted, but always
+with the claim of advantages for the other side. The worthy man was
+quite deceived, having been told that the Dominican fathers had only
+broken off their former intercourse with our church inasmuch as it
+had been polluted from the time when Auditor Grimaldos was interred
+in it; but this was a great lie, and quite notorious, since, a year
+before the said auditor died, since the controversy over the arms,
+[165] they had ceased intercourse [with us]. Notwithstanding all this,
+they always directed their efforts to the end that the Society should
+yield; and, the octave of the naval feast falling on the very day of
+St. Francis de Borgia, we had to delay until the octave the feast
+and sermon for the saint, and went in a body to the church. Great
+rejoicing was displayed in the city; much artillery was fired; the
+[Dominican] provincial Marron preached; the archbishop, governor,
+and Audiencia were present. All this was repeated on the day of the
+octave of St. Francis Borgia, when Father Cani preached; and from
+that day the Dominican fathers and their archbishop have displayed,
+at least externally, their former friendliness.
+
+A little while afterward, on the day of St. Peter [of] Alcantara,
+[166] occurred the most fearful earthquake that ever, according to
+report, was known in these islands, the shocks being repeated at
+various times. The father rector went to the archbishop to ask his
+permission to offer the act of contrition, but he refused to allow
+it--saying that he had thought of something else that was better,
+which was, to carry the Virgin of the Rosary through the streets,
+all reciting the rosary aloud. Moreover, in order to make peace with
+God and placate His just anger, he commanded one day that a general
+interdict be rung, publishing as excommunicated all those who had in
+any manner been concerned in the banishment of his illustrious Lordship
+and the other Dominican religious, and all the officers who had taken
+part in the blockade of the convent of Santo Domingo. Afterward,
+having erected a scaffold or stage in the courtyard of his convent,
+he published the absolution--for which they went past him one by one
+to be absolved, without sword or hat. In this were ranked all the
+military and officials of Manila--all solemnly swearing never again to
+take action or render obedience for such occasions, even though the
+king should command them to. All those who were absent were likewise
+absolved, Don Juan de Vargas being excepted, nominatim. This function
+was ended by the promise that with this God would be placated, and the
+earth rendered quiet--although His Divine Majesty, for [the ends of]
+His lofty judgments, continued the incessant tremblings of the earth.
+
+It seems that with this the tragedies were ended, all [the culprits]
+absolved, and the earth blessed; but his illustrious Lordship and
+the friars, recalling to mind the former preposterous attempt to
+change all the [members of the] cabildo and arrange it according to
+their own humor and taste, and seeing themselves masters of the field,
+without any one remaining who could resist them, undertook to put that
+scheme into execution, bringing against all the prebends such suits
+as they pleased. Commencing with the dean, after a long imprisonment
+they passed sentence on him that he should be deprived of his dignity
+and should go to Espana; and, being meanwhile suspended from office,
+he should remain in Manila. Then they put in his place, and made dean,
+the provisor Juan Gonzalez--a person of the qualifications that we all
+know. Soon they attacked in the rear the good old archdeacon, Doctor
+Francisco Deza, and brought against him a very infamous complaint,
+entirely unworthy of his exemplary life and gray hairs, in order
+to deprive him of his prebend. God chose, rather, to take him to
+himself; but on the day when he died they seized all his goods,
+and placed in the prebend the cura of Quiapo, Caraballo--a Visayan
+by birth, and a notorious [167] mestizo. By way of courtesy, they
+passed then to the schoolmaster, Don Francisco Gutierrez; and, not
+finding any worse fault than the report that he had spoken ill of his
+prelate, it was enough for their purpose. After a long imprisonment,
+his sentence was pronounced--the loss of his prebend, and perpetual
+seclusion in a religious order, which he might choose; accordingly,
+he entered the convent of San Agustin. Thus they had a position into
+which to thrust a student from Santo Tomas, named Altamirano--of whom,
+when I say that he is a nephew of Cervantes, there is nothing more
+to be added. Another prebend, a racionero, named Don Jose de Nava,
+they got into their clutches a little while ago--because it is known
+that he wrote to his Majesty the excellent qualifications of those
+whom his illustrious Lordship was placing in the cabildo, which are
+admirable and undoubted--and seized all his goods. They are keeping
+him in fetters, in a place where he does not even know whether it is
+day or night, without [allowing him to] communicate with a soul. That
+they might more effectually form the entire cabildo from their own
+faction, and to suit themselves, his illustrious Lordship posted
+edicts regarding the two canonries, the doctoral and the magistral,
+saying that his Majesty commands that these prebends shall be given by
+competition in this cathedral, as in the others. Those who competed
+for them were the Japanese Naito, the little Visayan Caraballo,
+the mulatto Rocha, and Altamirano; and although Doctor Don Jose de
+Atienza entered the competition, and gave his competitive discourse
+in public, and preached on short notice to the admiration of his
+hearers, no one in the city doubts that he will not succeed in
+obtaining anything, as he is not of their faction and was graduated
+by the Society. He felt so certain of this that he said so in his
+sermon. For they will strive to form the entire cabildo of their own
+men and from their following, so that, even if the archbishop dies,
+the Dominican fathers will not cease to rule, which is the object
+at which they aim. Thus far the canonries have not been conferred;
+it seems that they are waiting until the ship shall sail, so that
+they may send word [to Espana that the matter remains] in doubt; but
+no one has any doubt that two will surely enter upon these prebends,
+and that Atienza has no chance at all. That clique are proceeding,
+in regard to everything, in a reckless and very insolent manner,
+and without any caution, for there is no one who can resist them; and
+therefore they have rendered themselves formidable in this country,
+and the arbitrators of all matters. It is hoped that the storm will
+not be so severe now, with the entrance of the royal Audiencia upon
+the government--on account of the very unexpected and sudden death of
+the governor, Don Gabriel de Curuzelaegui, the abettor of all these
+doings. This occurred in the month of April last, and was caused by
+a retention of urine, which ended his life in three days. At that
+time, governor, archbishop, investigating judge, and Dominicans were
+preparing a farrago of documents to mislead the Council and to further
+their own reckless proceedings; they even notified the ex-governor,
+Don Juan de Vargas, that he must go into exile to Pangasinan, to
+which place he had banished the archbishop. He made an urgent plea
+for his absolution, in view of his Majesty's decree which ordered the
+archbishop to absolve him, but the latter would not listen to it. On
+the day when they carried him into exile, he entered the house of the
+archbishop, and, ascending the stairs on his knees until he reached
+the prelate's feet, Don Juan begged him, with tears in his eyes, to
+absolve him; but the archbishop, with a heart like a tiger's, refused
+to hear him, and answered him only with harsh words. He told Don Juan
+that he must submit to the penance imposed, which required him to wear
+the sackcloth robe, the halter round his neck, the yellow breeches,
+etc., going through the churches, as he had been commanded to do;
+and that, if he did not consent to this, he must go to Lingayen
+without absolution. Thence he repaired to the royal Audiencia, who
+issued a royal decree to the archbishop that he must absolve Don
+Juan; but immediately the governor and archbishop joined hands to
+avert this pressure, and drew up an iniquitous accusation against the
+auditors, containing many falsehoods and charges. Among other things,
+they brought forward evidence that the auditors had illicit relations
+with Dona Isabel, the wife of Don Juan de Vargas, and this by several
+witnesses. It may be imagined what sort of a country this is, and how
+much credit is due to the accusations that are made here--and to the
+witnesses in Manila, who swear to anything that suits a governor. This
+done, the archbishop replied to the royal decree by challenging the
+auditors, for the causes which he proved against them. This answer
+was made a very short time before the governor's death; it was sent to
+him sealed, and afterward was found with the above accusation--which
+as some declared, was for the purpose of ruining this Audiencia as
+he had destroyed the other.
+
+In this condition are affairs at present. Father Fray Raimundo Verart,
+the instigator of so many disturbances, is going there [i.e., to
+Espana], summoned by his Majesty. May it please God that now the
+misfortunes of this unhappy land may cease.
+
+
+
+Information from Filipinas and Nueva Espana
+
+With the arrival of the galleon from Filipinas in this Nueva Espana
+has been unladen a raft [flota] of news, which other pens, less
+awkward than mine, will relate; I can only tell what I have known. In
+the year 1687 the examiner [pesquisidor]--as the Chinese say, the
+fisherman [pescador]--Don Francisco Campos y Valdivia arrived at
+Manila; according to the reports, it would seem that he went there
+to encourage anew and continue the malignant acts of the archbishop
+and the Dominicans, and to pillage the wealth of that community and
+finally squeeze out of it the little blood that it has. He immediately
+joined hands with Governor Curuzealegui, the archbishop, and the
+Dominicans; he selected as his adviser, director, and counselor the
+Dominican Fray Raimundo Verart, the source of so many disturbances;
+and--without heeding that his Majesty, on account of the latter's
+turbulent disposition, had commanded that the said religious should
+proceed to the court [at Madrid]--he immediately took possession of
+the said religious, who was with him at all hours of day and night, in
+his house. [He did so] in order that the religious should prepare for
+him the documents, acts, and inquiries for which he was commissioned,
+on account of the illiterate manner in which the fisherman usually
+drew them up. From this may be interred what documents he will carry
+to the court, with a hand so malicious and bold--but with the safety
+of the father confessor's broad shoulders, and the cunning tendencies
+of the chief, of vast piety.
+
+There are more than three hundred thousand pesos, in jewels and
+commodities, that he has carried away, well guarded; and he is full of
+confidence of new rewards. I do not doubt that the chief distributor
+will enjoy a very pleasant time, knowing that the Jesuits remain
+humbled, trampled down, and without recourse--they, to whom on so
+many grounds he ought to show himself at least indifferent.
+
+He discharged his fury against the governor, Don Juan de Vargas,
+and, without allowing him to defend himself--since hardly had Don
+Juan chosen a lawyer or notary when he awoke in exile--he banished
+him to a distant place, and among Dominicans. And, to soften this
+humiliation, the archbishop denied him the absolution that he sought
+(going up to the prelate's house on his knees), without paying any
+attention to the strict injunction of his Majesty, or urging the
+visitor to secure its fulfilment; and demanding an order to carry Don
+Juan to Mexico, notwithstanding the securities [that he had given]
+for his residencia. He was left in the hands of the Dominicans and
+the archbishop, in order that the latter might satiate himself more
+at leisure with Don Juan's sorrows.
+
+The visitor turned his attention to the auditors, whom he found
+already exiled by the governor; and, two of them having died a little
+while before, he sent for the auditor Bolivar. It is reported that
+the governor, fearing this man, gave orders that they should put him
+to death on the route. [168] What is certain is, that as he finished
+drinking a cup of chocolate, he fell dead, and his finger-nails and
+lips made known the poison; and it is noted that in the following
+year, about the same time, the said governor died very suddenly, and
+in melancholy circumstances--according to rumor and letters, like
+a beast. The last of the officials, the fiscal Alanis, the visitor
+brought with him to Nueva Espana, after having confiscated all his
+goods and inflicted on him a thousand annoyances--as also the dean,
+Don Miguel Ortiz. With him came the Dominican Verart, in order that
+with his assistance the visitor might continue the management of
+his documents.
+
+About this time began the fury of the archbishop and the Dominicans
+against the Society. [The remains of] Auditor Grimaldos having reposed
+five years in the sepulcher of the college at Manila, the archbishop
+was pricked by scruples on the day of St. Ignatius; and, when the
+church was full, and the governor and the Audiencia were expected
+for the fiesta, a notary came in, publishing the declaration that the
+church was polluted--that the auditor Grimaldos had died impenitent,
+and that everyone should go out of the church, under penalty of
+excommunication. The church remained closed until the second day of
+October. On that day the provisor went and opened the sepulcher, and,
+seeing therein three corpses, among which he could not distinguish
+the one that he sought, he proceeded to bless what he called the
+"contaminated" church. The examiner [i.e., Campos y Valdivia], playing
+the role of a reconciler, obliged the fathers of the Society to go to
+attend a feast-day of the Dominicans, and the latter to be present at
+another in the Society's house. Afterward the archbishop arranged the
+cabildo to suit himself, without accepting or noticing the prebends
+who came appointed by his Majesty, and replaced all of them from his
+own college of Santo Tomas; and among these were men most unworthy
+[of such posts], mestizos who were half negro. His principal object
+is, that if he should die the cabildo may appoint the bishop of
+Troya as ruler [of the diocese], in order that the disturbances may
+not cease; and very strung recommendations are going for the court,
+to appoint in that church the said bishop of Troya, in order that he
+may more vigorously continue the disputes and lawsuits, which do not
+cease. Meanwhile, at court let not efforts cease to persuade that
+this religious order is not suited for sees [mitras] so remote--as
+the father confessor sets forth, and that boldly. In every Dominican
+there is a bishop, a governor, and an absolute monarch; nor will he
+acknowledge himself to be a vassal--as is shown by a fiscal reply
+that comes from Filipinas and will go to the court, in the terms of
+which is recognized the intention of that prelate [i.e., Barrientos].
+
+In the course of the investigation the visitor did not spare the
+[belongings required by] decency for the governor's wife, Dona Isabel
+de Ardila, taking away from her at public auction even the bed and
+the jewels that she used, and from her husband even the sword that he
+carried at his belt. The annoyances inflicted upon the citizens are
+innumerable; and in order that the jewels and other valuables which
+he obtained from the seizures of goods should not be sold at a low
+price, at auctions, he caused them to be knocked down to himself,
+but in the names of other persons, and he is becoming, therefore,
+enormously wealthy.
+
+Nor was the archbishop idle at this time. He proceeded to give
+rules to the new Audiencia as to the manner in which it was to
+conduct itself, declaring that recourse to it in cases of fuerza
+and banishment was faulty; and a little later, when urged to absolve
+Governor Vargas, he replied that he challenged the new auditors for
+cause, since he considered them all to be in love with the governor's
+wife. Consequently, it would be necessary that another Audiencia
+should come, or that, to check lawsuits, they delegate the authority
+to him--which they refused, since the ecclesiastics are vassals.
+
+In this so tangled web of mischiefs occasioned by his cause, died
+very suddenly Governor Don Gabriel de Curuzaelegui; so many pecuniary
+obligations of his were made public that they seem incredible, even to
+those who do not know the opportunities for profit of that governmental
+post. He left the administration of his estate to the man who had
+been the mainstay of his government, Don Tomas de Andaya--a native of
+Andaya in France, [169] however much he has tried to persuade people
+that he was born in Viscaya.
+
+On December 19, 1689, the ship "Santo Nino" cast anchor in
+Acapulco, and in it came the dean of Manila, Don Miguel Ortiz
+de Cobarrubias; the fiscal, Don Lorenzo de Alanis; the Dominican
+father Fray Raimundo Verart; and the examiner, Don Francisco Campos y
+Valdivia. The last-named was detained in the said port, continuing some
+investigations with which he was charged--especially that concerning
+the registration [of the galleon's cargo] for the year 1684; and in
+regard to the seizure in the same year of the property of Governor
+Don Juan de Vargas, in which he supposed there had been some formal
+act of the royal officials, with information from the viceroy,
+Marques de la Laguna--investigations all upon uncertain matters,
+little praised by his subordinates, or acceptable to them. On occasion
+of receiving a declaration, the examiner compelled General Antonio
+de Aztina to surrender his authority, at the same time appointing,
+de plenitudine potestatis [i.e., "in the fulness of his power"], as
+commander Captain Oriosola--who enjoyed this new favor no long time;
+for the viceroy, Conde de Galvez, being informed of this, immediately
+gave the appointment of commander to Don Juan de Garaicochea.
+
+On the fourteenth of January, 1690, his investigations being concluded,
+the examiner left Acapulco, and sent ahead by the fast carriers as
+many as twenty loads of his own equipage, with a servant, and verbal
+orders that the guards should give them free passage. Information of
+this exemption reached the custom-house of this city, and its special
+judge, Don Juan Jose de Ciga y Linage, stationed officers on the
+route for safety. The examiner set out, by easy stages, because he
+was conveying a woman who had lately become a mother--one of his two
+maidservants, with whom he traveled, whom he had secretly married while
+in the bay, a little before landing at Vera Cruz; and the said lady
+died, a few days after leaving Acapulco, and was buried in the town
+of Cuernavaca. The said freight and equipage arrived at Mexico, and,
+notwithstanding the orders of the examiner, the following articles
+were unloaded in the custom-house: twenty-one chests, four boxes,
+two escritoires, three boxes, one screen, four china jars [tibores],
+[170] one trunk of clothes, and four civet-cats. Permission was given
+that the animals be sent to the house of Don Geronimo de Chacon, to
+whom the above goods came directed; but the rest was kept [at the
+custom-house], the packages being opened, and a list of the goods
+being made. The said examiner being asked for a load that had gone
+astray on the journey, he replied, desiring to shield himself and
+another person, that it did not belong to him, and he knew nothing
+about it. The cause of this search was, it seems, that secret warning
+had been given [to the customs officers] of perfumes, fine stuffs,
+and other goods improper for [the possession of] an examiner.
+
+On the fifteenth of February, 1690, after various protests and
+threatening statements that the said boxes contained only his
+clothing, and especially that three contained only the private
+papers and documents of his visitation and commission, as he resisted
+surrendering the keys the locks were broken of the said three boxes;
+and in them was found not one paper. The contents of these, as in the
+boxes above mentioned, were as follows: three ornamental boxes and two
+writing-desks of lacquered wood, perfume-caskets, trays, combs, fans,
+porcelain cups, and curious articles of japanned ware. Besides these,
+there were forty cases of fans; item, eighty-six bundles of untwisted
+silk, and several libras more of spun silk; item, two hundred and
+seventy-five pieces of stuffs--satin, lampotes, ribbed silk, Chinese
+silk, velvets, and other wares from Canton; item, one hundred and
+fifty-eight onzas of musk; item, three hundred and forty-four pairs
+of silk hose.
+
+They are sure that he is bringing many more packets in the names of
+Commander Aztina and Captain Oriosola, the source of these being the
+fines--which, they say, he regulated more by the wealth than by the
+faults of the citizens of Manila, levying the fines in merchandise
+at low prices, by a third hand, that of the said commander. It is
+currently reported that the bales which he is bringing on his own
+account, under the names of other persons, exceed one hundred and fifty
+in number. It is certain that in the custom-house were opened two lots
+of goods [shipped] in the name of the said commander--one of forty
+bales of various commodities, and another of thirty bales of Canton
+silk stuffs, both without invoices; also packets, which show little
+care and arrangement. This almost entirely confirms the suspicions
+entertained, all the more as it is well known that the said commander
+has no wealth, and even hardly enough to eat. But as the merchants of
+China are here--who have come, like many of the citizens of Mejico,
+frightened by the extortions imposed in Manila--it is difficult to
+declare the [contents of the] said packets while the examiner remains
+in these kingdoms.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA
+
+
+The sources of the documents in the present volume are thus indicated:
+
+1. Dampier in the Philippines.--This document is here concluded from
+Vol. XXXVIII, q.v.
+
+2. Petition for missionaries.--A printed pamphlet in the British
+Museum, found in a volume of MSS. and pamphlets, of which this
+constitutes fol. 710-711; pressmark, "13,992; Plut. CXCI.D."
+
+3. Events in Filipinas.--From Ventura del Arco MSS. (Ayer library),
+iii, pp. 625-638, 727-732.
+
+4. The Pardo controversy.--The matter in this document is obtained from
+Retana's Archivo, i, no. iv; Ventura del Arco MSS., iii, pp. 29-56,
+523-571, 621-624, 695-726; and Salazar's Hist. Sant. Rosario,
+pp. 490-513.
+
+5. Visitation by Valdivia.--From Ventura del Arco MSS., iii,
+pp. 589-596, 641-673.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTES
+
+
+[1] The Mindanayans are the Mindanaos or Maguindanaos, the Hilanoones
+are the Ilanos; the Sologues cannot well be identified. "Alfoores"
+is a corruption of the Portuguese "Alforas," which is derived from the
+Arabic "al" and the preposition "fora" without. The term was applied
+by the Portuguese to all natives beyond their authority, and hence
+to the wild tribes of the interior. See Crawfurd's Dictionary, p. 10.
+
+[2] Apparently referring, if one may trust to Dampier's points of
+compass, to the region about Dapitan, as the Indians of that quarter
+were among the first subdued by the Spaniards in Mindanao.
+
+[3] The Tagalog word for "banana" is "saguing," which is thus almost
+identical with the Mindanaon term as reported phonetically by Dampier.
+
+[4] Cf. Dyak pangan ("kinsman, comrade, or fellow"), also panggal
+("pillow"), and panggan ("bedstead"); see Ling Roth's Natives
+of Sarawak, ii, p. xxvii. See Porter's Primer and Vocabulary of
+Moro Dialect (Washington, 1903) p. 65, where the Moro phrase for
+"sweetheart" is given as babay ("woman") a magan pangaluman.
+
+[5] Corralat had two sons, Tiroley and Uadin, but they died young
+(see Retana's edition of Combes's Hist. Mindanao, col. 738, 739). The
+"sultan" mentioned by Dampier is probably the Curay who in 1701
+fought a sort of duel with the sultan of Jolo, in which both were
+killed. (Concepcion, Hist. de Philipinas, viii, pp. 301, 302.)
+
+[6] Apparently referring to the weapon known as kris, which Dampier
+would liken to a bayonet.
+
+[7] Sarangani and Balut Islands; the large bay beyond is Sarangani.
+
+[8] The Meangis Islands are a group in the Malaysian Archipelago,
+in about latitude 5 deg. North, ninety miles southeast of Mindanao. The
+chief island is Nanusa.
+
+[9] The Lizard Point, the southernmost point of England, located
+in Cornwall.
+
+[10] This native was taken to England finally by Dampier, he having
+obtained a half-interest in him, and was there exhibited. He died at
+Oxford. See Dampier's Voyage, pp. 511, 513-517.
+
+[11] Dampier describes the Acapulco ships and their route as
+follows (chapter ix): "The Ships that Trade hither are only three,
+two that constantly go once a Year between this [i.e., Acapulco]
+and Manila and Luconia, one of the Philippine Islands, and one Ship
+more every Year to and from Lima. This from Lima commonly arrives
+a little before Christmas; she brings them Quick-silver, Cacao,
+and Pieces of Eight. Here she stays till the Manila Ships arrive,
+and then takes in a Cargo of Spices, Silks, Callicoes, and Muslins,
+and other East-India Commodities, for the use of Peru, and then
+returns to Lima. This is but a small Vessel of 20 Guns, but the two
+Manila Ships are each said to be above 1000 Tun. These make their
+Voyages alternately, so that one or other of them is always at the
+Manila's. When either of them sets out from Acapulco, it is at the
+latter end of March, or the beginning of April; she always touches to
+refresh at Guam, one of the Ladrone Islands, in about 60 Days space
+after she sets out. There she stays but two or three Days, and then
+prosecutes her Voyage to Manila, where she commonly arrives some
+time in June. By that time the other is ready to sail from thence,
+laden with East-India Commodities. She stretcheth away to the North
+as far as 36, or sometimes into 40 degrees of North lat. before she
+gets a Wind to stand over to the American shoar. She falls in first
+with the Coast of California, and then Coasts along the shoar to the
+South again, and never misses a Wind to bring her away from thence
+quite to Acapulco. When she gets the length of Cape St. Lucas, which
+is the Southernmost point of California, she stretcheth over to Cape
+Corientes, which is in about the 20th degree of North lat. from thence
+she Coasts along till she comes to Sallagua, and there she sets ashoar
+Passengers that are bound to the City of Mexico. From thence she makes
+her best way, Coasting still along shoar, till she arrives at Acapulco,
+which is commonly about Christmas, never more than 8 or 10 days before
+or after. Upon the return of this Ship to Manila, the other which
+stayeth there till her arrival, takes her turn back to Acapulco. Sir
+John Narborough therefore was imposed on by the Spaniards, who told
+him that there were 8 Sail, or more, that used this Trade."
+
+[12] The Galapagos (or "Islands of the Tortoise") belong to the
+government of Ecuador, and are located seven hundred and thirty miles
+west of that country in the Pacific. They consist of six principal
+and seven smaller islands. The largest is Albemarle. They are all
+volcanic. Of them Dampier says (chapter v): "The Gallapagos Islands
+are a great Number of uninhabited Islands, lying under, and on both
+sides of the Equator. The Eastermost of them are about 110 Leagues
+from the Main. They are laid down in the Longitude of 181, reaching
+to the Westward as far as 176, therefore their Longitude from England
+Westward is about 68 degrees. But I believe our Hydrographers do
+not place them far enough to the Westward. The Spaniards who first
+discovered them, and in whose draught alone they are laid down, report
+them to be a great number, stretching North-West from the Line, as far
+as 5 degrees N. but we saw not above 14 or 15. They are some of them
+7 or 8 leagues long and 3 or 4 broad. They are of a good heighth,
+most of them flat or even on the top; 4 or 5 of the Eastermost are
+rocky, barren and hilly, producing neither Tree, Herb, nor Grass,
+but a few Dildo-trees, except by the Sea side."
+
+[13] Captain Davis was one of the Privateers with whom Dampier had
+sailed the Spanish Main. When Captains Davis and Swan parted company
+at Realejo, Dampier went with the latter in order to become acquainted
+with the northern part of Mexico, in whose waters Captain Swan designed
+to sail.
+
+[14] The town of Realejo or Realexo, a seaport town of Nicaragua
+situated on Realejo Bay of the Pacific Ocean, and twenty miles from
+the city of Leon, whose seaport it is.
+
+[15] The town of Copiapo or Porto Copiapo, a small seaport of Chili,
+in the province of Atacama, on Copiapo Bay.
+
+[16] Captain Harris was commander of one of the privateer ships
+sailing in Spanish-American waters. When Captains Swan and Davis
+parted company he accompanied the latter. See Dampier's Voyage, p. 224.
+
+[17] Pigafetta in his relation of the first circumnavigation
+(VOL. XXXIV, p. 86) notes the word used by the inhabitants of the
+Moluccas for "one and the same thing" as "siama siama."
+
+[18] A ship captain whom Dampier (see chapter xviii) met at Achin
+on the island of Sumatra. Dampier and two of his companions started
+for Nicobar with him, but rough weather forced them to abandon the
+voyage. He importuned Dampier to make a voyage with him to Persia, but
+the latter declined, preferring to go to Tonquin with Captain Welden.
+
+[19] Captain Philip Carteret, commander of the royal British sloop
+"Swallow," in his account of his circumnavigation (1766-69) devotes
+his eighth chapter to "Some account of the Coast of Mindanao,
+and the Islands near it, in which several Mistakes of Dampier are
+corrected." See this account in Collection of Voyages (printed for
+Richard Phillips, London, 1809), iii, pp. 352-361.
+
+[20] Referring to the Basilan group, ten miles from the Mindanao coast;
+the largest island is Basilan, which has an area of four hundred
+and seventy-eight square miles, and there are forty-four dependent
+islands (fifty-seven, according to U. S. Gazetteer). (See Census of
+Philippines, i, p. 283.)
+
+[21] Probably the small island of Guimaras, which lies between Negros
+and Panay, and which is approximately as described by Dampier. Sebo
+is, of course, Cebu; but Dampier evidently means Negros Island. The
+bay was Igan.
+
+[22] Dampier here describes the bejuco, or rattan.
+
+[23] The name Mindoro is by some writers derived from mina de oro,
+as it was supposed to be rich in gold. In the document showing that
+the Spaniards took formal possession of it (for reference to which
+see our VOL. III, p. 105, note 32), it is called Luzon le menor
+("Luzon the less;" cf. p. 74).
+
+"This island was formerly called Mainit, and the Spaniards gave it
+the name of Mindoro, on account of a village called Minolo, which
+lay between Puerto de Galeras and the harbor of Ylog." (Concepcion,
+Hist. de Philipinas, viii, p. 8.)
+
+[24] From 1603 the English, as well as the Dutch, had a factory at
+Bantam for the purchase of pepper, which they maintained for eighty
+years. In 1683 the Dutch sent a considerable force from Batavia and
+expelled the English from Bantam; the latter, after being baffled at
+Achin, made a settlement at Bencoolen (1685), where they built Fort
+York. This site proved insalubrious, and in 1714 its successor, Fort
+Marlborough, was erected, away from the river. In 1824, Bencoolen
+and the factories dependent on it were given over to the Dutch,
+in exchange for Malacca and some factories in India. (Crawfurd's
+Dict. Ind. Islands, p. 48). Sellebar was a village not far east
+from Bencoolen.
+
+[25] The Bashee or Bachi Islands form the northern cluster of
+the northern group of islands, called Batanes, which lie north of
+Luzon. They are the most northern of all the American possessions in
+the Orient, and are separated from Formosa by the strait of Bachi. The
+islands composing the cluster are Mabudis, Misanga, Siayan, Tanan,
+and Y'Ami (all inhabited), the last being the most northern. The
+Batanes are composed in all of ten named islands and forty unnamed
+islets and rocks, the southern cluster including Bachi Rocks; Batan,
+the central and most important island of the group; Dequez; Diamis
+Rocks; Diego; Ibayat (or Isbayat), the largest of these islands;
+Ibugos; North; and Sabtan. The name of Bachi is sometimes extended
+to the entire group, and it is probable that Dampier's five islands,
+or at least some of them, were among the southern cluster; for Dequez
+Island is also called Goat; Ibayat, Orange; and Ibugos, Bachi. The
+group is separated on the south from the Babuyanes by the Balingtan
+Channel. The larger islands bear indications of a late volcanic origin;
+the smaller islands are generally low, and rest upon foundations of
+coral. In this group are a number of good harbors; but communication
+between the islands is difficult because of the strong currents
+in the channels and the scarcity of anchorages. The exports of the
+islands consist of lard, cocoanut oil, hogs, horses, goats, and some
+valuable woods. The soil is fertile, especially of Batan, and many
+vegetables are produced. Some of the products of the United States can
+be successfully raised. The chief industry is the raising of cattle,
+hogs, goats, and horses, the last being of superior quality and in
+demand. A catechism of the dialect spoken in the Batanes was published
+by a friar in 1834, an examination of which has led Dr. Pardo de Tavera
+to the conclusion that the aboriginal tongue differed considerably
+from the other Filipino dialects, as it contains the sound "tsch"
+and a nasal sound like the French "en." It is probable, however, that
+the present population of the Batanes, as well as of the Babuyanes,
+is composed very largely of Ibanag from the Cagayan Valley (Luzon),
+introduced there as colonists by the Dominican friars. This population
+is Christian. The earlier population must have borne considerable
+resemblance to the natives of Formosa. See Gazetteer of Philippine
+Islands, and Census of the Philippines, i, pp. 264, 448.
+
+[26] Pillau or pilau, a Turkish dish consisting of boiled rice and
+mutton fat.
+
+[27] An anchor carried at the bow of a ship.
+
+[28] The Babuyanes Islands. Salazar relates (Hist. Sant. Rosario,
+pp. 361-369) in detail a raid made by an English pirate (August, 1685)
+on the islands of Babuyanes, Bari, and Camiguin, then in charge of
+Dominican missionaries. They plundered the village of Babuyanes and
+its church; and this raid caused the deaths of two of the missionaries
+there.
+
+[29] So in the text; probably a typographical error, since Villalba
+did not leave the Philippines until 1683, and remained in Nueva
+Espana until at least 1686 (Resena biografica, ii, pp. 79-80). It is
+probable that this document was written at least as late as 1687,
+for confirmation of which see Villalba's own statement, post, that
+the mission band for which he was asking would go about eleven or
+twelve years after the last concession of this sort had been made;
+the mission before this one had reached Manila in August, 1679.
+
+[30] In the Dominican mission of 1671 came thirty-five religious
+(Resena biografica, ii, pp. 101-194).
+
+[31] The mission which came to the islands in 1694 contained
+forty-three religious, besides four others who remained in Nueva
+Espana. (Resena biografica, ii, pp. 363-457.)
+
+[32] Spanish, gentilhombre: an obsolete word, meaning a person
+sent to the king with important despatches (Velazquez's Dictionary,
+Appleton's ed.).
+
+[33] Jacinto Garcia was born in Castellar, November 6, 1654, and at
+the age of twenty-one entered the Jesuit order. Four years later
+he joined the Philippine mission, he was procurator of the Manila
+college for three years, and superior in Marinduque for the same
+time. He died at Manila, May 1, 1710. (Murillo Velarde, fol. 397 b.)
+
+[34] Fiancisco Salgado was born in Galacia, April 2, 1629, and at
+the age of nineteen became a Jesuit novice. In 1662 he went to the
+Philippines. He spent several years as a teacher, and afterwards as
+vice-rector, in the college of St. Joseph, and later was rector of
+Silang. He went to Europe (about 1674?) as procurator for his order,
+and returned in 1679 with a band of missionaries; later, he was rector
+of the Manila college, and provincial (1683). His death occurred at
+Manila, July 14, 1689. (Murillo Velarde, fol. 357.)
+
+[35] Luis Pimentel was born in Portillo, on May 30, 1612. In 1632 he
+entered the Jesuit order, and eleven years later joined the Philippine
+mission. He was a teacher in the college at Manila for two years,
+and afterward was at the head of various Jesuit residences. He was
+sent to Europe as procurator (about 1656?), and came back in 1666
+with a band of missionaries; and afterward was three times rector of
+St. Joseph college, and three times provincial (1670, 1675, 1687). He
+died at San Miguel on July 5, 1689. (Murillo Velarde, fol. 356 b.)
+
+[36] On account of a ranch which the college of San Ignacio at Manila
+possesses in the land of Meybonga, not far from the said city--its name
+being Jesus de la Pena, or Mariquina--the Society began to administer
+the sacraments, establishing the mission village of Mariquina, or
+Jesus de la Pena, by authority from Don Fray Pedro de Arce, bishop of
+Zebu and apostolic ruler of the archbishopric of Manila, on April 16,
+1630; this was confirmed by the vice-patron, Don Juan Nino de Tabora,
+governor of these islands, on April 22, 1630. The said village was
+cared for by the minister stationed in Santa Cruz, or by a father
+sent by the rector of the college of Manila, who was the director of
+the said village; for this no stipend was asked from his Majesty,
+because the minister was not permanently established there, and
+therefore the said college maintained him, without suspending, for
+lack of a stipend, the ministry in the said village. In the year 1675,
+the Society was confirmed in this administration by a royal decree,
+dated July 26, on account of the Society's right to the said parish
+having been disputed by the religious of St. Augustine, from November,
+1669. In 1681, the number of parishioners having increased, it was
+judged necessary to station a permanent minister there, for the better
+administration of the sacraments, and to build a house and a larger
+church; and, as it was thus necessary to incur larger expenses, the
+Society asked, in 1685, that to this minister be given the stipend
+which his Majesty assigns to the parish priests, in accordance with
+the number of tributes. The fiscal of his Majesty replied that in
+view of what the Society was accomplishing there, a suitable stipend
+should be given. In the year 1686, the religious of St. Augustine
+claimed that that Indian village belonged to them, as an annex to the
+ministry of Pasig. The archbishop issued an act, on October 11, 1686,
+in which, while admitting as valid the sacraments administered by
+the Society, he took from all its religious permission to minister in
+Jesus de la Pena; and on March 10, 1687, he declared that the lawful
+parish priest of the mission of Jesus de la Pena was the prior of
+Pasig, a religious of St. Augustine. In this spoliation concurred
+also, through complaisance, the governor Don Gabriel Curuzelaegui,
+who on March 23 of the said year decreed that Don Juan Pimentel,
+alcalde of Tondo, should begin proceedings against the Society in
+the mission of Jesus de la Pena, as the king commanded; and that he
+should assist the provisor in tearing down our church--which he did,
+commanding the Indians to demolish that temple. "What obedience! the
+monster of the Indias, an unnatural birth of remoteness, of power,
+and of prejudice." (Murillo Velarde, Hist. de Philipinas, fol. 345 b.)
+
+[37] Antonio Mateo Xaramillo was born at Zafra February 23, 1648,
+and became a Jesuit novice at the age of seventeen. He was sent to
+the Marianas Islands in 1678, and spent sixteen years in missionary
+labors. While rector at Manila he was sent to Spain as procurator;
+and he died at Ocana, on December 30, 1707. (Sommervogel, Bibliotheque
+Comp. Jesus, viii, col. 1321.)
+
+[38] The English pirate here alluded to was probably the ship on which
+Dampier voyaged to the Philippines, as that vessel was, at the time
+here mentioned, cruising off the coast of Luzon (see his own account of
+this, ante, p. 91). The name of Captain Swan's vessel in which Dampier
+sailed was the "Cygnet." That ship separated from Captain Davis in the
+"Batchelor's Delight" in Realejo Harbor, August 27, 1685. See Lionel
+Wafer's Voyage and description of Isthmus of America (London, 1699),
+p. 189.
+
+[39] "Soon after the beginning of the spiritual conquest of Tagalos,
+the Society undertook the administration of Cainta, a village close
+to Mariquina. Because the rectitude of its minister, Father Miguel
+Pareja, restrained some Indian chiefs, so that they should not use
+for themselves the property of the community, to the injury of the
+rest, they, seeing the excellent opportunity afforded to them by
+the ecclesiastical tribunal, endeavored to avail themselves of it,
+instigated by one who should, on account of his character and his
+obligations, have restrained them. They are an insolent people,
+and a seditious person (who is never lacking) can easily disturb the
+minds of the crowd. They hastened to complain to the archbishop of his
+ministers, and he, without hearing the Society, despoiled it of that
+administration, on March 16, 1688, and bestowed it on the religious of
+St. Augustine. The archbishop demanded aid from the governor in order
+to arrest Father Diego de Ayala and Father Pedro Cano, on complaints
+either frivolous or false, without having made any specific charges
+against them, or notifying their superiors." (Murillo Velarde,
+fol. 345.)
+
+"From the first conquest Cainta was a visita of Taytay, the
+ministry of both villages being the very same, until, its population
+increasing--Indians, and creoles or morenos (thus they designate the
+black negroes [negros atezados])--it seemed expedient to give Cainta
+its own minister." (Murillo Velarde, fol. 406b.)
+
+[40] Antonio de Borja was born at Valencia in 1644, and at the
+age of twenty-seven went to the Philippine missions. He acted as
+rector of various Jesuit colleges, and died at Manila on January 27,
+1711. (Sommervogel.) He is only mentioned incidentally by Murillo
+Velarde (fol. 383), as being an envoy to the kings of Mindanao
+and Jolo.
+
+[41] "An altar raised in churches on Holy Thursday to resemble a
+sepulchre" (Velazquez).
+
+[42] Pedro de Oriol was born at Urgel in Cataluna, August 15, 1639;
+at the age of nineteen he entered the Jesuit novitiate, and in 1663
+joined the Philippine mission. "He was two years rector of Bohol,
+three of Zebu, and two of Yloylo; seven years vice-provincial,
+and twice filled that office for Pintados; was two years rector of
+Cavite, and one year vice-rector of the college of Manila, where also
+he was minister; and, being chosen provincial, would not accept that
+office." He died September 27, 1705. (Murillo Velarde, fol. 389 b-393.)
+
+[43] Pedro Cano was born in the archbishopric of Toledo, on February
+22, 1649. In 1670 he entered the Jesuit order at Sevilla, in order
+to join the province of Filipinas, where he arrived in the following
+year. He was procurator of the college, and of the province. Being
+appointed procurator for Madrid and Rome, he died while on the voyage
+thither, near Acapulco, December 18. 1692. (Murillo Velarde, fol. 369.)
+
+[44] On September 28, 1687 (Diaz, p. 788).
+
+[45] This man held the office of sargento-mayor, and had been (before
+1683) alcalde-mayor of Cagayan.
+
+[46] In 1687 "there was an increase in the calamities of the
+country, which suffered great scarcity of provisions on account
+of the grain-fields having been ruined by the heavy and constant
+rains which fell--which injured the salt springs even more, so that
+a half-fanega of salt, which usually is worth two or three reals,
+reached the price of twelve pesos. In La Estacada there was a great
+conflagration on Good Friday, in the night, which destroyed many
+houses. In the following year the scarcity of food was increased by
+a plague of locusts, which swept away all [vegetation]; and a caban
+of rice came to be worth twenty and twenty-four reals. But what
+caused the most suffering was the havoc made by the catarrh, in the
+year 1687-88; it was a sort of epidemic sickness, which killed many
+persons, especially children and the aged; and so many were sick that
+they could hardly cultivate the fields, or do other things necessary
+for human life." (Murillo Velarde, fol. 345 b, 346.)
+
+[47] Spanish patacones; "a silver coin weighing one onza, and current
+in Batavia, Brazil, and Turkey." (Dominguez).
+
+[48] These seem to be memoranda intended by the writer of this document
+to be expanded and written out in detail.
+
+[49] Diaz says (p. 752) that the alcalde-mayor of Ilocos was a personal
+friend of the cura Maranon; and that Banguet had remained vacant
+so long because it was a very poor living, and had an unwholesome
+climate. Arqueros de Robles was probably a son of the Lorenzo Arqueros
+so noted in the native insurrections of 1660-61.
+
+[50] In the Ventura del Arco MSS. (iii, pp. 29, 30) this name
+appears as Benguet; and in Diaz's Conquistas (p. 752) as Banguet and
+Banget. The modern form is Bangued.
+
+[51] This was at first Nueva Segovia (in Cagayan), which has always
+given name to the diocese; the episcopal seat was removed (before
+Pardo's time) to Lal-lo, not far from Nueva Segovia, and later to
+Vigan, which is still the capital of that diocese.
+
+[52] Thus in Retana's print, and in the copy of this document in
+Ventura del Arco MSS.; it apparently indicates an omission in the
+original print.
+
+The hiatus is supplied by Diaz (p. 752), who says that Pardo informed
+the auditors, unofficially, that the decree of the Audiencia sent
+to Arqueros ought to have been addressed to himself, as being the
+ruler of the vacant see of Nueva Segovia. He also states that Pardo
+ordered Arqueros (who had come to Manila to consult him) to set out
+within a week for Ilocos and finish up his business there; but the
+latter could not obey this order in so short a time.
+
+[53] Alonzo Sandin, procurator-general for the Dominicans, wrote
+a long reply to Sanchez's account of the controversy between the
+Audiencia and Archbishop Pardo; therein he cites the latter's reply,
+here alluded to, which makes clear this last sentence. Pardo asks the
+Audiencia to cease giving his clerics the aid of the royal court,
+since otherwise he cannot properly control them, or maintain the
+episcopal authority in due force.
+
+[54] The dean then was Miguel Ortiz de Covarrubias; the archdeacon,
+Licentiate Francisco Deza.
+
+[55] Diaz states (pp. 754, 755) that the cabildo were angry with
+the archbishop because he had separated from the curacy of Santiago
+(then held by Gregorio Diaz de Isla) the Spaniards who lived in
+Tondo, Binondo, Santa Cruz, and other places so far away that the
+cura could not properly fulfil his duties toward them, especially to
+the dying. The archbishop acted thus, however, with the approval of
+the governor and other officials.
+
+[56] Raimundo Berart was a Catalan, and came from the Dominican
+convent at Barcelona. He was teaching law in the university of Lerida
+when he resolved to enter the Philippine mission; he arrived in 1679,
+when twenty-eight years old. He was vice-rector (1684-86) and rector
+(1686-89) of Santo Tomas; in 1689, it appears that he went to Spain,
+and in 1696 was in Mexico. Later, he was probably procurator of
+the Philippine province in Europe; and he died in Atocha, Spain,
+on April 13, 1713. See sketch of his career in Resena biografica,
+ii, pp. 195-206, where are copied several documents relating to him.
+
+[57] Several of Pardo's decrees were dated "from our palace of San
+Gabriel" (the name of the hospital).
+
+[58] A petition to this effect from the cabildo to the archbishop,
+dated April 10, 1681, is reproduced in Resena biografica, ii,
+pp. 196-198, followed by Pardo's "pastoral letter" in reply. The
+editor claims that Juan Gonzalez (afterward provisor of the see)
+signed the petition under compulsion.
+
+[59] Diaz states (p. 755) that the archbishop replied that he would
+send Verart to Spain as his attorney, which would be sufficient to
+remove him from Manila; he informed the Audiencia that Verart had not
+only rendered him great service, but had reformed many abuses in the
+ecclesiastical courts. The Dominican provincial said that the Audiencia
+must show cause for Verart's removal, or he could do nothing; for
+Verart had been assigned to the post of associate to the archbishop.
+
+[60] These men came in 1681. The last named, Fuente y Alanis, came
+as fiscal of the Audiencia.
+
+[61] Diaz states (pp. 752, 753) that Maranon came to Manila (but
+without permission to do so), a few days after Arqueros, to complain
+of the latter to the archbishop. The latter demanded an account
+of Arqueros's proceedings in the case; Arqueros presented documents
+which proved, by the complaints of many Indians, that Maranon deserved
+punishment. The archbishop therefore sustained Arqueros, and ordered
+Maranon's arrest.
+
+[62] According to Diaz (p. 756), Pardo answered that he had
+reserved Maranon's case as being the metropolitan, and because
+the cura's offenses had been committed in the territory of the
+archbishopric; moreover, that the parties in this case had accepted
+his jurisdiction. Finally, "to avoid controversies he offered to
+surrender to the bishop-elect the person of Licentiate Diego Espinosa
+Maranon--which the bishop did not accept; but afterward, without
+telling the archbishop, he sent Maranon to his curacy of Vigan,
+removing him from his prison-bounds of the city [of Manila]."
+
+[63] Diaz says (p. 757) that Pardo informed the Audiencia that he
+had not punished Herrera for these reasons, but because the latter,
+in his quarrel with Archbishop Lopez, had treated that prelate with
+insolence and even posted him as excommunicate (Diaz, p. 705); and
+when afterward he had been treated with great kindness by Pardo,
+he had conspired with the cabildo against him.
+
+[64] i.e., Requiring a previous judicial decision before the final
+sentence (Velazquez's Dictionary, Appleton's ed., 1901).
+
+[65] Adjuntos: "a body of judges commissioned or appointed jointly to
+try a cause" (Velazquez). Pardo claimed that the cabildo of Manila
+was not an exempted one (i.e., from submission to the ordinary),
+and therefore its members did not enjoy the privilege of the adjunct
+judges (Diaz, p. 757).
+
+[66] "And these two suits, of the bishop and the cantor, were the
+ones which influenced the auditors to [decide upon] his banishment,
+which was decreed on the first of October [1682]." (Murillo Velarde,
+Hist. de Philipinas, fol. 342 b.)
+
+[67] There is an apparent omission here, as the decree previously cited
+referred to the priority of San Jose college over that of Santo Tomas;
+the reference here would seem to indicate another decree, in regard to
+privileges and exemptions allowed to the Jesuits in regard to trading.
+
+[68] Salazar states (Hist. Sant. Rosario, p. 235) that this action
+was taken because "certain persons were greatly devoted to trading,
+in contravention of the pontifical decrees, and especially of
+the recent constitution of Clement IX--the said enactment giving
+the ordinary full authority to proceed against the transgressors,
+seize their goods and property, and apply these to hospitals and
+other pious purposes." Accordingly, Archbishop Pardo instituted a
+secret investigation, conducted by his notary, who threatened major
+excommunication (by a decree affixed to the ship's mast) for any
+person who refused to tell what he might know about the aforesaid
+trading. Abundant proof was found, and the goods were seized. It
+is said that there were one hundred and fifty bales belonging to
+the Jesuits.
+
+[69] Probably in view of the arguments adduced by Concepcion (Hist. de
+Philipinas, viii, pp. 41-43), showing that the decree of Clement IX
+forbade trade to all ecclesiastics, but did not authorize the ordinary
+to inflict penalties therefor on the members of the religious orders,
+that being reserved to their own superiors--the ordinary, in such
+cases, being empowered only to apply the confiscated goods for pious
+purposes.
+
+[70] Murillo Velarde and Concepcion give this name as Pizarraldi;
+and Diaz makes it Lizarraldi.
+
+[71] In the Dominican chapter-session of 1673, it was enacted that
+no religious of that order should become executor of a deceased
+person's estate, or undertake the charge of his last will. This was
+to prevent risk of accusations against the friars, so general was the
+dishonest administration of executorships in Manila--so much so that
+it occasioned no surprise in the minds of the people, although all
+complained of the grievances thus caused. "There are few fortunes
+which have not some executorship as the foundation." See Salazar's
+Hist. Sant. Rosario (Manila, 1742), p. 43.
+
+[72] It had begun in 1672, in the time of Archbishop Lopez, under
+whom judgment was rendered in favor of Sarmiento; but Lopez's death in
+1674 prevented the execution of the sentence. Various delays ensued,
+and Cordero died, being succeeded by Ortega as executor. (Salazar,
+Hist. Sant. Rosario, p. 236.)
+
+[73] Also written Carballo, Carvallo, and Caballero.
+
+[74] Spanish dote, usually meaning "dowry;" but as the ecclesiastic
+Cordero was the legatee of Dona Maria de Roa (Montero y Vidal, i,
+p. 368), the word evidently means the bequest to him, perhaps for
+the pious purposes mentioned later in this document.
+
+[75] See Concepcion's account of this affair (Hist. de Philipinas,
+viii, pp. 45-50), in considerable detail; he states that he presents
+it thus in order to vindicate the course of the Audiencia, and that
+Pardo in some of his acts exceeded his jurisdiction.
+
+[76] Diaz was a priest, and secretary of the archbishopric.
+
+[77] See accounts of this affair in Diaz's Conquistas, pp. 758, 759;
+Murillo Velarde's Hist. de Philipinas, fol. 342 b, 343; Concepcion,
+cited supra; Salazar's Hist. Sant. Rosario, pp. 236, 237.
+
+[78] A mestizo, who, to escape the punishment that awaited him,
+was denounced (at his own instance) to the archbishop as a bigamist,
+so that the latter might claim the case within his own jurisdiction,
+and the prisoner thus escape civil penalties.
+
+[79] Diaz says (Conquistas, p. 760): "Where the letter of requisition
+says, 'For doing otherwise, you will be excommunicated,' the Audiencia
+desired it to say, 'Your Grace will be excommunicated.'" Salazar says
+(p. 237) that the castellan felt insulted at this, as only the governor
+and the Audiencia had the right to use such terms to him.
+
+[80] Diaz relates this affair in detail (p. 761), and says that the
+soldiers broke open the windows and doors of the hospital (where
+the archbishop then was) to obtain entrance; also that the decree
+of banishment gave the alternative of the Babuyanes Islands, or
+Cagayan, or Pangasinan as his place of exile. Diaz cites (p. 762),
+this sentence in Sanchez's account, as proof that the latter could
+not have written it, since he took part in the arrest of Pardo.
+
+[81] According to Diaz (p. 762), the governor had given money for the
+expenses of this voyage, but on reaching Mariveles no provisions of
+any sort could be found; and the archbishop would have had no food
+if a Dominican friar who happened to be there had not quickly gone
+back to Manila to procure supplies for the prelate, and returned at
+midnight with them to Mariveles. Diaz says that this friar was not
+allowed even then to go aboard the vessel in which Pardo had embarked,
+or to exchange any word with him.
+
+[82] Spanish, vsasse de su derecho--literally, "exercise its right,"
+i.e., to govern the vacant see.
+
+[83] Diaz calls this (p. 764) "the principal fiesta of the Dominicans"
+in Manila. Santa Cruz (Hist. Sant. Rosario, p. 106) says that every
+year, when the eight days' fiesta in honor of the Virgin of the
+Rosary is celebrated in their convent, the eighth day is devoted
+to thanksgiving to Mary for the victories won by the Spaniards over
+the Dutch in 1646 (see our VOL. XXXV), which were attributed by the
+people to her miraculous aid. That fiesta of eight days was apparently
+instituted in 1637, to celebrate the dissolution of Collado's new
+congregation in Filipinas (see Santa Cruz, ut supra, p. 4; and our
+VOL. XXIX, pp. 25-27).
+
+[84] "The bishop of Troya, knowing well that the true spiritual
+jurisdiction resided in himself by the appointment of the archbishop,
+sent a Dominican religious to the convents to inform on his part their
+superiors that he gave, to those confessors whom the said superiors
+should choose, his own authority and right, so that they could absolve
+those persons who by command or compulsion had taken part in the
+arrest of the archbishop from the excommunication which they might
+have thus incurred--excepting the principal offenders--until he should
+be restored to liberty and they should perform public penance and
+give juratory security, as is ordained by the sacred canons." (Diaz,
+Conquistas, p. 764.)
+
+[85] The interdict was not only an ecclesiastical censure, but a
+penalty, entailing usually privation of certain sacraments (save in
+cases of strict necessity), of all the divine offices, and of church
+burial. All solemnities and public festivals were suspended, except on
+the five great feasts of Christmas, Easter, Pentecost, the Assumption
+of our Lady, and Corpus Christi. The churches remained closed, the
+crucifix and statues veiled, the bells and organ mute. This penalty
+might be general, over the whole city, kingdom, or country; or merely
+particular, indicted on a named corporation, see, church, or the like;
+again, it might be either local or personal as to its effects. It might
+be imposed not only by a pope, but by any competent church prelate,
+even by a bishop; and could apply to any secular or ecclesiastical
+ruler (except of course the pope), to a university or college, or
+to any body of clergy, regular or secular. The earliest mention of
+a church interdict apparently is Ferraris's allusion to one in the
+fourth century, of which, however, no details are available. In
+Frankish chronicles, interdicts date from the sixth century, the
+first of these being at Rouen, in 588; Bishop Praetextatus having been
+murdered, by order of Queen Fredegonda, while officiating in his own
+church, the senior suffragan of that province, Leudovald of Bayeux,
+after consultation with his fellow-bishops, laid all the churches
+of Rouen under interdict until the assassin of the bishop should be
+discovered. But prior to the eleventh century general interdicts are
+but rarely mentioned in church history. It does not appear that there
+was any ritual for either general or particular interdicts, apart from
+the usually concomitant sentence of excommunication--which in former
+ages itself entailed also interdict on the persons or places named in
+the decree of penalty. The interdict was usually laid under conditions
+that amendment, reparation, or restitution should atone for the wrong
+done, at which the interdict would be lifted. According to present
+church law, bishops are empowered, as delegates of the Holy See, to
+put under interdict particular churches, and the like. See Moroni's
+Dizionario (Venezia, 1845), xxxvi, p. 49; Ferraris's Bibliotheca
+(Paris, 1853), article "Interdictum;" Guerin, Les Petits Bollandistes
+(Paris, 1878), iv, pp. 378-382; and Addis and Arnold's Catholic
+Dictionary, article "Interdict."--Rev. T. C. Middleton, O.S.A.
+
+[86] Diaz states (ut supra) that the archbishop's provisor,
+Juan Gonzalez, took refuge in the Dominican convent, which was
+soon surrounded with armed soldiers. At the advice of friends,
+Gonzalez gave himself up, and was kept a close prisoner in his own
+house--"guards being placed there at his cost; and penalty was imposed
+of major excommunication and 500 pesos, if he should talk with any
+person outside." As soon as Santo Domingo was blockaded, a decree of
+the Audiencia was made known to all the convents that they must not
+ring the bells for an interdict. To prevent this being done at Santo
+Domingo, "they scaled the convent through the hall of the Inquisition,
+which is above the main entrance, and ten soldiers went up to the
+bell-tower." Next day, the friars rang a small bell to call the people
+to mass, but the guards would not allow any person to enter the church.
+
+[87] Salazar gives, a detailed account of Villalba's imprisonment
+(Hist. Sant. Rosario, pp. 233, 234), and claims that he was hurried
+from his convent at Binondoc, without cloak or hat, or bed, although
+he was in poor health; and that, when the ship was compelled to put
+back to Manila, the Audiencia would not allow him to remain there, but
+at once despatched him to the Franciscan infirmary at Nueva Caceres,
+where he remained until the next galleon sailed for Acapulco.
+
+[88] This document, as being written by Sanchez, the secretary of
+the Audiencia of Manila, was probably addressed to the president of
+the royal Council of the Indias.
+
+Sandin (Respuesta, fol. 3 b) asserts that this relation by Sanchez
+was printed at the Jesuit college in Manila, with the date here given;
+that it had not been published there when the Acapulco galleon sailed;
+but that in Mexico City many copies of it were already in circulation
+before the royal mails reached that city from Acapulco.
+
+[89] Apparently referring to Francisco de Arcocha; but Diaz calls him
+(p. 775) equerry (caballerizo) of the new governor.
+
+[90] Bartolome Marron, a native of Asturias, made his profession in
+the Dominican convent at Valladolid, July 8, 1667, and came to the
+Philippines in 1671, at the age of twenty-five. Having studied two
+years at Santo Tomas, he was a lecturer in that college until 1680,
+and in 1684 was appointed its rector. In 1686 he became provincial,
+and afterward was in charge of a mission in Pangasinan, and of the
+church in Binondoc; and was again (1696-1700) rector of Santo Tomas. He
+filled many other important offices in his order, at various times;
+and finally died in Manila, January 22, 1717. See sketch of his life in
+Resena biografica, ii, pp. 145-155--including an account of a notable
+lawsuit brought against him, and the regulations made by him for the
+inmates of Dominican convents in and near Manila.
+
+[91] Cristobal Pedroche made his profession at Toledo, January
+22, 1659, and arrived in the Philippines in 1667. He spent many
+years in labors among the Chinese, in the Parian and San Gabriel;
+and at various times filled high offices in his order--among them,
+that of provincial. In June, 1684, he was imprisoned at Cavite, and
+afterward sent to Mexico; but the viceroy permitted him to return
+to the Philippines. He died at Manila on August 20, 1715, at the
+age of seventy. See sketch of his life in Resena biografica, ii,
+pp. 82-100--which includes a letter by him (June 20, 1684) on the
+ecclesiastical disturbances of that time.
+
+[92] Juan de (Ibanez) Santo Domingo was born (about 1640) near
+Calatayud. His early education was obtained in a Dominican convent
+at Zaragoza, and he was afterward a member of the household of Bishop
+Palafox y Mendoza. Later, he entered the Dominican convent at Ocana,
+where he made profession in 1661. At the age of twenty-six he came
+to the Philippines, and spent eighteen years in the missions of
+Pangasinan. After 1686, he lived at Manila, being twice provincial
+(1690 and 1706), and occupying other important posts. He died there
+January 15, 1726. (Resena biografica, ii, pp. 26-34.)
+
+[93] Francisco Antonio de Bargas, a native of Madrid, professed in the
+Dominican convent at Salamanca, in 1673, at the age of nineteen. Six
+years later, he arrived at the Philippines. The first nine years he
+spent in Manila, mainly as a teacher in Santo Tomas; from 1688 to
+1696, he labored in the missions of Bataan, and afterward in those of
+Zambales--except 1698-1702, which he spent at Manila. He died there,
+on October 7, 1708. (Resena biografica, ii, pp. 219, 220.)
+
+[94] Antonio Calderon professed in the Dominican convent at Salamanca
+(in 1664, erroneously says Resena), and came to the Philippines in
+1658. He labored in the Cagayan missions until 1682, when he was
+elected provincial. He, with Fray Pedroche was arrested on June 3,
+1684, and sent to Mexico. Thence he returned to Spain, and died at
+Mombeltran, at the end of December, 1685.
+
+[95] Alluding to General Marcos Quintero, a friend of the Dominicans,
+who at his death (1703) appointed Fray Bartolome Marron (note 90,
+ante) executor of his estate. This led to a notable lawsuit, brought
+against Marron by the heirs of Quintero, which was appealed to Mexico
+and even to Rome; the proceedings continued for many years, the suit
+coming to an end only in 1726, nine years after Marron's death. (See
+Resena biografica, ii, pp. 151-154.)
+
+"Barangay," as used here, is evidently a bit of slang meaning "gang"
+or "clique," in modern phrase.
+
+[96] From the context, esto here seems to designate the former
+governor, Vargas.
+
+[97] Gines de Barrientos, titular bishop of Troya, who was assistant to
+the archbishop. Juan Duran, titular bishop of Sinopolis, was assistant
+to the bishop of Cebu (then Diego de Aguilar). Andres Gonzalez was
+bishop of Nueva Caceres (or Camarines); and Francisco Pizarro, of
+Nueva Segovia. These were Dominicans, save Duran, who belonged to the
+Order of Our Lady of Mercy; and Pizarro, who in 1681 was a member of
+the cabildo of Manila cathedral.
+
+[98] Spanish, se le picaba sobradissimamente la retaguardia--literally,
+"its rearguard was entirely cut to pieces."
+
+[99] i.e., "Hurrah for [the bishops of] Troya!"
+
+[100] Elio Antonio de Nebrija (or Lebrija) was a celebrated linguist
+and great Latinist, who wrote various works. He was born about the
+year 1444, and died in 1522. (Dominguez, Diccionario nacional.)
+
+[101] Apparently a play on words, mingled with a sarcastic comment
+on Fray Gaspar. One may hazard the conjecture that the latter (who
+was a noted grammarian) is here mentioned in contempt as knowing more
+of grammar than of current affairs, and being able only to understand
+events actually completed and past, without the foresight to perceive
+how these affect the future.
+
+[102] i.e., no more than two--referring to the "dual" number in
+Greek declension.
+
+[103] A copy of this act may be found in Ventura del Arco MSS.,
+iii, pp. 513-515; it is dated "at our house on the river of Manila,
+October 22, 1684."
+
+[104] An allusion to the well-known quotation, Parturiunt montes,
+nascetur ridiculus mus (line 139 of the Ars poetica of Horatius).
+
+[105] The decree of the Audiencia which ordered the restoration of
+the archbishop to his see was dated October 24, 1684. He returned to
+Manila on November 16.
+
+[106] This man was delegated by the city of Manila, being one of its
+regidors, according to Diaz (Conquistas, pp. 776, 777).
+
+[107] Diaz states (Conquistas, p. 777) that Curuzelaegui declared on
+this occasion that if the home government should be offended at his
+restoring the archbishop, he would consider punishment by them for
+this cause "a great honor, even if it be capital." Diaz praises him as
+"one of the best governors that these islands have had; affable, pious,
+magnanimous, wholly disinterested, and very liberal. He also said that
+he had come to Filipinas to be poor, where other governors had come
+to be rich. This he said very truly, for in Espana and Indias he had
+possessed much wealth--gained in the many voyages that he had made as
+commander of the fleet and galleons to Peru and Nueva Espana--which
+his ostentation and liberality had consumed."
+
+[108] Diaz gives (ut supra, pp. 778, 779) the list of these: the
+auditors and Governor Vargas; the preceding alcalde-mayor of Manila
+(either Morales, Camacho or Pimentel), and that of Camarines (Juan de
+Verastein); Juan Sanchez, secretary of the Audiencia; Juan Gallardo,
+castellan of Cavite; Sargento-mayor Alonso de Aponte y Andrade,
+and Captains Jose de Somonte, Francisco de Urrutia, Diego del Pozo
+y Gatica, and Miguel Machuca; Admiral Pedro de la Pena; and Captain
+Baltasar de Lerma, notary-public. The military officers were readily
+absolved, as not having been free to act, when ordered to proceed
+against the ecclesiastics.
+
+[109] Diaz says (p. 779) that the archbishop at this time "absolved the
+auditors ad reincidentiam, within the palace, with no other witnesses
+than the governor, and embraced them and gave them the kiss of peace."
+
+[110] Spanish, irregular. In this usage irregularidad means, according
+to Dominguez, "a canonical impedimenta for receiving or exercising
+holy orders, on account of certain natural defects which produce
+incapacity, or of crimes or illegal acts which are committed."
+
+[111] See copy of this edict in Ventura del Arco MSS., iii,
+pp. 517-521. The statement in our text regarding penalties is
+inaccurate. The edict required that all confessions made to members
+of the cabildo be made anew; all persons married by them must appear
+before the archbishop within three days (or ten days for those without
+the jurisdiction of the city), under penalty of excommunication for
+European Christians, and for all others fifty lashes and three months
+in jail; and the same penalties for those on whom the cabildo had
+conferred holy orders, licenses to preach, chaplaincies, etc. This
+act was dated November 29, 1684.
+
+[112] Diaz says (p. 779): "But this caused so many dissensions,
+and opinions from the theologians, that it was found necessary to
+issue another act (January 8, 1685) in which the archbishop declared
+the former act null, and ordered that those [married persons] should
+again appear in court for the revalidation of their marriages."
+
+[113] i.e., "they are exulting, as do the victors when they have
+seized their prey."
+
+[114] "An image of a monstrous serpent which is displayed in front
+of the procession on Corpus Christi Day--doubtless alluding to the
+eternal humiliation of the demon, conquered for ever by Jesus Christ"
+(Dominguez, Diccionario nacional).
+
+[115] Among these were the Franciscan provincial, Francisco de Santa
+Ines, and the Augustinian writer Casimiro Diaz (as the latter states
+in his Conquistas, p. 782).
+
+[116] "Vargas then alleged his being exempt, as a knight of Santiago;
+but even then the archbishop did not revoke the excommunication, the
+ex-governor-general of the islands being required to live alone in a
+solitary house on the islet of the Pasig River, without dealings or
+communication with any person" (Montero y Vidal, Hist. de Filipinas,
+i, p. 372).
+
+[117] This affair had been initiated by Vargas. "The sultan of Borneo
+sent an ambassador, soliciting the establishment of commercial dealings
+with Filipinas. Vargas responded with another and distinguished
+embassy, his agent being Don Juan Morales de Valenzuela, who [later]
+brought about the cession of the island of Paragua which that sovereign
+made in 1705." (Montero y Vidal, ut supra, p. 364.)
+
+[118] A metrical composition which is measured in three verses,
+of which two form a rhyme (Dominguez).
+
+[119] Spanish, en calxas y en jubon: literally, "in breeches and
+jacket."
+
+[120] Tomas de Andrade was born in Toledo, December 2, 1619,
+and entered the Jesuit order at the age of seventeen. In 1643 he
+departed for the Philippines, where he professed in 1654. He was
+connected with San Jose college some twenty years, twice as rector;
+acted as provincial during six months; and rector at Antipolo and
+Cavite, and minister among the Tagals. He died at Manila on May 15,
+1689. (Murillo Velarde, Hist. de Philipinas, fol. 356 b.)
+
+[121] Alejo Lopez was born July 16, 1645, at Albalate, Spain, and
+at the age of seventeen became a Jesuit novice. Four years later,
+he came to Manila, and spent three years in the Visayan missions,
+being afterward connected with the college in Manila in various
+capacities. Finally going to Europe on business of the order, he died
+while on the return journey, September 18, 1693 (Murillo Velarde,
+fol. 369).
+
+[122] Isidro Clarete was born in 1627, and came to the islands in
+1662, where he completed his studies, and became a teacher in the
+college at Manila (Murillo Velarde, ut supra).
+
+[123] Pedro Lopez a native of Malvenda, Spain, was born on November
+21, 1613. When nineteen years old, he entered the Jesuit order,
+and in 1643 came to the Philippines. He spent most of his life in
+ministering to the Tagalog Indians, and translated into their language
+(in which he was remarkably proficient) the Roman catechism and other
+writings. He died at Indang on February 13, 1689. (Murillo Velarde,
+ut supra, fol. 356 b.)
+
+[124] Spanish, con la risa del conejo; literally, "with the smile
+of a rabbit." Dominguez describes it as "the apparent smile which
+comes to some creatures at death, as the rabbit; and, by extension,
+the phrase is applied to a person who smiles when he has cause for
+sorrow or resentment."
+
+[125] Diaz (p. 781) expresses pity for Vargas as thus situated, "unable
+to have conversation or dealings with any one except the officials of
+his residencia, and mostly through an agent; deserted by every one,
+for his servants, as being also under residencia, had enough to do
+in attending each to his own defense. His only consolation was the
+companionship of his spirited wife, Dona Isabel de Ardila, who inspired
+him with courage and strength. It is certain that Don Juan de Vargas
+was not the worst governor of Filipinas; but he was unfortunate in his
+disagreeable and harsh manner," and his friend Francisco Guerrero, "a
+very astute and sagacious man," whose aid would have been invaluable,
+was then in Nueva Espana, having deserted his patron to save himself.
+
+[126] Apparently referring to the "ordinary," or usual ecclesiastical
+court.
+
+[127] Spanish, auto de legos; a decree issued by a superior tribunal,
+prohibiting to an ecclesiastical judge the cognizance of a suit that
+is purely civil, and between laymen, referring it to a competent judge.
+
+[128] Diaz says (Conquistas, pp. 781, 782) that this residencia,
+taken by Juan de Zalaeta, was the most bitter and obstinate ever known
+in the islands, for it lasted four years, and its records occupied
+twenty large volumes.
+
+[129] Salazar (Hist. Sant. Rosario, pp. 131-133) gives an account of
+this assignment. He asserts that the Zambals had formerly been under
+the charge of the Recollects, who in more than seventy years had been
+unable to convert that tribe. In 1676 the natives themselves asked for
+Dominican teachers; some were sent, at which the Recollects complained,
+as an intrusion on their field, and the Dominicans withdrew. In 1678
+Juan de Vargas came as governor, and, the Zambals again asking for
+Dominicans, the governor induced the Recollects to accept Mindoro in
+lieu of Zambales, making over the latter to the Dominican order. The
+latter gave up these missions in 1712. (See Resena biografica, i,
+pp. 486-504.)
+
+Concepcion (Hist. Philipinas, viii, pp. 47) declares that the
+Recollects were unwilling to surrender their Zambal missions, yielding
+to the compulsion and threats of the archbishop and the governor;
+and that the natives themselves were angry at the proposed change,
+but were pacified by their Spanish alcalde-mayor.
+
+[130] A loose note in Ventura del Arco MSS. (iii, p. 555), evidently
+made by that compiler from some writing of 1685, states that the
+citizens complained of the lack of vessels every year for their trade,
+and for this blamed his henchmen. Two of these, whom he employed in
+business affairs, were arrested, Fabra and Gallardo.
+
+[131] Spanish, dijo tijeratas; literally, "talked scissors."
+
+[132] Spanish, que vuelvan las nueces al cantaro; literally, "the
+nuts will roll back into the jar."
+
+[133] A dish composed of various kinds of meat and vegetables boiled
+together--used figuratively for any medley or miscellaneous collection.
+
+[134] i.e., "From the anger and hatred and ill-will of a Dominican
+friar, deliver us, O Lord."
+
+[135] Some account of Palu's coming to Manila will be found in
+VOL. XLII, in Diaz's history of the Augustinian missions.
+
+[136] In the text, deposicion, an obvious error of the transcriber.
+
+[137] Spanish, sentian no haber materia sobre que cayesse dicha
+dispensacion. That is, the prebends had not deserved censure, and
+therefore ought not to need dispensation.
+
+[138] This was Jose de Nava y Albis.
+
+[139] That is, on the route by the "Northern Sea," the Atlantic Ocean.
+
+[140] The Spanish phrase inverts this order of thought, hacer lo que
+habia deshecho.
+
+[141] Referring to the exile of Archbishop Guerrero in 1636.
+
+[142] Thus in the text, indicating some omission, probably by the
+transcriber.
+
+[143] The verses do not appear in our text. Diaz states (p. 787) that
+Zalaeta gave the pasquinades to Captain Jose de Toledo to distribute
+among the soldiers; but instead of doing so Toledo gave them to
+Endaya, who handed them to the governor. It was afterward proved that
+the author of the lampoons was the cantor Herrera, who was thereupon
+imprisoned; later, he was sent to the fort of Paynauen in the Zambal
+country, where Zalaeta had been sent after his arrest for conspiracy.
+
+The Jesuit Father Pedro de Salazar wrote from (Manila) Taitay, on
+the nineteenth [sic] of 1687, to the procurator-general at Madrid,
+Luis de Morales, that he was warned from Manila to be careful of what
+he wrote, since they feared that there would be an inspection of the
+letters [in the mails]. He said that since the return of Archbishop
+Pardo from banishment many arrests were made: of the auditors, to whom
+they attributed a pasquinade which had been posted; of negroes and
+Indians, servants and slaves, who were put to the torture, in order
+that they might say what suited the convenience [of the authorities];
+and of ecclesiastics. Also, that a pasquinade had been published,
+in which was represented the king, stretched upon the ground, with
+the archbishop drawing off his breeches; the governor was stabbing
+him with a dagger, or else cutting off his head; Father Verart held
+him by the legs; and Andaya, who was the minion, was helping them. It
+concluded with the verses:
+
+
+    "A Catalan and a Frenchman,
+    A foolish governor,
+    A pastor who is no pastor--
+    These hold me as you see."
+
+
+Finally, the Dominican friars have entire sway over the archbishops,
+and are talking of finding out who are the authors of the papers
+that were published against them. (Ventura del Arco MSS., iii,
+pp. 639, 640.)
+
+[144] Diaz says (p. 787) that the governor himself, concealed in a
+window of his palace, watched Viga's house, and saw Bolivar's servant
+enter it; this man was arrested on leaving the house, and searched,
+a letter from Viga to Bolivar being found in his shoe. Thereupon the
+auditors and Zalaeta were promptly arrested.
+
+[145] Diaz says (pp. 786, 788) that Dona Josefa "ruled her husband
+more than was desirable," and that "she uttered such contemptuous
+reproaches against the governor and the archbishop, as she was a very
+resolute and spirited woman, and extremely haughty and fearless,"
+that the governor felt obliged to send her into banishment.
+
+[146] Regarding Herrera's arrest, see note 63, ante, p. 159.
+
+[147] This and several other documents that are unsigned are
+presented here--accepting them as credible, on account of their
+evident authenticity--in order to fill out the relation of the Pardo
+controversy with relations made at the time, and by participants in
+those events. All except the final extract from Salazar are obtained
+from Ventura del Arco's transcripts from MSS. in the collection
+of Jesuit papers that was seized by the Spanish government when it
+expelled that order from Spain and her colonies.
+
+[148] Spanish, missas de Aguinaldo means "a Christmas or New Year's
+present;" the word is derived, according to Echegaray's Diccionario
+general etimologico (Madrid, 1887), from the Celtic word eguinand,
+of the above meaning. Evidently these masses were made the vehicle
+for heathen allusions or symbols, if not for actual rites.
+
+[149] This was the treasurer (and afterward cantor) of the cathedral,
+Jeronimo de Herrera y Figueroa.
+
+[150] This was the Dominican friar Francisco Villalba.
+
+[151] Pardo was sent to Lingayen, "certainly not to give him the
+consolation of residing among his brethren of the order, but to
+keep him under the authority of the notorious Don Francisco Pizarro,
+bishop of Vigan [i.e., of Nueva Segovia], with whom he had just had
+an annoying controversy" (Resena biografica, i, p. 476).
+
+[152] "Under penalty of 4,000 pesos; on the ground that his spiritual
+jurisdiction was suspended and barred, by virtue of his banishment"
+(Diaz, Conquistas, p. 762).
+
+[153] "The dean opened all the prisons of his tribunal, liberating
+all the prisoners therein--although among these there were several
+bigamists; and one who was not only a heretic but a leader of
+heretics. For, among other heresies which he taught, one was
+that God had a beginning, [a doctrine] which only very learned men
+understood. Another was a prebend whom his illustrious Lordship held
+as a recluse in our college, for heinous and atrocious crimes, whose
+final end was a sentence of degradation, and delivery to the secular
+arm; the dean settled this case, without examining the documents
+in the case (which they did not find), by condemning him to six
+months of banishment to a country house of recreation." (Salazar,
+Hist. Sant. Rosario, p. 242.)
+
+[154] "They say, peace, peace: when there was no peace" (Jeremias
+6: 14).
+
+[155] Salazar gives some instances of this (p. 245): in the Dominican
+churches the minister refused to say mass until certain persons
+who had injured or offended ecclesiastics should go out of the
+consecrated walls.
+
+[156] Salazar states (pp. 246-249) that the provincial Calderon was
+making his visitation in Cagayan at the time of Pardo's banishment;
+that on his return to Manila (September, 1683) he called a council
+of the most prominent Dominicans, and asked their opinions as to
+Pardo's exile, the government by the cabildo, and their own duty
+toward those concerned in these events; and that, in accordance with
+their decision, he ordered all his friars to remain in their convents,
+and hold no intercourse with those persons.
+
+[157] Salazar here alludes to the relation of all these ecclesiastical
+affairs in the first part of his history, pp. 224-268. As it is so long
+and detailed, we have preferred to use here the account which he gives
+in his biography of Pardo; but have preserved, in our annotations,
+the most important and interesting matter found in the former one.
+
+[158] Thus in the text, but it should read "forty-eighth." Salazar
+there relates how Vargas, "in the same year in which he banished the
+archbishop," suffered the confiscation at Acapulco of all the goods
+that he had shipped, "with little credit to his reputation and notable
+expense to his estate;" and, as excommunicated by the Church, Vargas
+had much to atone for and to suffer until his death. The auditor
+Grimaldos died, soon after Pardo's banishment, "from a painful
+disease, in which the tongue with which he had spoken so much evil
+of his illustrious Lordship became rotten, and the arm with which he
+had seized the anointed of the Lord was withered." The auditor Viga,
+who went to seize the Dominican provincial, Calderon, died in exile,
+in Cagayan, without having consented to make his confession. He and
+his colleague Bolivar had been sent there "for a certain sedition
+which they were plotting" against Cruzalaegui. [Murillo Velarde says
+(fol. 344) that they were plotting to put Zalaeta in the governor's
+place.] The wife of Bolivar "died at Orion, impenitent, unwilling
+to confess; when her husband heard of this, he performed condign
+penitence for his sins, and publicly professed his detestation of his
+transgressions, and thus he gained absolution from the censures--but,
+returning from his exile, he died on the way." Calderon "also died very
+suddenly, although at the hour of death he acknowledged his errors,
+and, to secure absolution from the censures, made the usual profession
+of detestation." The fiscal Alanis, "the only one who experienced,
+while living, the punishment from the king our sovereign which deprived
+of their offices all the members of the royal Audiencia, died in Mexico
+in great poverty and humiliation. The same fate befell the usurping
+dean," Miguel Ortiz de Covarrubias. The cantor Figueroa was sentenced
+to degradation, and to be delivered to the secular powers, "which was
+afterward commuted, for valid reasons, to perpetual banishment to the
+Marianas Islands, where he ended his days in a thousand miseries." The
+bishop of Cagayan died so suddenly that he could not be confessed or
+absolved. The Jesuit Ortega died at sea, while en route to Madrid
+to complain of Pardo; and although he received the viaticum, his
+mind was so occupied, first and last, with accusations against the
+archbishop, that he scandalized all the people in the ship. He died
+practically an excommunicate, not having rendered his accounts for
+the executorship to the archbishop, and having been absolved only by
+"the usurping Dean, who had no jurisdiction." "The two soldiers who
+carried out the father provincial died suddenly," being stabbed to
+death, one by an infidel Chinese, the other on leaving the house of
+his mistress. A man who wounded the provisor--in trying to murder him;
+his name was Manuel Ortafan, and his wife had brought suit against him
+for divorce, before the ecclesiastical tribunal (Diaz, Conquistas,
+p. 766)--was sentenced to a short exile; "but God was not satisfied
+with that light punishment, and accordingly took upon Himself vengeance
+against that man, afflicting him with leprosy. This made him blind,
+and he finally reached the utmost poverty, begging alms, with a boy
+to guide him, before the gates of the convents."
+
+The spirit of this account is echoed--rather curiously, for so late
+a date as 1891--in Resena biografica, i, pp. 478-480.
+
+[159] Pardo offered to his Dominican province the sum of thirteen
+thousand pesos, to be used as endowment for three chairs--law,
+medicine, and pharmacy--and for some scholarships in Santo Tomas; but
+the gift was declined, as the province was neither able nor willing
+to take the responsibility of administering in (Resena biografica,
+i, pp. 477, 478.)
+
+[160] In the Ventura del Arco MSS. (iii, p. 761) is an extract from
+a letter by the Jesuit Pedro Cano, dated May 26, 1690, which says:
+"On December 31, 1689, they found Archbishop Pardo dead in his bed,
+sine cruce et sine luce, without any sacrament, through the negligence
+of the people of his household and his own confidence that he was
+to live a long time. For some days all his body had been swollen,
+and he said that, thanks to the Lord, he was gaining flesh. In
+the agonies of death, he called to his servants, who were buried in
+sleep; no one heard him except Don Juan de Cazorla, a cleric whom the
+archbishop kept a prisoner under his own apartment, in fetters--who
+did not dare to go upstairs, lest the archbishop should learn that
+his fetters were removed at night. The prelate's body, wrapped in a
+loose gown, was carried to the house where Auditor Grimaldos died;
+and from there to Santo Domingo, where four days later it was buried."
+
+[161] He came with commission to bring suit against the auditors who
+had banished the archbishop.
+
+[162] He had died toward the end of the year 1683, aged more than
+seventy years.
+
+[163] Nicolas Cani was born in 1611, a Sardinian by nation; and became
+a Jesuit novice March 27, 1628. In 1653 he entered the Philippine
+missions, and labored in the Visayan Islands. Murillo Velarde states
+(fol. 367 b) that he was unable to learn further particulars as
+to Cani's life and ministries, except vague statements as to his
+admirable character and some few incidents in which he figured. The
+date of his death is not recorded, but signatures by him existed that
+were made in 1671.
+
+[164] The letter following this says that the visitor and Audiencia
+reached Manila in 1687; Montero y Vidal says 1688; and Diaz's editor,
+1689. It seems more probable that 1688 is the correct date, from
+various allusions made in these letters and by Diaz.
+
+[165] Referring to the dispute between the two universities of San
+Jose and Santo Tomas; and the placing, by the latter, of the royal
+arms over its entrance.
+
+[166] That is, October 19. This saint was Pedro Garavito, born at
+Alcantara in 1499; at the age of fifteen he entered the Franciscan
+order, and was ordained in 1524. In 1554 he instituted a reform,
+exceedingly austere and rigorous, in his order, and erected the
+first convent for these discalced Franciscans at Pedroso. Other
+houses adopted this rule, and in 1562 these reformed convents were
+freed by papal orders from the jurisdiction of the general of the
+Franciscan order. Garavito died on October 18 of that same year;
+he was canonized in 1669 as St. Peter of Alcantara. (Baring-Gould's
+Lives of the Saints, xii, pp. 487-494.)
+
+[167] Spanish buen; but obviously used with satirical meaning.
+
+[168] When Bolivar was arrested, he was sent to "a small fortified post
+in the province of Cagayan, called Tuao, where he remained until the
+investigating judge who came to Manila in 1688 ordered him to return
+[to that city], but he died on the way" (Diaz, p. 788).
+
+[169] Andaye, a fortified town at the mouth of the Bidassoa River,
+which forms part of the boundary between Spain and France and empties
+into the Bay of Biscay. Andaye is directly opposite Fontarabia
+in Spain.
+
+[170] These jars are still highly valued by the Malays; see Furness's
+mention of this, with photographic illustration, in his Borneo
+Head-Hunters, pp. 125, 126.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands,
+1493-1898--Volume 39 of 55, by Various
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE IS., 1493-1898 (39/55) ***
+
+***** This file should be named 28899.txt or 28899.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/8/8/9/28899/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.